APAC Manual

Application Peripheral Administration Center
APAC Software Manual

Release 5.0
DOCUMENT NUMBER: 714570
Version: 01
Innovative Systems, L.L.C. Mitchell, South Dakota

APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Document History
Document History
Version Changes Release Date

01 DCR-1268. Derived from and similar to 714560. June 23, 2004
Acknowledgements:
Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® ME, Windows NT® Workstation 4.0, Windows® 2000 Profes-
sional, and Windows® XP Professional are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
Pentium® is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation.
 2004 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

All rights reserved.
Printed in United States of America.
Information subject to change without notice.
Innovative Systems™ and Application Peripheral™ are trademarks of Innovative Systems, L.L.C.
Document: 714570 -i- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Document History
Document: 714570 -ii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Introduction ........................................................ 1

1.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Chapter 2 - Installing the APAC Software ................................. 5

2.1 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.2 Client Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.3 Local Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 3 - Getting Started .................................................. 21

3.1 Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2 Define a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.3 Define an AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 4 - Getting Around APAC ........................................ 27

4.1 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.1 Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.2 Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.3 The APAC Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.2.4 Viewing and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.2.5 Viewing and Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.2.6 Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.3 The APAC Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3.1 APAC Map Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3.2 Map Item Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.3.3 Map Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.3.4 Map Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.4 AP Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chapter 5 - APAC Administration ......................................... 43

5.1 User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.1.1 Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.1.2 User Information Fields Described . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.1.3 Access Privilege Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.1.4 List Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.1.5 Viewing User Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Document: 714570 -iii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
5.2 Adding a New AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

5.3 Administration of Multiple APs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.4 Renaming an AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.5 Deleting an AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.6 License Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.6.1 License Code Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.7 AP Region Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.7.1 AP Region Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.7.2 AP Region List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.8 AP Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.8.1 Direct RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.8.2 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.8.3 X.25 ITI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.8.4 Term Serv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.8.5 LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.8.6 AP Communications Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.8.6.1 SMDI/MWI NPA-NXXs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.8.6.2 MWI Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.8.7 Services Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.8.7.1 Push Additional Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chapter 6 - AP Transfer ...................................................... 71

6.1 Transfer to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.2 Transfer from AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.3 Transfer New Announcements to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.4 Reload All Announcements to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.5 Transfer New Fragments to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.6 Reload All Fragments to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.7 Reload All Base Fragments to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.8 Transfer Program File to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.9 Transfer ROM Software to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.10 Transfer 6811 Software to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.11 Configure DSP and Transfer Software to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.12 Reload DSP Software to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.13 Transfer File to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.14 Patch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chapter 7 - SS7 Network ...................................................... 85

7.1 Configuring the SS7 Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.1.1 Linkset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.1.1.1 SS7 Links Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.1.1.2 Linksets Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.1.1.3 Combined Linksets Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.1.2 Linkset Route Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.1.2.1 Point Codes Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.1.2.2 Current Linkset Routes Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Document: 714570 -iv- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Chapter 8 - Global Title Translation ...................................... 91

8.1 CLASS GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8.1.1 Define a CLASS GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8.1.2 Viewing and Editing CLASS GTT Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
8.1.3 Convert CLASS to Generic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
8.2 Generic GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
8.2.1 Define a Generic GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
8.3 Generic GTT Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.4 Add Calling Name GTT to Generic GTT Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.5 Set AP Options for GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 9 - Calling Name Delivery and Dip Counts .................. 99

9.1 Calling Name NPA-NXXs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.2 Calling Name GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
9.2.1 Global Title Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
9.2.2 Adding Calling Name GTT to the Generic GTT Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.3 Add a Calling Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.4 File Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.4.1 Calling Name Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.4.2 City/State Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
9.5 File Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9.5.1 Calling Name File Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9.5.2 City/State File Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.6 Calling Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.7 Calling Name Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.8 City/State Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9.9 Calling Name Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9.9.1 Calling Name Audit Window Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
9.10 Calling Name Dip OPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.11 Update the Concerned Point Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
9.12 Calling Name Dip Count Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9.13 Calling Name Internet Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.14 Calling Name Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9.14.1 Calling Name Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
9.14.2 Calling Name Dip OPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.14.3 Calling Name IP Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.14.3.1 IP Delivery Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.15 Set AP Options for Calling Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 10 - Call Management Features (CMF) ...................... 137

10.1 The CMF Customer Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.2 Setting the AP Options for the Call Management Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3 Backup CMF Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.4 Restore CMF Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Document: 714570 -v- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Chapter 11 - Time .............................................................. 141

11.1 Managing the Time in the Application Peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
11.1.1 Switch Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
11.1.1.1 Configuring Switch Time Monitoring in the AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
11.1.1.2 Configuring Switch Time Monitoring in the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.1.1.3 Displaying the Switch Time Monitor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.1.2 Manually Setting the AP Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.1.3 Daylight Savings Time Management for the AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.1.4 Network Time Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.1.4.1 Add a Time Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
11.1.4.2 Delete a Time Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
11.1.5 Time Zone Offset Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
11.1.5.1 Point Code Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11.1.5.2 Dialed Number Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chapter 12 - Trunk Configuration ........................................ 155

12.1 T1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.2 Trunk Configuration – Unit 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.3 Trunk Configuration – Unit 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12.4 Trunk Group Configuration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.5 Trunk Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.5.1 Trunk Service Window - Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.5.2 Trunk Service Window - ISUP SLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.5.3 Trunk Service Window - Dedicated Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
12.5.4 Service Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12.6 Set AP Options for Trunk Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
12.7 SIP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.7.1 Phone Number to SIP Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
12.7.2 SIP to Phone Number Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Chapter 13 - CNA Service Management ................................. 185

13.1 Update Change Number Announcement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
13.2 Change Number Announcement Peg Count Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Chapter 14 - Service Logic Management ................................ 189

14.1 Service Logic Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
14.1.1 Tab Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
14.2 Service Logic Management Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
14.3 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
14.3.1 Services Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
14.3.2 Services Tab Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
14.4 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
14.4.1 Table Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
14.4.2 Tables Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
14.5 Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Document: 714570 -vi- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
14.5.1 Log Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

14.5.2 Logs Tab Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
14.6 Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
14.6.1 Announcements Tab Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
14.7 APs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
14.7.1 APs Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
14.7.2 APs Tab Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
14.8 Service Logic Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
14.8.1 Viewing a Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
14.8.2 Viewing More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
14.8.3 Shutting Down a Log or Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14.8.4 Locking a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14.8.5 Unlocking a Log or Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
14.8.6 Viewing Documents and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
14.8.7 Reading Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
14.8.8 Resizing Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
14.8.9 Changing the Alarm Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
14.8.10 Querying a Single Table Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
14.8.11 Importing Service Logic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
14.8.12 Backing Up Tables to the AP's Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
14.8.13 Deleting Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
14.8.14 Modifying Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
14.8.15 Resizing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14.8.16 Re-deploying Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
14.8.17 Running a SLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
14.8.18 Retrieving AP SLP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.9 Transferring or Deploying SLPs to AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.9.1 Service Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
14.9.2 Assign Subsystem Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
14.9.3 Global Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
14.9.4 AMA Service Logic Program ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
14.9.5 Service Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14.9.6 Service Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
14.9.7 Additional Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
14.9.7.1 Activate Service Immediately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
14.9.7.2 Enter NPA-NXXs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
14.9.8 Service Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
14.10 Add-ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
14.11 Manage Service NPA-NXX Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
14.11.1 NPA-NXX Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Chapter 15 - Announcement Management ............................. 237

15.1 Announcement Builder Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15.1.1 Released and Working Set Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15.1.2 Modifying an Existing Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15.1.3 Creating a New Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15.1.4 Releasing Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15.2 Fragment Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
15.2.1 Adding Customer-Made Sound Files to APAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
15.2.2 Fragment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
15.2.3 Announcement Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Document: 714570 -vii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
15.3 Announcement Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

15.4 Announcement Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
15.5 Defining Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
15.5.1 Announcement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
15.5.2 Parameter Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
15.5.3 Parameter Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
15.5.4 Parameter Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
15.5.5 Creating a New Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
15.6 Building Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
15.6.1 Announcement Fragments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
15.6.2 Announcement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
15.6.3 Announcement Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
15.6.4 Announcement Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
15.6.5 Creating Your Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
15.7 Testing the Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
15.7.1 Playing Your Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
15.8 Viewing Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
15.8.1 Announcement Information | Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
15.8.2 Announcement Information | Fragments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
15.8.3 Announcement Information | APs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
15.9 View Announcements on the Current AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
15.10 Announcement Information Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
15.10.1 Announcement Information Toolbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
15.10.2 Viewing Announcement Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
15.10.3 Deleting Announcements or Fragments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
15.10.4 Viewing Announcements for the Current AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
15.10.5 Transferring Selected Fragments/Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
15.10.6 Reloading Selected Fragments/Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
15.11 Set AP Options for Announcement Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Chapter 16 - Scheduling ...................................................... 263

16.1 Scheduling APAC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
16.1.1 Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
16.1.2 Input and Output from the Scheduled Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
16.1.3 Turning the Scheduler On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
16.1.4 Viewing the APAC Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
16.2 AP Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
16.2.1 Scheduling AP Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Chapter 17 - Database Maintenance ...................................... 271

17.1 Backing up the APAC Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
17.2 Viewing Database Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
17.3 Cleaning Up the Calling Name Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
17.4 Exporting Calling Names to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
17.5 Conversion for NPA Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
17.5.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
17.5.2 Performing the NPA Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Document: 714570 -viii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
17.6 Compress Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

17.7 Repair Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
17.8 Announcement/Fragment Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
17.8.1 Audit Fragments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
17.8.2 Audit Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Chapter 18 - AP Maintenance Functions ................................ 283

18.1 AP Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
18.2 AP File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
18.3 Shutdown AP Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
18.4 Restart AP Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
18.5 AP Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.5.1 Backing Up All Tables on the AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.5.2 Scheduling AP Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.6 AP Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
18.6.1 Alarm Summary Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
18.6.2 Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
18.6.3 Audible Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
18.6.4 Monitor Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
18.7 Trunk Group Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
18.7.1 Right-hand Pane Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
18.7.2 Overall T1 Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
18.7.3 T1 Channel Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
18.7.4 Trunk Group Channel Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
18.7.5 Trunk Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
18.8 SS7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
18.8.1 Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
18.8.2 Link Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
18.9 Ethernet Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
18.9.1 Ethernet Switch Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
18.10 Ethernet Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
18.10.1 Trace Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
18.10.1.1 Trace Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
18.10.2 Trace Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
18.11 Voice Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
18.12 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Appendix A - Communications ............................................. A-1

A.1 Modem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.1 Recommended Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.2 MultiTech Modem Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.3 PC Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.1.4 Connecting the Modem to the AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.1.5 Setting up Callback and Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.1.6 Disabling Callback and Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2 X.25 Intelligent Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.3 Terminal Server Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Document: 714570 -ix- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
A.4 High Speed Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Appendix B - Calling Name Flags ......................................... B-1
Appendix C - Creating Custom Announcements ......................... 3

C.1 FragEdit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C.2 How to Extract a Portion of an Existing Fragment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C.3 How to Record a New Fragment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C.4 Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C.5 Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Appendix D - Warnings ...................................................... D-1
Document: 714570 -x- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 List of Figures
List of Figures
Chapter 1 - Introduction ........................................................ 1
Chapter 2 - Installing the APAC Software ................................. 5

Figure 2-1 APAC Installation CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 2-2 APAC Installation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 2-3 Welcome Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 2-4 Enter your Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 2-5 Choose Destination Location (Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 2-6 Choose Network Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 2-7 Choose Destination Location (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 2-8 Choose the Setup Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 2-9 Review settings before copying files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 2-10 Installation Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 2-11 Installation Complete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 2-12 Client Install APAC Folder Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 2-13 Installation Preparation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 2-14 Installation Welcome Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 2-15 Enter your Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 2-16 Review settings before copying files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 2-17 Client Install Setup Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 2-18 Installation Complete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 2-19 APAC Installation CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 2-20 APAC Installation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 2-21 Welcome Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 2-22 Enter your Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 2-23 Choose Destination Location Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 2-24 Choose the Setup Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 2-25 Review settings before copying files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 2-26 Resources Usage and Progress Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 2-27 Setup Complete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Chapter 3 - Getting Started .................................................. 21

Figure 3-1 Login Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 3-2 New User Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 3-3 New AP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 3-4 AP Communications Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 3-5 LAN Communications Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 3-6 Announcement Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Document: 714570 -xi- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Figure 3-7 Set AP Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Chapter 4 - Getting Around APAC ........................................ 27

Figure 4-1 The APAC Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 4-2 Viewing the Selected AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 4-3 The APAC Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 4-4 AP Popup Configuration Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 4-5 Service Logic Program Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 4-6 Announcement Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 4-7 Calling Name Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 4-8 AP Alerts Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 5 - APAC Administration ......................................... 43

Figure 5-1 User Access Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 5-2 User Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 5-3 New AP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 5-4 Rename Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 5-5 APAC Map Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 5-6 Default AP Region Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 5-7 APAC with Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 5-8 AP Region List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 5-9 AP Region List with Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 5-10 AP Communications Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 5-11 Terminal Server Communications Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 5-12 LAN Communications Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 5-13 AP Communications Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 5-14 Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 5-15 SMDI NPA/NXX Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 5-16 Add New SMDI NPA/NXX Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 5-17 SS7 Point Code Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 5-18 Services Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 5-19 Push Additional Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 6 - AP Transfer ...................................................... 71

Figure 6-1 Transfer to AP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 6-2 Transfer from AP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 6-3 Select Announcements to Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 6-4 Announcement Reload Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 6-5 Select Fragments to Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 6-6 Fragment Reload Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 6-7 Base Fragment Reload Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 6-8 DSP Configuration and Load Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Document: 714570 -xii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Figure 6-9 Patch Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chapter 7 - SS7 Network ...................................................... 85

Figure 7-1 SS7 Network Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 7-2 Linkset Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 7-3 SLC Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 7-4 Linksets Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 7-5 Combined Linksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 7-6 Linkset Route Management Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chapter 8 - Global Title Translation ...................................... 91

Figure 8-1 Add GTT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 8-2 Convert CLASS to Generic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 8-3 Generic Global Title Translation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 8-4 Global Title Translation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 8-5 AP Options – GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 9 - Calling Name Delivery and Dip Counts .................. 99

Figure 9-1 NPA-NXX Entry Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 9-2 Add Calling Name GTT to Generic GTT Tables Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 9-3 Calling Name Entry Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 9-4 City/State File Input Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 9-5 APAC Progress Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 9-6 Transfer Service Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 9-7 Calling Name List Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 9-8 Calling Name List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 9-9 Calling Name Report Options Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 9-10 Calling Name Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 9-11 City/State Report Criteria Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 9-12 State Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 9-13 City/State Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 9-14 Calling Name Audit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 9-15 Calling Name Dip OPCs Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 9-16 Calling Name Concerned Point Codes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 9-17 Calling Name Dip Count Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 9-18 Calling Name Dip Count Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 9-19 Calling Name Internet Expansion Config Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 9-20 Enter New Link Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 9-21 Found Number Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 9-22 Calling Name Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 9-23 Calling Name Access Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 9-24 Calling Name OPC Entry Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Document: 714570 -xiii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Figure 9-25 Calling Name Dip OPCs Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Figure 9-26 Dip OPC Entry Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 9-27 Calling Name IP Delivery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 9-28 IP Delivery Entry Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 9-29 IP Delivery Numbers Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 9-30 AP Options - Calling Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Chapter 10 - Call Management Features (CMF) ...................... 137

Figure 10-1 CMF Customer Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 10-2 AP Options - CMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Chapter 11 - Time .............................................................. 141

Figure 11-1 Time Monitoring Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 11-2 Manage AP's Time Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 11-3 Selecting the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 11-4 Manage AP’s Time - Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 11-5 Manage AP’s Time - Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 11-6 NTP Server Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 11-7 Add NTP Server Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 11-8 Manage AP’s Time - TZ Offsets Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 11-9 Point Code Offset Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 11-10 Add PC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 11-11 Dialed Number Offset Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 11-12 Add DN Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Chapter 12 - Trunk Configuration ........................................ 155

Figure 12-1 T1 Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 12-2 T1 Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 12-3 Trunk Configuration – Unit 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 12-4 Automatic Number Announcement Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 12-5 Trunk Configuration – Unit 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 12-6 Trunk Group Report - Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 12-7 Trunk Group Report – ISUP SLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 12-8 Sample Announcement Service Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 12-9 Example ISUP Trunk Group Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 12-10 Properties Window Showing Virtual Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 12-11 Dedicated Announcements Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 12-12 AP Options - Trunk Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 12-13 SIP Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 12-14 Add New Phone Number to SIP Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 12-15 Edit Phone Number to SIP Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 12-16 Delete Phone Number to SIP Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Document: 714570 -xiv- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Figure 12-17 Add New SIP to DN Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Figure 12-18 Edit SIP to DN Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 12-19 Delete SIP to DN Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Chapter 13 - CNA Service Management ................................. 185

Figure 13-1 Change Number Announcement Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 13-2 Change Number Announcements Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 13-3 Change Number Announcement Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Chapter 14 - Service Logic Management ................................ 189

Figure 14-1 Service Logic Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 14-2 Service Logic Management Toolbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 14-3 Services Tab of Service Logic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 14-4 Tables Tab of Service Logic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 14-5 Logs Tab of Service Logic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 14-6 Announcements Tab of Service Logic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 14-7 APs Tab of Service Logic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 14-8 Select Log Read Mode Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 14-9 Set Log Maximum Entries Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 14-10 Set Log Alarm Threshold Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 14-11 Query Single Entry Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 14-12 Importing a Service Logic Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 14-13 Update Table Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 14-14 Change Table Size Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 14-15 Service Re-deployment Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 14-16 Service Logic Deployment Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 14-17 Assign Subsystem Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 14-18 Global Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 14-19 AMA Service Logic Program ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 14-20 Service Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 14-21 Service Logs - Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 14-22 Service Logs - Redundant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 14-23 Additional Options - Activate Service Immediately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 14-24 Additional Options - Enter NPA-NXXs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 14-25 Service Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 14-26 Sample Add-ons Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 14-27 Manage Service NPA-NXX Mappings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 14-28 Example Add Button Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 14-29 AP Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Chapter 15 - Announcement Management ............................. 237

Figure 15-1 Announcement Builder Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Document: 714570 -xv- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Figure 15-2 Fragment Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Figure 15-3 Fragment Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 15-4 Sample Fragment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 15-5 Sample Announcement Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 15-6 Announcement Definition Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 15-7 Defining the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 15-8 Building the Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 15-9 Say Value Parameter Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 15-10 Dictate Announcement Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 15-11 Testing the Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 15-12 Announcement Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 15-13 Announcement Information | Fragments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 15-14 Announcement Information | APs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 15-15 Viewing Announcements for the Current AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 15-16 Announcement Information Toolbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 15-17 Viewing Announcement Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 15-18 Set Parameter Values Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 15-19 AP Options - Announcement Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Chapter 16 - Scheduling ...................................................... 263

Figure 16-1 APAC Event Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 16-2 Scheduler Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Chapter 17 - Database Maintenance ...................................... 271

Figure 17-1 Database Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 17-2 Clean-up Options Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 17-3 Export Calling Name Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 17-4 Export Calling Name Progress Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 17-5 AP Conversion Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 17-6 Audit Fragments and Announcements Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Chapter 18 - AP Maintenance Functions ................................ 283

Figure 18-1 AP Command Line Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 18-2 Collect Optional Files Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 18-3 File Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 18-4 Shutdown AP Units Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 18-5 AP Restart Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 18-6 AP Alarm Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 18-7 Audible Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 18-8 Trunk Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 18-9 Trunk Status Excerpt - Overall T1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 18-10 Trunk Status Excerpt - T1 Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Document: 714570 -xvi- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Figure 18-11 Trunk Status Excerpt - MF Trunk Group Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Figure 18-12 Trunk Status Excerpt - ISUP Trunk Group Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 18-13 Trunk Status Window showing Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 18-14 SS7 Maintenance Window without Linksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 18-15 SS7 Maintenance Window with Linksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 18-16 Ethernet Switch Not Found Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 18-17 Ethernet Switch Config Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 18-18 Advanced Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 18-19 Confirm Status Change Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 18-20 Save Changes Confirmation Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 18-21 Ethernet Switch Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 18-22 Ethernet Switch Statistics Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 18-23 Ethernet Trace Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 18-24 Trace Control Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Figure 18-25 Capture Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 18-26 Ephemeral Ports Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 18-27 Filters Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 18-28 Filter Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 18-29 Pre-defined Packet Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 18-30 Basic Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 18-31 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 18-32 Add Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 18-33 Rename Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 18-34 Ethernet Trace Output Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 18-35 Frame Summary Filter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 18-36 Enter Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Figure 18-37 AP Options - Voice Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 18-38 Voice Recognition Config Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 18-39 Enter New Link Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 18-40 Pending Changes Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Appendix A - Communications ............................................. A-1

Figure A-1 Setup for Modem Programming using a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Figure A-2 AP Communication Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Figure A-3 Modem and AP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Figure A-4 Sample Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A-5 Terminal Server Communications Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Figure A-6 Sample LAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-7 LAN Communications Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Document: 714570 -xvii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Appendix B - Calling Name Flags ......................................... B-1
Appendix C - Creating Custom Announcements ......................... 3

Figure C-1 Announcement Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Figure C-2 FragEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure C-3 FragEdit Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Appendix D - Warnings ...................................................... D-1
Document: 714570 -xviii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 1 - Introduction
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 General Description
The Application Peripheral Administration Center (APAC) software is the means by which you
interface with an AP System(s). APAC provides the ability to easily configure the AP and provi-
sion the enhanced services provided by the AP.
The APAC software is run on a desktop computer and requires Windows NT® Workstation 4.0,
Windows® 2000 Professional, or Windows® XP Professional to run (for more information
regarding the system requirements of the PC see Section 1.1.1 - "System Requirements"). It may
be installed and run on a single PC or over a network. The installation procedure is outlined in
Chapter 2 - "Installing the APAC Software".
APAC is used to provide an interface to the AP and to perform the administration, operation, and
maintenance functions required by the AP. The functions that are handled by the APAC software
include:
Service Logic Program Administration Call Management Features
Calling Name Delivery SS7 Administration and Maintenance
NPA-NXX definitions Global Title Translation Information
Announcement Administration Alarm Monitoring
Trunk Administration
Several methods of communication between the computer and the AP are supported. They are:
• Direct RS232
• Modem (see Section A.1 - "Modem Information")
• X.25 (see Section A.2 - "X.25 Intelligent Terminal Interface")
• Terminal Server (see Section A.3 - "Terminal Server Communications")
• LAN (see Section A.4 - "High Speed Terminal Interface")
The APAC software provides the security of password protection and the ability to assign differ-
ent levels of access for each user. The APAC software administrator must assign a user with a
Login ID and password before the user is able to access the software. The level of access is deter-
mined by the administrator upon assignment of the Login ID (user name) and password.
Document: 714570 -1- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
1.1.1 System Requirements
A personal computer (PC) is required for the APAC program. APAC is used to administer one or
more AP systems and keep a master copy of the APs’ service databases. The APAC PC should,
at a minimum, meet the following requirements:
• Windows NT® 4.0 Workstation, Windows® 2000 Professional, or Windows® XP Profes-
sional
• 300 MHz Pentium II processor (or equivalent)
• 64MB RAM
• 500 MB hard disk drive or greater
• 30 MB available for APAC installation
• 50 MB available for each AP to be administered
• 1 3.5” floppy disk drive
• CD-ROM drive
• Tape backup drive
• 1 available serial port
• 1 available parallel port
• 9600 bps or greater modem
• 15” color monitor
• Mouse and 101-key keyboard
In general, a PC exceeding the above requirements in processor, RAM, and disk drive capacities
is strongly recommended. Increasing the capacity of any or all of these elements will result in
faster APAC response, thereby increasing user productivity and satisfaction.
When selecting a PC to be used to run APAC, you should also consider the size of the AP sys-
tem(s) that will be administered. That is, consider things like the number of calling names or the
number of SLPs that will be contained on the AP system(s). Large AP systems will result in
larger APAC databases and, therefore, require more PC disk space, more memory, and faster pro-
cessors to manipulate these databases.
Please contact Innovative Systems at (605) 995-6120 for more information.
Additional requirements will vary depending on the communication method used between the PC
used to run APAC and the AP system(s). Each communication method and any additional
requirements associated with it are listed below.
• RS-232 - When using a normal RS-232 connection, the APAC software requires the follow-
ing to operate: An unused serial port.

Version: 01
• Modem - If a modem is used instead of a direct RS-232 serial connection, a modem is

needed for both the personal computer and the AP. Please see Section A.1 - "Modem Infor-
mation" in this manual for specific modem information.
• X.25 ITI - If the X.25 ITI connection is used, the serial ports of both the APAC PC and the
AP must be connected to a packet assembler/dissembler (PAD). Please see Section A.2 -
"X.25 Intelligent Terminal Interface" in this manual for more information about the X.25
ITI connection method.
• Terminal Server - If the Terminal Server connection is used, the APAC PC must have an
ethernet connection to the terminal server while the AP has a serial connection to the termi-
nal server. Please see Section A.3 - "Terminal Server Communications" in this manual for
more information about the Term Serv connection method.
• LAN - If the LAN connection is used, the APAC PC must be connected directly (without a
terminal server) to an AP through a Local Area Network using IP based protocols. Please
see Section A.4 - "High Speed Terminal Interface" in this manual for more information
about the LAN connection method.

Version: 01

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 2 - Installing the APAC Software
Chapter 2 - Installing the APAC Software
2.1 Installation Procedure
NOTES:
• Before you begin the APAC software installation, it is strongly recommended that you
exit all Windows programs and disable any anti-virus software for the duration of the
installation. Otherwise, the APAC installation may fail.
• If you are upgrading from a previous release of APAC, perform a backup of the con-
tents of your current APAC folder before installing the new APAC software.
• APAC installation on Windows® 95, Windows® 98, and Windows® ME is not sup-
ported.
The full APAC software package consists of one CD-ROM disc and requires Windows NT®
Workstation 4.0, Windows® 2000 Professional, or Windows® XP Professional to run.
There are two basic configurations for an APAC installation: local computer installation, or net-
work installation. The local computer installation copies all APAC files to the target computer’s
hard drive. The network installation option installs most APAC files to a shared network file
server’s hard drive. If you plan on using APAC only from one computer, then you can follow the
installation instructions in Section 2.1.3 - "Local Installation". If you are going to access APAC
from multiple computers then you must follow the installation instructions in Section 2.1.1 - "Net-
work Installation" and in Section 2.1.2 - "Client Installation". It is preferred that APAC be
installed to a shared network file server using instructions in Section 2.1.1, and that the Cli-
ent Installation instructions in Section 2.1.2 be used for any subsequent computers where
APAC must be accessed.
2.1.1 Network Installation
This section contains step-by-step instructions for installing APAC on a network so that multiple
computers can access the shared APAC and share the same APAC databases. These installation
instructions only need to be performed on one computer. Subsequent network installations of
APAC should be done using the client installation method (see Section 2.1.2 - "Client Installa-
tion").
Before beginning the installation, an APAC folder will need to be created on a shared or mapped
network drive. To do this, navigate to the shared or mapped drive. Once the drive has been
located, right-click on an open space on the drive and select the New | Folder command from the
popup menu. Change the name of the new folder to APAC.

Version: 01
Install APAC:
1. Locate the APAC installation CD. It will be packaged in a jewel case similar to Figure 2-
1.
Figure 2-1 APAC Installation CD
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD contains an Autorun file, which
will automatically initiate the APAC Installation menu (see Figure 2-2) when the CD is
inserted into the CD-ROM drive. Press the Administrative Install button in the APAC
Installation menu when you are ready to begin the installation. To ensure that the Autorun
file is activated, you should be logged into Windows before you insert the CD.
Figure 2-2 APAC Installation Menu
If you already have the CD inserted into your CD-ROM drive, or the Autorun feature does
not activate, press the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen and select the Run
command. A dialog box will appear. Enter the following path in the dialog box and click
the OK button to begin loading the software onto the PC:
<CD drive letter>:\apac\disk1\setup.exe

Version: 01
3. When the APAC setup program is ready, the Welcome screen (see Figure 2-3) will be dis-
played. Click the Next button to continue the installation.
Figure 2-3 Welcome Screen
4. The Customer Information window will be displayed as shown below in Figure 2-4. Type
in your name and also your company name.
Figure 2-4 Enter your Customer Information
5. The Choose Destination Location screen (see Figure 2-5) will be displayed next.

Version: 01
Figure 2-5 Choose Destination Location (Default)
The default location for the APAC installation is the C:\Program Files\APAC directory.
You will need to change this to the network location. To do this, first click the Browse...
button to open the Choose Folder dialog (see Figure 2-6) and then navigate to the mapped
network drive that goes to the server on which you want APAC installed and shared for
other users.
Figure 2-6 Choose Network Folder
Once the APAC folder on the correct network drive is selected, press the OK button to
close the Choose Folder dialog. Notice that the location in the Destination Folder section
of the Choose Destination Location screen has changed to the location of the mapped net-
work drive (see Figure 2-7).

Version: 01
Figure 2-7 Choose Destination Location (Network)
If the destination folder is correct, press the Next button to continue the installation.
6. The Setup Type screen will now be displayed. Your choices will be Complete and Cus-
tom. The Complete installation will install everything. The Custom installation will let
you choose which components to install. The Setup Type screen is displayed in Figure 2-
8.
Figure 2-8 Choose the Setup Type
Select either Complete or Custom and click the Next button to continue the installation.
7. The next screen that is displayed will allow you to review your settings before copying
files to the target computer. This is illustrated below in Figure 2-9. Click the Next button
to continue the installation.

Version: 01
Figure 2-9 Review settings before copying files
8. The installation will now copy the program files to the appropriate locations on the target
computer. The status of the installation will be illustrated by the progress bar displayed in
Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 Installation Progress
During the copying of files, APAC will check to see if the files that are being copied
already exist, and whether or not the files need to be updated.
9. When the APAC installation is complete, the screen in Figure 2-11 will be displayed.
Press the Finish button to close this screen and exit the installation program. At the end of
the installation you may be presented with a screen that asks if Windows should be
restarted. Make sure that you know the username and password to log back onto the PC
after the restart, and then select the option to Restart Windows Now.

Version: 01
Figure 2-11 Installation Complete Screen
10. Once you are back at the Windows desktop, continue to Chapter 3 - "Getting Started" for
instructions on starting and logging into APAC.
2.1.2 Client Installation
This section contains step-by-step instructions for installing APAC on local computers that are
sharing the databases of a network installation of APAC (see Section 2.1.1 - "Network Installa-
tion"). The client installation only copies to the local computer those files that must be located on
that computer, all other APAC files are shared from the network file server. This allows any
APAC component to be updated in a single location (the network installation) should the need
arise. This is the recommended installation method for local computers sharing APAC databases.
Before beginning a client installation, APAC must already be installed on a shared or mapped net-
work drive (see Section 2.1.1 - "Network Installation").
Install APAC:
1. Navigate to the shared or mapped network drive where APAC is installed and expand the
APAC folder.
2. Locate and expand the ClientInstall folder in the APAC network folder (as illustrated in
Figure 2-12) and run the setup.exe program in this folder.

Version: 01
Figure 2-12 Client Install APAC Folder Contents
3. After setup.exe is started, the installation preparation progress screen (Figure 2-13) will be
displayed.
Figure 2-13 Installation Preparation Screen
4. Once the install preparation is complete, the initial welcome screen is displayed. Press the
Next button in this screen to continue the installation.

Version: 01
Figure 2-14 Installation Welcome Screen
5. The Customer Information window will be displayed as shown below in Figure 2-15.
Type in your name and also your company name, and then press the Next button to con-
tinue the installation.
6. The next window that is displayed will allow you to review your settings before copying
files to the installation directory. This is illustrated below in Figure 2-16.

Version: 01
7. The Setup Status screen will be displayed while the installation actions are performed.
Figure 2-17 Client Install Setup Progress Screen
8. When the installation is complete, the following screen will be displayed. Press the Finish
button to close the screen and exit the installation program.

Version: 01
Figure 2-18 Installation Complete Screen
Continue to Chapter 3 - "Getting Started" for instructions on starting and logging into
APAC.
2.1.3 Local Installation
This section contains step-by-step instructions for installing APAC on a single computer. If this
computer is the only computer being used to administer APAC, then it is important that back-
ups of the APAC directory on this computer are made on a regular basis.
Install APAC:
1. Locate the APAC installation CD. It will be packaged in a jewel case similar to Figure 2-
19.
Figure 2-19 APAC Installation CD

Version: 01
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD contains an Autorun file, which
will automatically initiate the APAC Installation menu (see Figure 2-20) when the CD is
inserted into the CD-ROM drive. Press the Install APAC button in the APAC Installation
menu when you are ready to begin the installation. To ensure that the Autorun file is acti-
vated, you should be logged into Windows before you insert the CD.
Figure 2-20 APAC Installation Menu
If you already have the CD inserted into your CD-ROM drive, or the Autorun feature does
not activate, press the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen and select the Run
command. A dialog box will appear. Enter the following path in the dialog box and click
the OK button to begin loading the software onto the PC:
<CD drive letter>:\apac\disk1\setup.exe
3. When the APAC setup program is ready, the Welcome screen (see Figure 2-21) will be
displayed. Click the Next button to continue the installation.

Version: 01
Figure 2-21 Welcome Screen
4. This next window will allow you to review your settings before copying files to the cor-
rect location. This is illustrated below in Figure 2-22. Click the Next button to continue
the installation.
5. The Choose Destination Location screen (see Figure 2-23) will be displayed next.

Version: 01
Figure 2-23 Choose Destination Location Screen
The default location for the APAC installation is the C:\Program Files\APAC directory. If
this is correct, press the Next button and move to the next step. If you would like to install
APAC to another directory, press the Browse... button to open the Choose Folder dialog,
enter the desired installation path, press the OK button to close the Choose Folder dialog,
and then press the Next button in the Choose Destination Location dialog to continue the
installation.
6. The Setup Type screen will now be displayed. Your choices will be Complete and Cus-
tom. The Complete installation will install everything. The Custom installation will let
you choose which components to install. This screen is displayed in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Choose the Setup Type
Select either Complete or Custom and click the Next button to continue the installation.

Version: 01
7. This next window will allow you to review your settings before copying files to the target
computer. This is illustrated below in Figure 2-25.
8. The installation will now copy the program files to the appropriate locations on the target
computer. The status of the installation will be illustrated by the progress bar displayed in
Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Resources Usage and Progress Bars
9. Now that the APAC installation is complete, the screen in Figure 2-27 will be displayed.
Press the Finish button to close this screen and exit the installation program. At the end of
the installation you may be presented with a screen that asks if Windows should be
restarted. Make sure that you know the username and password to log back onto the PC
after the restart, and then select the option to Restart Windows Now.

Version: 01
Figure 2-27 Setup Complete Screen
10. Once you are back at the Windows desktop, continue to Chapter 3 - "Getting Started" for
instructions on starting and logging into APAC.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Chapter 3 - Getting Started
Certain conventions are used throughout this manual. The term AP refers to the AP System and
the term APAC refers to the AP Administration Center software. Italicized phrases refer to menus
and command functions. For example, Insert|New AP means that the New AP command in the
Insert menu should be selected.
NOTE: The appearance of some of your APAC windows, including common control win-
dows (e.g., Printer Setup, Message Boxes, report menu settings), may differ from the sam-
ples included in this manual and the APAC online help due to software updates, hardware
updates and local PC differences in Windows or other third-party software versions.
3.1 Logging In
At this point, the APAC software should be installed. Run the program by clicking on the START
button, selecting PROGRAMS, selecting the AP group and clicking on the APAC icon. If
desired, a shortcut may be placed on the Windows desktop to allow quicker access to the soft-
ware.
The following figure depicts the login window for the APAC Software:
Figure 3-1 Login Window
The first time the software is run, a master Login ID (user name) and password must be used to
access the software. The initial login and password is:
Login ID: MASTER Use all capital letters.

Password: STRT Use all capital letters.
To login, do the following:

Version: 01
1. Enter the user name in the Login ID window. (Type MASTER if you are running APAC
for the first time.)
2. Press the Tab key or Enter key, or click on the Password field to move the cursor to the
next field.
3. Enter the Password. (Type STRT if you are running APAC for the first time.)
4. Click on OK or press <ENTER> to complete the login procedure.
3.2 Define a User
The MASTER / STRT login ID and password allows User Administration functions only. There-
fore, after logging in, access will be given only to the Insert|New User and View|Users functions.
See Chapter 5 - "APAC Administration" for more detailed information defining a user.
1. Add a Login ID for a system administrator with the Insert|New User function or click the
New User button, . The New User window will appear.
Figure 3-2 New User Window
2. Enter the Login ID (user name) and Password desired, and then select the Administrator
user access category. (The Administrator category has access privileges to all functions.)
Any additional users may be added at this time or they can be added later by the system
administrator (or anyone else with the access privilege to add new users).
3. Save these changes with the File|Save function (or use the Ctrl+S accelerator key or click
the in the upper right-hand corner of the window).
4. Exit the APAC program.
5. Run the APAC program again. This time use the Login ID and Password that you defined
for the system administrator.

Version: 01
3.3 Define an AP
1. Define a new AP using the Insert|New AP function. The following window will appear
when inserting a new AP. This function is used to give a name to an AP System and to set
the communication information for that particular AP. All of the database information
administered by the APAC program is stored relative to the AP currently selected. Until
an AP is defined, the only function available is User Administration. See Chapter 5 -
"APAC Administration" for more information on defining a new AP.
Figure 3-3 New AP Window
2. Enter the desired name for the AP in the AP Name field. Each AP System is typically
identified by a site name. If the AP Regions feature has been enabled, you will have to
either choose an existing region for the AP in the AP Region selection box, or enter a new
region in the selection box. If the AP Regions feature has not been enabled, the AP
Region selection box will not be displayed. See Section 5.7 - "AP Region Management"
for more information about the AP Regions feature.
3. Enter the PC-to-AP Communication settings for this AP. It is recommended that you set
up LAN communications at this time, but you may use the default communication set-
tings of COM1 and Connection Method - Direct RS232 if you do not know the exact set-
tings, or are not concerned about AP communication now. This information can be filled
in at a later time. If you want to set up LAN communications for the AP at this time, con-
tinue to the next step, otherwise skip to Step 10. See Appendix A - "Communications" for
more information on the AP communications settings.
4. To set up LAN communications for the AP, click the Configure button. The AP Commu-
nications Configuration screen (see Figure 3-4) will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 3-4 AP Communications Configuration
5. Enter the IP Addresses, Subnet Masks, and Gateway Addresses that you have reserved for
both units of the AP. The Unit 0 and Unit 1 tabs at the top of the screen can be used to
navigate to the communication setting fields for each AP unit.
6. Once all changes have been made, click the Save button. The LAN button in the Connec-
tion Method section of the new AP window (see Figure 3-3) will now be selectable.
7. Press the LAN button to display the LAN Communications Setup window (see Figure 3-
5).
Figure 3-5 LAN Communications Window
8. Select the option button of the AP unit, ethernet port, and IP address to which the network
ethernet port is physically connected.
9. To verify that the LAN communication settings are correct, click the Test button. If a suc-
cessful test message box is returned, then you are ready to continue. If the test is not suc-
cessful, review the LAN communication settings you entered in earlier steps of this
procedure for errors and try again.

Version: 01
10. There is no need to enter the license code for a new AP System. The license code has
already been configured for the system ordered. Once the AP and the PC are running and
the communication method has been set up, simply click on the Query AP button to auto-
matically fill in the license code field. (If using a modem for communication, please see
Appendix A of this manual.)
The license code, which is provided by the manufacturer, determines the quantity of ser-
vices supported by the system. This code is configured for each customer and is saved
within the AP System itself. When queried, the AP will transfer this code to APAC where
it will be saved as well.
11. Save the changes by clicking the in the upper right-hand corner of the active window.
The window will then close and you will be prompted on whether to save the changes or
not. Select Yes to save changes. A save may also be performed by using the File|Save
function or pressing Ctrl+S.
12. The announcement synchronization window should now appear, if it does not navigate to
Help|Standard Procedures|New AP Announcement Synchronization (see Figure 3-6). Fol-
low the on-screen instructions to complete this portion of the installation.
Figure 3-6 Announcement Synchronization
The AP site name you selected should now be displayed in the AP selection box located on the
toolbar. This box always displays the currently selected AP. All service changes (e.g., new call-
ing name entries) will be made for the AP shown in this box. This is very important to remember
when APAC is servicing multiple AP sites and more than one AP is defined. See APAC’s online
Help, Administration of Multiple APs, for further information on the selected AP and handling
multiple APs.

Version: 01
Chapter 5 - "APAC Administration" provides more detailed information on assigning Users and
defining AP sites.
The time in the AP needs to be set for services to work correctly. To do this navigate to
Tools|Manage AP Time on the toolbar. Once the window is opened, choose your time zone and
click the OK button. This will transfer the selected time and time zone to the AP (see Figure 3-7).
For more information on Time Management on the AP see Chapter 11 - "Time".
Figure 3-7 Set AP Time
Due to the changes in AP communications, announcements and time settings, there may be
alarms on the AP. To view the alarms or any errors, right-click on the alarm icon next to your
AP. For more information on alarms see Section 18.6 - "AP Alarm Status".
You are now ready to begin using the APAC program for AP service administration! Please read
Chapter 4 - "Getting Around APAC" to obtain a general overview of how APAC works.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 4 - Getting Around APAC
Chapter 4 - Getting Around APAC
4.1 Conventions
Certain conventions are used throughout this manual. The term AP refers to the AP System and
the term APAC refers to this software. Italicized phrases refer to menus and command functions.
For example, Insert|New AP means that the New AP command in the Insert menu should be
selected.
4.2 Overview
4.2.1 Basic Concepts
The APAC software has its own set of database files which keep track of how the AP is config-
ured. These database files are independent of the information kept in the AP. Under most circum-
stances, if changes are made in the APAC software, they are not updated in the AP until a data
transfer is completed. One exception to this is the CMF (Call Management Features) database.
Since the CMF database is contained in the AP and not in the PC, CMF changes that are made
using the APAC software are immediately transferred to the AP.
The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen displays additional information on operations in
progress. It is recommended that the windows be maximized to facilitate viewing. To close a
window simply click on the in the upper right corner of the window.
An activity indicator is shown to the right of the AP selection box. This is the word 'AP' in blue
letters. During certain activities that take considerable time (e.g., transfers to the AP), the activity
indicator will spin during these tasks to let you know that work on the task is progressing. To see
the activity indicator at work, select View|Service Logic Management. The activity indicator
should begin to spin.
In general, when viewing a list or tree window, APAC is able to display a pop-up context menu on
a right mouse button click. The pop-up menu will contain commands specific to the selected
item.
4.2.2 Logging In
When APAC is started, the login screen is presented. The user enters their login-id and password
then selects OK. The login id used will determine what APAC functions the user may access.

Version: 01
After successfully logging in, the main APAC window is displayed. From there the user selects
the desired function from the pull-down menus or the toolbar. Online help is provided on each
item and can be displayed by selecting the desired item and pressing the F1 key.
4.2.3 The APAC Toolbar
Figure 4-1 shows the buttons on the toolbar and their functions:
Button Function
- Saves changes
- New user
- View users
- Add Calling Name
- View Calling Names
- Calling Name Report
- View Announcements
- View SLP Management screen
- Transfer data to the AP
- Backup data from the AP
- AP Command Line
- Help Topics
- Help Pointer
Figure 4-1 The APAC Toolbar
These functions may also be found in the APAC menus. For further information about specific
APAC functions, use the online help for that specific function. Detailed help is provided on each
function and can be displayed by selecting the desired function and pressing the F1 key.

Version: 01
4.2.4 Viewing and Editing Data
The Insert menu allows the addition of new entries to the different services and the View menu
allows viewing and editing of those entries. It is important to remember that most functions
(except User Administration) are performed relative to the selected AP (the AP displayed in the
AP selection box on the toolbar). For example, selecting View|Database Status will display a sta-
tus summary of the APAC service databases that belong to the selected AP. The AP name will
also be displayed in the function window title bar indicating the information is valid for that par-
ticular AP (see Figure 4-2 - "Viewing the Selected AP").
Figure 4-2 Viewing the Selected AP
The View menu allows viewing and modification of entries that exist for a service. First, select
the entry to be displayed from the View menu. To modify or delete an entry, select the entry using
left mouse button then go to the Edit menu and select Modify or Delete.
A more convenient method of modifying an entry involves the use of the right mouse button.
After selecting an entry in the list, click the right mouse button to display a pop-up menu that con-
tains actions available for this specific list, including Modify and Delete. When Modify is
selected, a form is displayed containing the information currently contained in the selected item.
If you change the information on this form, the data displayed in the list will change accordingly.
The change is not permanently recorded in the database until a save function is performed.
4.2.5 Viewing and Printing Reports
You can view and print reports by selecting View|Reports, and the report of your choice. This sec-
tion provides a sample report, and a brief overview of the options available from the report
menus.

Version: 01
Button Function
Clicking on the arrow buttons changes the page number that is
viewed in the window.
Terminates the report as it is being compiled.
Changes the screen size of the report to either large, medium, or

small. This is useful if you want to view the entire width of the
report without having to scroll the screen. Viewing the report
with the window maximized is recommended.
Prints the report to the local printer.
Exports the report to a disk file or to a Microsoft Mail (MAPI)

recipient. Clicking on this button will open the Export window
where you choose the format of the file and the destination (file
or mail).
The following formats are supported:
Character-separated values
Comma-separated values (CSV)
Paginated Text
Tab-separated text
Tab-separated values
Text
Microsoft Word document
4.2.6 Saving Changes
Whenever the data in a display is modified, a * appears at the end of the title in the window title
bar. The * indicates that a change has been made and a save function should be performed to per-
manently record the change. There are several ways to invoke the save function:
• Select the File|Save command.
• Use the Ctrl+S accelerator key combination,

Version: 01
• Click on the Save button, .
• Select the in the upper right-hand corner of the active window.
The first three methods will save the information to the database and leave the window displayed
on the screen open (the * will be removed from the title bar, indicating no change is pending), and
'Save Complete' will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the APAC window. Additional
changes or entries can then be made.
Selecting the will prompt the user whether to save the changed information. If Yes is
selected, the changes will be saved and the window will be removed from the screen. If No is
selected, the window is removed from the screen without saving the changes. If Cancel is
selected, no action is taken.
4.3 The APAC Map
4.3.1 APAC Map Overview
The APAC Map window is intended to provide a visual representation of APAC and the AP sys-
tems it administers. From this window you also have quick access to many of the commands
found in the APAC menu and toolbars.
The APAC Map window is automatically displayed when APAC is started. Figure 4-3 illustrates
that the APAC system is administrating three AP systems.

Version: 01
Figure 4-3 The APAC Map
Note that the three AP systems shown in the map window will also be choices available in the AP
selector drop-down on the APAC toolbar (the Mitchell AP is currently in the selector).
4.3.2 Map Item Definitions
APAC – This icon represents the APAC. From this icon you can access commands that
affect the configuration of APAC itself (e.g., assign APAC users, set the APAC scheduled func-
tions). Descriptions of the available commands are given in Section 4.3.4.
AP Region List – This button will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the APAC Map
window if the AP Regions feature has been enabled. Typically this button will have a green
arrow, but if an alert condition has been detected on an AP in any region then the arrow will be
red, as illustrated in Figure 4-3. For more information on AP Regions, see Section 5.7 - "AP
Region Management".
AP – This icon represents an AP system being administered by APAC. There will be one of
these icons for each AP that has been defined in APAC (see Section 5.2 - "Adding a New AP").
The name of the AP system will be shown in the label below the AP icon. From this icon you can
access commands that configure or provision the specific AP selected. If you let the mouse

Version: 01
pointer hover over this icon for a short time, a popup window will appear that provides configura-
tion information about that particular AP. Figure 4-4 illustrates the popup menu for the example
AP named Mitchell. The popup window will show the AP's System ID, Serial Numbers, and
licensing information.
Figure 4-4 AP Popup Configuration Info
Service Logic Programs – This icon represents the SLPs (Service Logic Programs) available
either on APAC or on a specific AP. If you are not currently using any SLPs, this icon will not
appear in your APAC Map. This icon will appear attached to the APAC icon when SLPs have
been imported into APAC. The icon will appear attached to an AP icon when SLPs have been
deployed to that specific AP. When the mouse pointer hovers over a SLP icon, a popup icon will
be displayed. The popup display for the SLP icon attached to the APAC icon will read "All Ser-
vice Logic Programs", indicating that the icon represents all the SLPs that have been imported
into APAC. The popup display for the SLP icon attached to an AP icon will read "<APName>
Service Logic Programs" (see Figure 4-5). This indicates that the icon represents the SLPs that
have been deployed to that AP system.
Figure 4-5 Service Logic Program Identifier
From the SLP icon, you can access commands associated with the management of SLPs.
Announcements – This icon represents the announcements available either on APAC or on a

specific AP. The icon will appear attached to an AP icon when announcements have been
deployed to that specific AP. When the mouse pointer hovers over an announcement icon, a
popup icon will be displayed. The popup display for the announcement icon attached the APAC
icon will read "All Announcements", indicating that the icon represents all the announcements
available to be used on AP systems. The popup display for the announcement icon attached to an
AP icon will read "<APName> Announcements" (see Figure 4-6 - "Announcement Identifier").
This indicates that the icon represents the announcements that have been deployed to that AP sys-
tem.

Version: 01
Figure 4-6 Announcement Identifier
From the announcement icon, you can access commands associated with announcement manage-
ment.
Calling Names – This icon represents the calling name information available on an AP sys-
tem. This icon will appear attached to an AP icon when calling name - related data is added to
that specific AP. When the mouse pointer hovers over a calling name icon, a popup icon will be
displayed. The popup display will have the format: "<APName> Calling Names" (see Figure 4-7
- "Calling Name Identifier").
Figure 4-7 Calling Name Identifier
From the calling name icon, you can access commands associated with calling name provision-
ing.
AP Alerts - This icon represents any alert conditions detected on an AP. The icon will
appear attached to an AP icon if the following conditions are met:
• The user logged into APAC has Administrator privileges.
• The LAN communication method is used between APAC and the associated AP.
• An alert condition is present on the associated AP.
When the mouse pointer hovers over an alert icon, popup text will be displayed (see Figure 4-8).
The first line of the popup display will have the format: “<APName> Alerts.” Subsequent lines
will indicate one or more of the following alert conditions:
• Alarms Detected - this indicates one or more Minor or Major alarms are currently in effect
on one or both AP units.
• Standard Errors Detected - this indicates that there are unread records in the AP’s Stan-
dard Error Log. The AP writes records to this log when it detects certain error conditions or
other anomalous activities that should be noted.

Version: 01
• SLP Errors Detected - this indicates that there are unread records in the AP’s SLP Default
Error Log. SLPs write records to this log when error conditions or other unexpected events
are encountered during the operation of a service.
Figure 4-8 AP Alerts Identifier
From the alert icon, you can access commands specific to handling AP alert conditions.
APAC / AP Connection Lines – These lines represent the communication

path between APAC and a specific AP system. The label on each line indicates the connection
method that APAC uses to communicate with the AP system at the opposite end of the line. Pos-
sible line labels are:
• COM<x> – Communication with the associated AP system is via a direct RS232 connec-
tion using the COM port specified in the label.
• Telephone Number – Communication with the associated AP system is via a modem call to
the specified phone number.
• Term Serv: <IP (Internet Protocol) Address or Network Element Name> – Communication
with the associated AP system utilizes a TCP/IP connection to a terminal/communication
server that connects to the AP via RS232.
• LAN: <IP (Internet Protocol) Address> – Communication with the associated AP system is
via a direct TCP/IP-based Local Area Network (LAN). Any APAC connected to the LAN
can then communicate with all LAN-connect APs using standard protocols.
4.3.3 Map Layout
The APAC Map window can be sized and positioned just like any other Windows display. In
addition, the icons within the APAC Map window can be independently positioned. To move an
icon in the APAC Map:
1. Move the mouse cursor onto the item to be moved.
2. Press down and hold down the left-hand mouse button.
3. Drag the item to a new position by moving the mouse in the desired direction.
4. When the item is in the desired position release the left-hand mouse button.

Version: 01
Any connection lines will be automatically repositioned and redrawn after an icon is moved. If
the main APAC icon or a main AP icon is moved then the smaller, attached icons are
also moved so that they maintain their same relative position to the APAC or AP icon.
The APAC Map window will retain its last size and position between APAC sessions. Likewise,
the items within the APAC Map window will maintain their position between APAC sessions.
4.3.4 Map Commands
From the APAC Map window, you can quickly access many of the commands available from the
APAC main menu. There are two ways to initiate commands from the APAC Map: popup menus
and drag-and-drop.
Popup Menus - Most of the APAC Map commands are accessed from popup menus. A popup
menu is displayed when the right-hand mouse button is clicked while the mouse pointer is posi-
tioned over one of the icons in the map. Each icon type will display a popup menu with com-
mands associated with that icon type. Nearly all of the commands available from the APAC Map
are also available from the APAC menu or toolbar. It is simply a user preference as to which
mechanism they use to invoke the command. One advantage to using the APAC Map to initiate
commands is that you do not have to worry about selecting an AP from the selection box on the
toolbar (see Section 5.3 - "Administration of Multiple APs") before initiating an APAC com-
mand. The "selected AP" name in the AP selection box will automatically be updated to the cor-
rect AP when a command is selected from an APAC Map icon.
APAC Popup Menu
Add New User - See Section 5.1.1 - "Adding a User"

View User List - See Section 5.1.4 - "List Users"
User Report - See Section 5.1.5 - "Viewing User Reports"
Add New AP - See Section 5.2 - "Adding a New AP"
Manage AP Regions - See Section 5.7 - "AP Region Management"
Set APAC Schedule For - See Section 16.1 - "Scheduling APAC Functions"
View APAC Schedule - See Section 16.1.4 - "Viewing the APAC Schedule"
Scheduler Active - See Section 16.1.3 - "Turning the Scheduler On and Off"

Version: 01
All Service Logic Programs Popup Menu
View Service Logic Programs - See Section 14.1 - "Service Logic Management Screen"
Import Service Logic Program - See Section 14.8.11 - "Importing Service Logic Programs"
All Announcements Popup Menu
View Announcements - See Section 15.8 - "Viewing Announcements"

Transfer New Announcement(s) To AP - See Section 6.3 - "Transfer New Announcements to AP"
Announcement Builder - See Section 15.4 - "Announcement Builder"
AP Popup Menu
View Database Status - See Section 17.2 - "Viewing Database Status"

View Alarms - See Section 18.6 - "AP Alarm Status"
Global Title Translation

Add / Update Generic GTT - See Section 8.2.1 - "Define a Generic GTT"
View Generic GTT Data - See Section 8.3 - "Generic GTT Report"

Version: 01
SS7
SS7 Maintenance - See Section 18.8 - "SS7 Maintenance"
Configure SS7 - See Section 7.1 - "Configuring the SS7 Network Parameters"
Trunks
Trunk Maintenance - See Section 18.7.5 - "Trunk Maintenance Operations"
Configure Trunks - See Section 12.2 - "Trunk Configuration – Unit 0"
View Trunk Configuration Report - See Section 12.4 - "Trunk Group Configuration Report"
Time
Set AP Time - See Section 11.1 - "Managing the Time in the Application Peripheral"
Time Monitoring - See Section 11.1.1 - "Switch Time Monitoring"
Backups
Schedule AP Backup - See Section 18.5.2 - "Scheduling AP Backups"
Backup All Now - See Section 18.5 - "AP Backups"
AP Options
CMF - See Section 10.2 - "Setting the AP Options for the Call Management Features"
GTT - See Section 8.5 - "Set AP Options for GTT"
Announcement Playback - See Section 15.11 - "Set AP Options for Announcement Playback"
Trunk Timing - See Section 12.6 - "Set AP Options for Trunk Timing"
Calling Name - See Section 9.15 - "Set AP Options for Calling Name"
Voice Box - See Section 18.11 - "Voice Box Options"
MWI Options - See Section 5.8.6.2 - "MWI Options"
Service Data Transfer

To AP - See Section 6.1 - "Transfer to AP"
From AP - See Section 6.2 - "Transfer from AP"
License Management - See Section 5.6 - "License Management"
Rename AP - See Section 5.4 - "Renaming an AP"
Delete AP - See Section 5.5 - "Deleting an AP"
<AP Name> Service Logic Programs Popup Menu

Version: 01
The contents of an AP Service Logic Programs popup menu are dynamic and are based on the ser-
vice logic programs deployed to that specific AP. The popup menu is divided into three sections,
partitioned by separator bars: constant section, SLP add-on section, and SLP tables section.
Constant Section – This command will invoke the Service Logic Management screen. For more
information on this subject, see Section 14.1 - "Service Logic Management Screen".
SLP Add-on Section – This section contains commands to invoke the SLP-specific provisioning/
configuration windows (add-ons). These windows provide a graphical user interface designed
specifically for the SLP. In this section you will see a list of services that have SLP-specific add-
ons (not all services have add-ons). The cascading menu will show the commands available for
that SLP which are the same commands available from the Tools|Add-ons display.
SLP Tables Section – This section contains commands to display database tables that hold the
provisioning information for SLPs. If the SLP has an associated add-on, you must use the add-on
to populate the SLP database table(s). If the SLP does not have an associated add-on, then the
SLP tables can be populated directly with this command. In this section you will see a list of
SLPs that have been deployed to the associated AP. The cascading menu for each SLP will show
the tables used by that SLP. Simply select the table you wish to modify and the table data editor
will be displayed. For more information about viewing and modifying table data, see Section
14.4 - "Tables".
<AP Name> Announcements Popup Menu
View Announcements - See Section 15.8 - "Viewing Announcements"

Reload Announcements from APAC - See Section 6.4 - "Reload All Announcements to AP"
Update Change Number Announcement Data - See Section 13.1 - "Update Change Number
Announcement Data"
Change Number Announcement Peg Count Report - See Section 13.2 - "Change Number
Announcement Peg Count Report"

Version: 01
<AP Name> Calling Name Popup Menu
Add/Update Calling Name - See Section 9.3 - "Add a Calling Name Entry"
View Calling Names - See Section 9.6 - "Calling Name List"
Calling Name Report - See Section 9.7 - "Calling Name Report"
Input Calling Name File - See Section 9.4 - "File Input"
Clean-up Calling Name Database - See Section 17.3 - "Cleaning Up the Calling Name Database"
Calling Name Dip Counts

Update Calling Name Dip OPCs - See Section 9.10 - "Calling Name Dip OPCs" (only available if the
selected AP is running a software release older than version 4.1.1)
Calling Name Dip Count Report - See Section 9.12 - "Calling Name Dip Count Report"
Update Concerned Point Codes - See Section 9.11 - "Update the Concerned Point Code List"
City/State
File Input - See Section 9.4 - "File Input"
View City/State Report - See Section 9.8 - "City/State Report"
Add/Update NPA-NXX - See Section 9.1 - "Calling Name NPA-NXXs"
View NPA-NXXs - See Section 9.1 - "Calling Name NPA-NXXs"
Configure Internet Expansion - See Section 9.13 - "Calling Name Internet Expansion"
Calling Name Configuration - See Section 9.14 - "Calling Name Configuration" (only available if the
selected AP is running software release 4.1.1 or greater)
IP Delivery Numbers - See Section 9.14.3.1 - "IP Delivery Members" (only available if the selected AP is
running software release 4.1.1 or greater)
<AP Name> AP Alerts Popup Menu
View Alarms - See Section 18-6 - "AP Alarm Status Window"

Version: 01
View Standard Errors - See Section 14.8.7 - "Reading Logs"

View SLP Errors - See Section 14.8.7 - "Reading Logs"
APAC / AP Connection Lines Popup Menu
Communication Settings - See Section 5.8 - "AP Communications Setup", and/or Appendix A -
"Communications"
Drag and Drop Commands

Normally, pressing the left-hand mouse button on an icon, and dragging that icon, is the mecha-
nism used to move an icon's position (as explained in Section 4.3.3 - "Map Layout"). However,
depending on the icon selected and the position where the icon is released, this dragging and drop-
ping may initiate an APAC command rather than moving the icon. The following paragraphs
describe the APAC actions that can be initiated by dragging and dropping icons within the APAC
Map.
SLP Deployment – If you wish to initiate the deployment of a SLP to an AP system, press the left-
hand mouse button with the mouse pointer on the "All Service Logic Programs" icon. While the
mouse button is pressed, drag the icon to the AP icon where the SLP is to be deployed. When the
SLP icon has reached the AP icon, a black square will be displayed around the AP icon, indicating
it will accept the drag and drop operations. Release the mouse button when the black square is
displayed. The SLP Deployment wizard will be displayed. See Section 14.9 - "Transferring or
Deploying SLPs to AP" for details on SLP deployment.
Transfer Announcements – If you wish to initiate the transfer of new announcements to an AP

system, press the left-hand mouse button with the mouse pointer on the "All Announcements"
icon. While the mouse button is pressed, drag the icon to the AP icon where the announcements
are to be transferred. When the announcement icon has reached the AP icon that is licensed to
provide announcement capabilities, a black square will be displayed around the AP icon, indicat-
ing it will accept the drag and drop operations. Release the mouse button when the black square is
displayed. The Announcement Transfer Selection Window (see Section 6.3 - "Transfer New
Announcements to AP") will be displayed. If a black square does not appear around the AP icon
when the announcement icon hovers over the AP icon, then that AP is not licensed to provide
announcement capabilities and will not accept the drag and drop operation.

Version: 01
4.4 AP Transfer
The AP service data that is modified by APAC is stored in a database file on the PC. This modi-
fied data must be periodically transferred to the AP and can be performed at the user's conve-
nience.
Similarly, certain data may be retrieved from the AP for backup purposes.
Please refer to Chapter 16 - "Scheduling" for information about how to schedule some transfers.
See Chapter 6 - "AP Transfer" for more information about transferring service data to and from
the AP, and other transfer commands listed as sub-items of Tools|AP Transfer.
NOTE: This note applies to all connection methods except the LAN (Local Area Network)
method. See Appendix 5.8 - "AP Communications Setup" for more information. APAC
can have only one communication session active at a time. For example, if a calling name
data transfer is in progress, you cannot collect calling name dip counts from an AP at the
same time. If an attempt is made to establish communication with an AP when a communi-
cation session is already in progress, an error message indicating that communication could
not be established will be displayed. This is also true for scheduled functions. That is, if a
scheduled function attempts to establish communication with an AP when a communication
session is already in progress, a "communication could not be established" error message
will be displayed. That scheduled function will be postponed and re-attempted in one
minute. This cycle will continue until the scheduled function can complete or the APAC

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 5 - APAC Administration
Chapter 5 - APAC Administration
5.1 User Information
5.1.1 Adding a User
Users are added to the system by selecting Insert|New User or by clicking on the New User but-
ton, , on the tool bar. Executing the New User command will display the User Information
window. The information entered in this window will define the user’s login ID, password, and
access privileges. The access privileges define what APAC functions the user will be allowed to
access and perform.
To specify a new user, click in the User Name field and enter the user’s name. Press the tab key
or click in the Password field and enter a password for that user. Next, select the desired pre-
defined User Access Privilege category or select Details to select specific, custom functions for
the user.
A save function must be performed once the user data has been entered.

Version: 01
5.1.2 User Information Fields Described
User Name: This will be the user’s login ID. The user name consists of up to 14 alphanumeric characters.
The case of the characters does not matter. When logging on, the Login ID is not case sensi-
tive.
Password: This is the user’s password. The password consists of up to 20 alphanumeric characters. The
case of the characters does not matter. When logging on, the password is not case sensitive.
User Access The User Access Privileges define what APAC functions the user will be able to perform.
Privileges: There are five general categories of users. However, the access privileges may be customized
if this user requires privileges that differ from the pre-defined categories.
Administrator - APAC system administrator access. This access category allows the user
access to all APAC functions.
AP Engineer - This access category provides the user with the ability to perform functions
that require access to, or communication with, the AP. This includes access to the AP Com-
mand Line function and the ability to transfer service data to and from the AP(s). This access
type will not allow the viewing or modification of any service data.
Service Administrator - This access category allows the user access to all AP service-related
functions such as Calling Name. This includes viewing, modifying, and transferring service
data to and from the AP. This type of user will not have access to non-service related func-
tions such as the AP Command Line or AP Program Load.
Service Technician - This category of user can view and modify service-related data. They
will not have access to AP transfer functions or other non-service related functions.
Service Read-Only Access - This access category allows the user read-only access to service-
related data (i.e., the user can view service-related data and can request service data reports).
They cannot modify any of the service data nor can they access AP transfer functions or other
non-service related functions.
The Details button invokes the Access Privilege Details window. Through this window you
can view exactly what functions a user has access to and also modify the function access to
meet specific, custom needs.
5.1.3 Access Privilege Details
From the Details window, all functions may be viewed and modified to meet specific, custom
needs. The APAC functions are shown in a tree structure. Branch items in the tree (items that
have sub-items) are indicated by a symbol. Clicking on this symbol alternately expands and
contracts the sub-item list. See Figure 5-1 for the list of User Access Privileges.

Version: 01
Figure 5-1 User Access Privileges
Each APAC function will have a graphic symbol indicating the user access status for that func-
tion. A indicates that the user may access the associated function, while a indicates that the
user is prohibited from accessing the associated function.
The branch items may have one of three symbols:

•A indicates the user has access to all sub-items.
•A indicates the user can access none of the sub-items.
• A indicates the user has access to some, but not all of the sub-items. Expand the branch
list to see the status of the sub-item functions.
To change the access status for any list function, simply click on the function name. This will
toggle the status of the selected item from -to- and -to- . Clicking on a branch item name
will result in all of the sub-items either becoming accessible or inaccessible, depending on the
current state of the branch item.
To apply the changes made in the Access Privilege Details window, select OK. If the changes
should be discarded, select Cancel.

Version: 01
5.1.4 List Users
To display a list of all users defined in APAC, click on the View Users button, , on the toolbar
or select View|Users. The User List window will appear. Each user access privilege list can be
displayed by clicking on the plus ‘+’ in front of the user's name.
To make changes to a user while viewing the User List screen, select the desired user and click the
right mouse button or select the Edit menu. Clicking the right mouse button will display a pop-up
menu. From this menu, a user can be deleted, access privileges can be modified, or a new user
can be added to the system.
If any changes are made, a save function is required to make the changes permanent.
5.1.5 Viewing User Reports
To display a report of all users defined in APAC, choose View|Reports|Users. A report similar to
Figure 5-2 will be shown. For more information on User Reports, see Section 4.2.5 - "Viewing
and Printing Reports".
Figure 5-2 User Report
5.2 Adding a New AP
1. Add a new AP using the Insert|New AP function. This function is used to give a name to
the site where the AP System(s) is installed and set the communication information for
that particular AP site. All of the database information administered by the APAC pro-

Version: 01
gram is stored relative to the AP site currently selected. Therefore, until an AP is defined,
the only function available is User Administration. The following window will appear
when inserting a new AP:
Figure 5-3 New AP Window
2. Enter the desired name for the AP in the AP Name field. Each AP System is typically
identified by a site name. If the AP Regions feature has been enabled, you will have to
either choose an existing region for the AP in the AP Region selection box, or enter a new
region in the selection box. If the AP Regions feature has not been enabled, the AP
Region selection box will not be displayed. See Section 5.7 - "AP Region Management"
for more information about the AP Regions feature.
3. Enter the communication settings for this AP. The default setting is COM1 and Direct
RS232, which support a direct connection between the PC and the AP. (Consult the PC
manual for proper port settings.) If a modem is being used for communication, please see
Section A.1 - "Modem Information".
If the X.25 ITI connection is used, the serial ports of both the APAC PC and the AP must
be connected to a packet assembler/dissembler (PAD). Please see Section A.2 - "X.25
Intelligent Terminal Interface" for more information about the X.25 ITI connection
method.
If the Term Serv connection is used, the APAC PC must have an ethernet connection to
the terminal server while the AP has a serial connection to the terminal server. Please see
Section A.3 - "Terminal Server Communications" for more information about the Term
Serv connection method.

Version: 01
If the LAN connection is used, the APAC PC must be connected directly (without a termi-
nal server) to an AP through a Local Area Network using IP based protocols. The LAN
button will only be enabled if the ethernet cards for the selected AP have been configured.
Please see Section A.4 - "High Speed Terminal Interface" for more information about the
LAN connection method.
4. The license code may be queried from the AP. There is no need to enter the license code
for a new AP System. The license code has already been configured for the system
ordered. Once the AP and the PC are running and the communication method has been
setup, simply click on the Query AP button to automatically fill in the license code field.
The Query AP command will also retrieve the serial numbers for both AP units along with
the licensed quantities. This information will be displayed below the license code field.
The license code, which is provided by the manufacturer, determines the quantity of ser-
vices supported by the system. This code is configured for each customer and is saved
within the AP System itself. When queried, the AP will transfer this code to APAC where
it will be saved as well. A new licensing code will be required to increase the quantity of
services when new services are required for the system. The new license code is down-
loaded to the AP through Tools|License Management. See Section 5.6 - "License Man-
agement" for more information.
5. Save the AP information. As discussed earlier, one method of saving is accomplished by

clicking the in the upper right-hand corner of the active window. You will then be
prompted on whether to save the changes or not. Select Yes to save changes and the win-
dow will close.
APAC will perform an update to the AP only if needed (i.e., the license information has been
changed from what was originally found on the AP). Updating the AP units will take several min-
utes and will be indicated at the bottom of the screen.
After a successful save, the name of the new AP will be available from the drop-down list in the
AP selection box located on the toolbar.
5.3 Administration of Multiple APs
One APAC can perform the administration of multiple APs. Each AP to be administered is
defined through the Insert|New AP menu item (Map Selection - New AP). Once the AP is
defined, its name will appear in the AP selection box (drop-down list) on the toolbar and an icon
representing that AP system will appear in the APAC Map. The AP name that appears in the
selection box window is considered the selected AP. Therefore, all service changes, e.g., new
calling name entries, etc., will be made for the AP shown in this box. This is very important to

Version: 01
remember when APAC is servicing multiple AP sites and more than one AP is defined. See
APAC’s online help, Administration of Multiple APs, for further information on the selected AP
and handling multiple APs.
5.4 Renaming an AP
Use this command to change an AP system name within APAC. This command is only accessible
by right-clicking on the concerned AP from the APAC Map. When this command is selected, the
rename window will appear (shown below). Enter the new name in the New Name edit box and
then press the OK button. The new AP name will appear in the APAC Map and in the AP selec-
tion box on the APAC toolbar.
Figure 5-4 Rename Window
5.5 Deleting an AP
This command is only accessible by right-clicking on the concerned AP from the APAC Map.
Use this command to delete an AP from the APAC system. The AP will be removed from the
APAC Map and removed from the AP selection box in the APAC toolbar. The APAC database
files associated with that AP will be deleted and any registry entries associated with that AP will
be removed.
WARNING! Use this command with EXTREME CAUTION. After an AP is deleted

from the APAC system, you can no longer access any data associated with that AP,
including all provisioning information (e.g. calling names, SLP data) and AP configu-
ration information. It is strongly recommended that you have a recent backup of the
APAC folder before executing this command.
5.6 License Management
Select Tools|License Management to view or update the License Code for the selected AP. The
License Code is provided by Innovative Systems, L.L.C. (1-605-995-6120), and determines the
quantity of service data that may be provisioned in the AP.

Version: 01
When this command is selected, APAC first attempts to establish a connection with the AP and
verify the license information in the AP units is consistent with the license information stored in
the APAC database. Any licensing inconsistency between the two units and/or the APAC data-
base will be reported and a License Code selection window will be displayed.
Once the license retrieval is complete, the retrieved License Management form window will be
displayed. The license information retrieval from the AP units may also be performed at any time
by selecting the Query AP button at the bottom of the License Management form window.
If you wish to update the License Code to change the licensed quantity of service data, enter the
new License Code in the designated fields. See the following section for information about the
License Code Selection window.
Select File|Save to save the updated license information. The save operation will save the license
information to the APAC database and download the license code to the AP units.
WARNING! The process described above will initiate a ROM save on the AP which
may take several minutes to complete. DO NOT remove power from the AP, reset the
AP, or otherwise impede the progress of the ROM save. Doing so will result in a fail-
ure of the AP to come into service and will require a return of the AP for factory ser-
vice.
After a successful save, the new licensed quantities of service data will be in effect. Use the
File|Close command to discard any changes.
5.6.1 License Code Selection
The License Code Selection window is displayed during License Management or New AP Defini-
tion operations when the APAC detects an inconsistency between the license code in the APAC
database and the AP units. Select the License Code that should be used then select OK. The
APAC database and the AP units will be updated with this License Code when a save command
(File|Save) is performed. Therefore, following the save, the license information in the APAC
database and the AP units will be consistent.
5.7 AP Region Management
The AP Regions feature allows AP systems to be partitioned into regions. This feature is intended
to help with the management of a large number of AP systems in a single APAC and is not neces-
sary when APAC is being used to manage a small number of AP systems.

Version: 01
AP regions are defined using the AP Region Manager (see Section 5.7.1). Once the AP systems
are assigned to the regions, the AP Region List (see Section 5.7.2) can be used to select one region
at a time.
5.7.1 AP Region Manager
The AP Region Manager window is accessed by clicking the right-hand mouse button on the
APAC icon in the APAC Map window and selecting the Manage AP Regions command in the
popup menu that is displayed, as illustrated in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 APAC Map Popup Menu
The AP Region Manager window is divided into two panes. In the left pane is a list of regions,
and in the right pane is the AP Name list, which is used to display the AP systems in the selected
region. If no AP regions have been defined, then the only item in the left pane will be the default
<Unassigned> region (see Figure 5-6).
Figure 5-6 Default AP Region Manager Window
If the <Unassigned> region is in the left pane, select it to display all of the AP systems that have
not been assigned to a region. All systems in the <Unassigned> region must be assigned to a
user-defined region before the AP Region Manager data can be saved. Instructions for adding

Version: 01
new regions, moving AP systems between regions, deleting regions and renaming regions are
given below. To save changes to AP Region Manager data, press the OK button. To discard any
changes and exit the AP Region Manager window, press the Cancel button.
Adding a New Region

To create a new region, right-click below the list of regions in the left pane to invoke a popup
menu and select the Add New Region command in the popup (as illustrated in Figure 5-6). A new
region item will be added with the words “New Region” highlighted. Enter the name of the new
region into the highlighted space. AP systems can now be assigned to the new region. Regions
that do not have any assigned systems will be removed from the Regions list when the OK button
is pressed to save changes.
Moving AP Systems Between Regions

To move AP systems from one region to another, first select the region in the Regions list that
currently contains the systems to be moved.. All of the AP systems in that region will be dis-
played in the AP Name list. Next, select one or more AP systems in the AP Name list and drag
them to the new region in the Regions list. The selected systems are now assigned to the region
targeted in the Regions list.
Deleting a Region
To delete a region, right-click on the region in the Regions list to invoke a popup menu and select
the Delete Region command in the popup. A region can only be deleted if there are no AP sys-
tems assigned to the region.
Renaming a Region
To change the name of a region, either click on the region name until it is highlighted or right-
click on the region in the Regions list to invoke a popup menu and select the Rename Region com-
mand in the popup. When the current region name is highlighted, type the new region name and
press the <Enter> key on the keyboard or click the mouse pointer off the region name to accept
the changed name.
5.7.2 AP Region List
When the AP systems administered by APAC have been partitioned into regions (see Section
5.7.1), a small button will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the APAC Map window and the
title bar of the APAC Map window will show the active region (see Figure 5-7). The AP selection
box will only display the AP systems in the active region.

Version: 01
Figure 5-7 APAC with Regions
To change the active region, click the AP Region List button to display a drop-down list of
regions (as illustrated in Figure 5-8) and select the region to activate from the list. The positions
of AP and APAC icons in the APAC Map will be preserved when switching from region to
region.
Figure 5-8 AP Region List
Typically the AP Region List button will have a green arrow, but if an alert condition has been
detected on an AP in any region then the arrow will be red. When the AP Region List button is
red, , the drop-down list of regions will show an alert icon next to each region that has an AP
with an alert condition, as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 AP Region List with Alerts

Version: 01
Select a region with an alert icon to activate that region and display the AP systems in that region
that have the alert condition. For more information on the AP alert icon, see Section 4.3.2 - "Map
Item Definitions".
5.8 AP Communications Setup
The AP Communications Setup window can be accessed through the File|AP Communication
Setup... command or by clicking the right-hand mouse button on the appropriate connection label
in the APAC Map. Use this command to set or change the parameters for communication
between APAC and the selected AP. When this command is selected, the Communication Con-
figuration form window is displayed. As with most APAC windows, the title bar indicates which
AP the settings are in reference to. Populate the desired fields, then save or close the window.
Figure 5-10 AP Communications Setup Window
Connection • Direct RS232 - Select this connection method if the AP is directly

Method connected to the personal computer’s COM port (with no modem in
between). See Section 5.8.1 - "Direct RS232" for more information.
• Modem - Select if a modem is used to communicate with the AP. If
the Modem button is selected, the COM Port field must indicate the
COM port to which the modem is connected. See Section 5.8.2 -
"Modem" for more information.
• X.25 ITI - Select if you are communicating with the AP by an Intel-
ligent Terminal Interface (ITI) port on a X.25 network. The COM
port selection must indicate the COM port on the APAC PC that is
connected to the X.25 ITI. When selecting this communication
method, you must fill out the Address field. See Section 5.8.3 -
"X.25 ITI" for more information.
• Term Serv - Select if you are communicating to an AP through a ter-
minal server communication device. See Section 5.8.4 - "Term
Serv" for more information.

Version: 01
• LAN - Select if you are connecting directly (without a terminal

server) to an AP through a Local Area Network using IP based pro-
tocols. The LAN button will only be enabled if the ethernet cards for
the selected AP have been configured. See the Configure button
described below. Also see Section 5.8.5 - "LAN" for more informa-
tion.
Configure The Configure button is used to view and modify the attributes of the AP’s
communication terminals. This button requires that a connection to the
AP be established in order to read the current terminal settings from the
AP. The currently selected Connection Method will be used as the means
to connect to the AP. If a connection cannot be established using the
selected Connection Method, APAC will display a screen that asks the
user to enter an IP address. This allows a connection to an AP using the
LAN connection method even though the LAN information has not yet
been stored in the APAC database. This assumes the AP has previously
been configured with a valid IP address and physically connected to the
LAN. After the current terminal settings have been collected from the AP,
the AP Communications Configuration dialog (see Section 5.8.6 - "AP
Communications Configuration") is displayed.
Test The Test button is used to verify that a connection to the AP can be suc-
cessfully established using the selected connection method.

Version: 01
5.8.1 Direct RS232
COM Port Select the COM port button that represents the COM port used for com-
munications between the AP and APAC.
5.8.2 Modem
Modem Password Enter the password for the modem connected to the AP. The modem pass-
word is the common password used by all users who access the modem.
This field is populated only if the callback feature of the far-end modem is
being used. The password is an alphanumeric field from 6 to 10 characters
in length. The password is also case sensitive. If this field is populated,
then the Callback Password must also be populated. Modem callback is
further described in Section A.1 - "Modem Information".
Callback Pass- Enter the user password for this APAC station. Each callback password in
word the far-end modem is associated with a phone number which is called
when the callback password is received. Use the callback password that is
associated with the phone number of the line to which the PC’s modem is
connected. This field is populated only if the callback feature of the far-
end modem is being used. The password is an alphanumeric field from 6
to 10 characters in length, and is also case sensitive. If this field is popu-
lated, then the Modem Password must also be populated. Modem callback
is further described in Section A.1 - "Modem Information".
Modem Init Enter the modem initialization sequence to be performed by the modem
String before dialing. Section A.1 - "Modem Information" provides an example
initialization string.
Phone Number Specifies the phone number of the remote AP modem. Enter the full
numeric sequence that must be dialed to reach the remote modem. Do not
include any special characters (e.g., - or () ) other than modem command
characters. For example, if the number of the remote modem is 555-1234
and you must dial a 9 to access an outside line from a PABX, then enter
‘9,5551234’ in the Phone Number field.
5.8.3 X.25 ITI

Version: 01
Modem Password Enter the password for the modem connected to the AP. The modem pass-
word is the common password used by all users who access the modem.
This field is populated only if the callback feature of the far-end modem is
being used. The password is an alphanumeric field from 6 to 10 characters
in length. The password is also case sensitive. If this field is populated,
then the Callback Password must also be populated. Modem callback is
further described in Section A.1 - "Modem Information".
Callback Pass- Enter the user password for this APAC station. Each callback password in
word the far-end modem is associated with a phone number which is called
when the callback password is received. Use the callback password that is
associated with the phone number of the line to which the PC’s modem is
connected. This field is populated only if the callback feature of the far-
end modem is being used. The password is an alphanumeric field from 6
to 10 characters in length, and is also case sensitive. If this field is popu-
lated, then the Modem Password must also be populated. Modem callback
is further described in Section A.1 - "Modem Information".
Modem Init Enter the modem initialization sequence to be performed by the modem
String before dialing. Section A.1 - "Modem Information" provides an example
initialization string.
Phone Number Specifies the phone number of the remote AP modem. Enter the full
numeric sequence that must be dialed to reach the remote modem. Do not
include any special characters (e.g., - or () ) other than modem command
characters. For example, if the number of the remote modem is 555-1234
and you must dial a 9 to access an outside line from a PABX, then enter
‘9,5551234’ in the Phone Number field.
Address The Address field is enabled only when the X.25 ITI Connection Method
is selected. It contains the 8-digit network address of the AP for which
this communication setup information applies. See Section A.2 - "X.25
Intelligent Terminal Interface" for more information.

Version: 01
5.8.4 Term Serv
Figure 5-11 Terminal Server Communications Setup Window
See Section A.3 - "Terminal Server Communications" for an overview of communicating

between APAC and an AP using a terminal server communication device.
Address Specifier This selection indicates if the address of the terminal server will be speci-
fied by a network name or an IP address.
Network Name This field is enabled when the Name Address Specifier is selected. Enter
the network name of the terminal server communication device.
IP Address This field is enabled when the IP Addr Address Specifier is selected.
Enter the IP address of the terminal server communication device.
TCP Port Number This field specifies the TCP port number on the terminal server that corre-
sponds to the selected AP.
5.8.5 LAN
Figure 5-12 LAN Communications Setup Window

Version: 01
The LAN button is only enabled if the AP’s ethernet ports have been configured and recorded in
APAC’s database. This configuration is performed through the Configure button (see Section 5.8
- "AP Communications Setup") on the Communication Setup screen.
See Section A.4 - "High Speed Terminal Interface" for an overview of communicating between
APAC and an AP using a Local Area Network (LAN).
Unit 0, J1400 Select Unit 0, J1400 radio button if the network ethernet
connection is physically connected to Unit 0, jack 1400.
Terminal Protocol Select the type of protocol (UDP or TCP) used to send ter-
minal commands to the AP. UDP is the default protocol.
TCP requires that the AP software releases be 4.2 or greater.
Table 5-1 LAN Connection Information
5.8.6 AP Communications Configuration
The AP Communications Configuration dialog is used to configure the serial ports and ethernet
ports on both AP units. A specific unit (Unit 0 or Unit 1) may be selected by clicking either the
Unit 0 or Unit 1 tab. The configuration fields are identical for Unit 0 and Unit 1. In the example
dialog shown below, Unit 0 is currently being configured.
Figure 5-13 AP Communications Configuration

Version: 01
Serial ports (AP ports J1600, J1601, J1700, and J1701) are configured in the Serial Port Configu-
ration portion of the dialog. Each port except J1600 can be configured as a Weather, SMDI or
Command port. Port J1600 can only be a Command port and cannot be changed. The port type
selected depends on the type of equipment to which the serial port will be connected.
• Command - Select this mode if the serial port will be connected to an APAC workstation
and used by APAC to communicate with the AP.
• Weather - Select this mode if the serial port will be connected to a weather station. The
weather station is used in conjunction with the Weather Service Announcement SLP. See
the documentation for this SLP, SD0116, for more information.
• SMDI - Select this mode if the serial port will be connected to the Simplified Message Desk
Interface (SMDI) port of a switching system. The SMDI capability is used only with ser-
vices that require Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) signaling (e.g. Voice Mail). In addi-
tion, when a port is selected as SMDI, the NPA-NXXs that this SMDI port serves must be
configured (see Section 5.8.6.1 - "SMDI/MWI NPA-NXXs").
Selecting the SMDI port type will invoke the Serial Port Settings dialog, where the serial
port signaling values may be modified.
Figure 5-14 Serial Port Settings
The field values initially displayed in the dialog are the current signaling values read from
the AP. These values may be changed by selecting new values in the drop-down controls.
Any changed values are saved and transferred to the AP when the Save button in the AP
Communications Configuration window (see Figure 5-13) is pressed. The dialog may be
closed by shifting the focus away from the Port Type drop-down control in the AP Commu-
nications Configuration window, or pressing the ‘X’ in the upper-right corner of the Serial
Port Settings dialog.
The Serial Port Settings dialog contains four fields and a Defaults button. Each of these
controls is described in the table below:

Version: 01
Baud Rate The Baud Rate specifies the signalling speed, in bits-per-
seconds (bps). The valid values are listed in the drop-down
control: 1200bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps.
Data Bits The Data Bits field specifies the number bits that represent a
single character transmitted over the serial link. The valid
values are listed in the drop-down control: 7 or 8 bits.
Parity Parity checking is used to detect transmission errors in the
serial link's data stream. The Parity field indicates the type
of parity checking used in the data transmission. The valid
values are listed in the drop-down control: EVEN, ODD,
NONE.
Stop Bits The Stop Bits field specifies the number of stop bits used to
indicate the end of a transmitted character. The valid values
are listed in the drop-down control: 0, 1, 1.5, or 2 bits.
Defaults button The Defaults button is used to reset all fields in the Serial
Port Settings dialog to the AP's default SMDI port signal-
ling characteristics. The default SMDI signalling character-
istics are: baud rate 9600bps, 8 data bits, no parity (NONE),
1 stop bit.
Table 5-2 Serial Port Settings
Description fields for each of the four serial ports allow for up to 32 characters of site-specific
naming/referencing. The Description field is useful to describe where the serial port is connected.
For example, if the serial port is an SMDI port connected to a switching system, this description
can indicate location name of the switch to which this port is connected.
Ethernet ports (ports J1400 and J1500) are configured in the Ethernet Configuration section of the
dialog. If APAC is currently connected to the AP using a LAN, then the port they are connected
through cannot be selected, and the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, Ethernet Mode
and Services button will all be disabled for this port (see port J1500 in Figure 5-13). The controls
in the Ethernet Configuration section are described below:

Version: 01
IP Address The IP Address can be any valid IP address in dotted nota-

tion (i.e. 192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask can be any valid subnet mask in dotted
notation (i.e. 255.255.255.0).
Gateway The Gateway Address can be any valid IP address in dotted
Address notation (i.e. 192.168.1.22).
Eth. Mode The Ethernet Mode combobox is used to select a standard
method of encapsulating IP datagrams on the selected ether-
net port. The Ethernet Mode may initially be set to 1042 if
the AP is not on a LAN, but should be set to 894 unless oth-
erwise directed by vendor support personnel, or written
operation documentation.
Services button The Services button is used to show the Services Configura-
tion dialog (see Figure 5-18) where communication services
available on the selected ethernet port may be configured.
Table 5-3 Ethernet Configuration Controls
See your LAN administrator for the proper values to be used in controls in Table 5-3.
Any changes made in the AP Communications Configuration dialog are saved (both to the APAC
database and to the AP being configured) upon clicking the Save button, or are discarded when
closing the dialog or clicking the Cancel button. Also, on close of the AP Communication Setup
dialog (see Figure 5-12) a prompt will be presented if any SMDI interfaces have changed. Select-
ing Yes will launch the SMDI NPA/NXX Configuration dialog (see Figure 5-15).
5.8.6.1 SMDI/MWI NPA-NXXs
To add a new NPA-NXX for which the selected AP will provide SMDI routing, select
Insert|NPA-NXX|SMDI/MWI NPA-NXX. Selecting this menu option will invoke the SMDI NPA/
NXX Configuration window. The SMDI routing information contained in this window is used by
the AP when sending Message Waiting Indication (MWI) messages (or other SMDI messages).
The AP can send SMDI messages via a serial port interface or by the SS7 network, and will select
the SMDI port or SS7 point code based on the destination NPA-NXX of the SMDI message. This
assignment is used by the AP to determine where and how to send SMDI information for a partic-
ular phone number.

Version: 01
Figure 5-15 SMDI NPA/NXX Configuration Window
The SMDI NPA/NXX Configuration window contains two sections: SMDI NPA/NXX Routing
List and Update AP. The SMDI NPA/NXX Routing List section displays the SMDI routing infor-
mation for existing SMDI NPA/NXXs. Entries that have been modified or added but have not yet
been transferred to the AP are shown in blue text. Note that an NPA-NXX can be routed to mul-
tiple destinations. Buttons for adding, editing, and deleting list records are found below the list.
The Update AP section contains two buttons that are used to transfer data from APAC to the AP
system displayed in the title bar of the window. The functions available using the buttons in these
sections are described below:
Add a Routing List Record - Press the Add button to open the Add New SMDI NPA/NXX dia-
log (Figure 5-16).
Figure 5-16 Add New SMDI NPA/NXX Dialog
The NPA/NXX fields are used to enter the NPA-NXX that will be enabled for SMDI/MWI signal-
ing.

Version: 01
The MSR ID and MSR DN fields are used to enter the Message Storage and Retrieval (MSR) val-
ues assigned to the AP for the specified NPA-NXX. A value of all zeros in an MSR field indi-
cates that this information is not used by the specified NPA-NXX. The Clear buttons next to each
MSR field are used to reset the field values to 10 zeros.
The Destination Address/Port dropdown box is used to select the destination address or serial port
to which SMDI information will be delivered. The default dropdown box contains a list of SMDI
serial ports (see Section 5.8.6 - "AP Communications Configuration") and any point code config-
ured as the far-end of an ISUP trunk group in the ISUP Trunk Group Properties window (see Sec-
tion 12.5.2). If an SMDI serial port has not been given a description (see Section 5.8.6) then a
default name will be created in the form of “Unit 0 J1600”. The buttons below the dropdown box
are used to add, edit, and delete destination point codes. They are described in detail below:
Add Press this button to invoke the SS7 Point Code Info dialog (see Figure 5-17),
which is used to add new destination point codes.
Figure 5-17 SS7 Point Code Info
Enter the point code, or SS7 address, of the SMDI destination in the Point Code
fields. An SS7 point code consists of three sub-fields: Network, Cluster, and
Member.
The Name field is optional, but may contain some information text (normally a
location or site name) describing the point code. This field can contain up to 25
characters.
The SMDI SSN field is used to store the subsystem number (SSN) of the SMDI
application at the specified point code and must be set to a value in the range of 1
to 255.
Populate the fields in the dialog and press the OK button to save the new point
code information. The Cancel button may be pressed at any time to exit the dialog
without saving a new point code.
Edit Select a destination point code and press this button to display the selected point
code in the SS7 Point Code Info dialog (Figure 5-17). The Point Code field will
be disabled, but the values in the Name and SMDI SSN fields can be modified.
Press the OK button to save any changes or press the Cancel button to exit the dia-
log without saving the changes.
Delete Press this button to delete the selected destination point code from the dropdown
list. A confirmation dialog will appear. Press the Yes button in the confirmation
dialog to complete the deletion, or press the No button to cancel the deletion.

Version: 01
Once the fields in the Add New SMDI NPA/NXX dialog have been populated, press the OK but-
ton to begin the verification of the new record. The Cancel button may be pressed at any time to
exit the dialog without adding a new record. If the NPA/NXX is determined to be valid, the des-
tination selected in the Destination Address/Port dropdown box will be combined with the NPA/
NXX and entered into the database. If the record is successfully placed in the database, the SMDI
NPA/NXX Routing List will be updated with the newly created entry. New list records must still
be saved to APAC (by pressing the Ctrl+S key combination on the keyboard or use the File | Save
menu command) and transferred to the AP (see the “Update the AP” description below) before
they will become active.
Edit a Routing List Record - Select a record in the routing list and press the Edit button to open
the Edit SMDI NPA/NXX dialog. The dialog used for editing records is the same as the dialog
used for adding records (see Figure 5-16), except the NPA/NXX field is disabled. See the “Add a
Routing List Record” description above for information on using the editing dialog. Press the OK
button when all changes are complete to close the dialog and apply the changes to the record, or
press the Cancel button to discard all changes and exit the dialog. Changes must still be saved to
APAC (by pressing the Ctrl+S key combination on the keyboard or use the File | Save menu com-
mand) and transferred to the AP (see the “Update the AP” description below) before they will
become active.
Delete Routing List Records - Select one or more records in the routing list and press the Delete
button. A delete confirmation dialog will appear. Press the Yes button in the confirmation dialog
to delete all selected records, or press the No button to cancel the deletion.
Update the AP - The Update AP section provides AP transaction options. Within this section a
specific transfer of the new SMDI NPA/NXXs (Transfer Changes button), or all SMDI NPA/
NXXs (Transfer All Data button), can be initiated to ensure AP deployment. These functions will
activate the SMDI NPA/NXX transfer routines that are shared with the other NPA/NXX AP
transfer operations. If any transactions are pending for the AP, the number of pending changes is
presented below the Transfer All Data button. If there are no transactions for the AP, the number
of pending changes will not be displayed. The number of pending changes can be greater than the
count of new entries (shown with blue text) in the SMDI NPA/NXX Routing List. This is due to
the fact that deleted records are hidden transactions that must still be sent to the AP to ensure the
AP deletes them.
5.8.6.2 MWI Options
The AP Options function is used to set generic system parameters associated with different AP
services. The following MWI options can be set by selecting the Tools|AP Options menu com-
mand and clicking on the MWI tab in the AP Options window:

Version: 01
Option Description Default

Value
Include Calling Include the Calling Party in the SS7 message when deliver- No
Party ing MWI over SS7.
Include MSR DN Include the Message Storage and Retrieval DN in the SS7 Yes
message when delivering MWI over SS7.
Include VMSR ID Include the Message Storage and Retrieval ID in the SS7 Yes
message when delivering MWI over SS7.
Include Bearer Include the Bearer Capability in the SS7 message when Yes
Capability delivering MWI over SS7.
Include Type Include the MWI Type in the SS7 message when delivering No
MWI over SS7.
Include Times- Include the Timestamp in the SS7 message when delivering No
tamp MWI over SS7.
Include SNIP Include the Signaling Network Information Parameter (SNIP) No

in the SS7 message when delivering MWI over SS7.
Table 5-4 MWI Option Descriptions

Version: 01
5.8.7 Services Configuration
Figure 5-18 Services Configuration
The Services Configuration dialog is used to configure the available AP High Speed Interface ser-
vices and the UDP or TCP port number that identifies the service. Each of the UDP services must
be assigned a unique UDP port number so that ethernet packets arriving on the AP's ethernet con-
nection can be routed to the correct AP High Speed Interface service. The unit and physical eth-
ernet port that are being configured are shown in the Unit/Port label above the services table. The
nine services that can be configured are ECHO, DISCARD, TFTP, TERMINAL, PUSH, VTFTP,
TELNET, NTP and SIP. Each service can run on any port in the range of 1-65535 and can be
enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking the Enable box associated with the specific ser-
vice.
• ECHO - Default UDP port: 7. Recommended status: Disabled. The function of this AP
High Speed Interface service is to transmit whatever data was sent to it back to the source.
This may be useful for testing purposes, however it is typically not needed on the AP.
• DISCARD - Default UDP port: 9. Recommended status: Disabled. The function of this AP
High Speed Interface service is to discard or ignore all data received for this UDP port num-
ber. Again, this may be useful for testing purposes, however it is typically not needed on the
AP.
• TFTP - Default UDP port: 69. Recommended status: Enabled. Trivial File Transfer Proto-
col. This AP High Speed Interface service is used by APAC when transmitting files to the
AP's disk. For example, fragment sound files used in announcements.
• TERMINAL - Default UDP port: 1001. Recommended status: Enabled. This AP High
Speed Interface service is used by APAC to transmit commands to the AP. This service
emulates the command line capabilities available on the AP's serial ports.
• PUSH - Default UDP port 1002. Recommended status: Enabled. This AP High Speed
Interface service is used by the AP to transmit and receive real-time status information about
the AP platform or a specific service and requires the configuration of additional options
(see Section 5.8.7.1 - "Push Additional Options").

Version: 01
• VTFTP - Default UDP port: 1003. Recommended status: Enabled. Voice Mail File System
Trivial File Transfer Protocol. This AP High Speed Interface service is used by APAC
when transmitting voice files to and from the AP's disk. For example, voice-mail message
files.
• TELNET - Default TCP Terminal port: 23. Recommended status: Enabled. This AP High
Speed Interface service is used by APAC to transmit commands to the AP and requires that
the AP have software release 4.2 or greater.
• NTP - Default NTP port: 123. Recommended status: Enabled. This is the port used by the
AP for Network Time Protocol (NTP). NTP is used to perodically synchronize the AP sys-
tem time with the clocks of computers over the Internet. NTP is only available on AP sys-
tems with software release 4.2.1 or greater. See Section 11.1.4 for more information about
NTP.
• SIP - Default SIP port: 5060. Recommended status: Enabled. This is the port used by the
AP for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). SIP is used by the AP to communicate with Voice
Over IP (VoIP)-based phones and VoIP-based switches. SIP is only available on AP sys-
tems with software release 5.0 or greater. See Section 12.7 for more information about SIP.
Any changes made in the Services Configuration dialog are saved (both to the APAC database
and to the AP being configured) when clicking OK, or discarded when closing the dialog or click-
ing the Cancel button.
Clicking the Defaults button will set the services configuration to the recommended settings
and will be valid for most situations.
5.8.7.1 Push Additional Options
The Push service requires the configuration of options in addition to the Push UDP port assign-
ment (see Section 5.8.7 - "Services Configuration"). These options are required by the Push fea-
ture to support the transmission of Push messages.
These additional options are displayed when the Show button in the PUSH Add’l Options cell is
pressed (see Figure 5-18). This button is a toggle to display/hide the additional Push options and,
when pressed, will change into the Hide button (see Figure 5-19). When the Hide button is
pressed, the dialog collapses to its original size and the button text returns to “Show”.

Version: 01
Figure 5-19 Push Additional Options
The Push additional options are listed below:

• Ethernet Interface - This option specifies the default physical AP ethernet interface/port
used by the AP when transmitting Push messages. The user can select one of two values
from the drop-down list: J1400\Eth0 or J1500\Eth1. These selections correspond to the
physical ethernet ports on the back of the AP. The port selected must be connected to a
Local Area Network (LAN).
• AP Monitor IP Address - This option is used to inform the AP of the default IP address it
should use when transmitting Push messages. The value of this option should specify the IP
address of the Innovative Systems Internet Access (ISIA) system web server. This com-
puter runs the AP Monitor program that handles the routing of Push messages. See the
Internet Access Service Provider manual for more information about the ISIA system.
• TCP Link Status - This field is read-only and displays the status of the TCP connection
between the AP and the ISIA system web server.
The values displayed for the Push options are the current values of these settings as read from the
AP. These values can be changed by editing the Value cell for each option. When the cursor is
moved to the Value entry for either option, a description text for that option is displayed below the
Push Options table. New values are saved to the AP when the user selects the OK button. If the
Cancel button is pressed, any changes are not saved.
When the Defaults button is pressed, APAC will check the ISIA Service Provider Information
(APAC menu Insert|AP Internet Access System|Service Provider Info) and attempt to populate the
AP Monitor IP Address based on the Service Provider URL. For example, if the Service Provider
URL is 172.23.8.1/APInternetAccess, then the AP Monitor IP Address field will be set to
172.023.008.001. If the Service Provider URL is www.sometelco.com/APInternetAccess, then
APAC will attempt to resolve www.sometelco.com to an IP address and set the AP Monitor IP
Address field to the resolved IP address.

Version: 01

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 6 - AP Transfer
Chapter 6 - AP Transfer
6.1 Transfer to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|Service Data to AP command or click the Transfer to AP button,
, on the toolbar to transfer service data to the selected AP. When updates to service informa-
tion (e.g., calling name or global title translation) are made and saved, these changes are stored in
the APAC database. In order to take affect in the AP, these changes must be transferred to the AP
using this command.
When this command is selected, the Transfer to AP window is displayed. Using this window,
select the services whose data should be transferred to the AP.
Figure 6-1 Transfer to AP Window
There are two basic modes of transfer:

1. Transfer only the changes made since the last transfer.
2. Transfer all service data for the selected services.
WARNING: Transferring all service data to the AP will overwrite ALL records on the AP
for the tables selected in the Transfer To AP window. If any service data in these tables has
been modified on the AP, it WILL BE LOST unless it is first transferred to APAC.

Version: 01
The Transfer To AP window is initially displayed in the ‘transfer changes only’ mode. Any ser-
vice that has changes pending is checked, and the number of entries to transfer is displayed. Ser-
vices that have no changes pending are disabled. Leave checked the services you wish to transfer,
and uncheck any services you do not wish to transfer.
If all of the service data in the APAC database should be transferred for one or more services, then
select the 'All Data' transfer type. The Transfer to AP window will re-calculate the number of
entries for each service in the APAC database and display these numbers. Check the checkboxes
associated with any service tables that need to be transferred and be sure that any service tables
that need not be transferred are unchecked.
The Call Management Features (CMF) Restore is only available in the 'All Data' transfer mode.
Because the CMF data in the AP is dynamically updated by CMF subscribers from their tele-
phone, APAC does not keep CMF data in a database. Rather, the CMF data from the AP can be
backed up and stored in a backup file accessible by APAC. This backup file can be restored to the
AP by checking the Call Management Features Restore item in the Transfer to AP window.
When the Call Management Features Restore is checked, you will be asked to select a backup file
for restoration to the AP. If a valid CMF backup file is selected, the CMF Restore checkbox will
remain selected and the number of bytes to restore will be displayed.
Once you have selected the correct data to transfer, click the Start Transfer button to initiate the
transfer to the AP. If you decide not to perform the transfer at this time, select the ‘X’ in the
upper-right corner of the Transfer to AP window to exit the window.
After the Start Transfer button is selected, a connection with the AP is established. A progress
bar is subsequently displayed at the top of the APAC window. This progress bar will display the
name of the AP, the current service data being transferred and its progress, and the total progress
completed relative to all the service data that must be transferred. The status bar at the bottom of
the APAC window may also display progress information during large data transfers.
The transfer can be aborted by selecting the Cancel button on the progress bar.
This transfer can be scheduled using the APAC Scheduler. Please refer to Chapter 16 - "Schedul-
ing" for more information.
6.2 Transfer from AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer| Service Data from AP command or click the Transfer from AP but-
ton, , on the toolbar to transfer service data from the selected AP to the APAC databases.
Some SLPs (Service Logic Programs) allow the end user to change data stored in service logic
data tables (such as changing the PIN). When changes are made to service data in the Service
Logic data tables by an SLP, this information is stored on the AP. In order to view current data in
a table, these changes must be transferred from the AP to the APAC databases with this com-
mand. After the Service Logic data is retrieved from the AP, the APAC database will match the

Version: 01
contents on the AP. If necessary, the administrators may subsequently change the data in the
table, and then use the Tools|AP Transfer|Transfer Service Data to AP command to transfer the
changes to the AP.
This command also provides a backup of the service data information in case anything should
happen to both AP units. This backup file is only needed if both units and their disks fail simulta-
neously.
When this command is selected, the Transfer from AP window is displayed. Through this win-
dow, select the services whose data should be transferred from the AP.
Figure 6-2 Transfer from AP Window
If you select Service Logic Data, highlight the table of your choice from the selection box. The
selection box will be filled with any tables that have been defined on the selected AP because an
associated SLP (i.e., an SLP that uses that table) has been deployed to the AP.
Check the items you wish to transfer, and uncheck any items that you do not wish to transfer.
Once you have selected the data to transfer, click the Start Transfer button to begin the transfer
from the AP. If you decide not to perform the transfer at this time, click the Cancel button to exit
the Transfer from AP window.
If you have not selected to transfer CMF backup information, a connection with the AP is estab-
lished now. A progress bar is subsequently displayed at the top of the APAC window. This
progress bar will display the name of the AP and the backup process. The transfer can be aborted
by selecting the Cancel button on the progress bar.
If there are any pending changes in the APAC database for a Service Logic table, you are
informed of this condition, and warned that the changed data will be lost if you continue with the
transfer-from. You are then asked if you would like to continue or cancel.
If you have selected to transfer CMF (Call Management Features) backup information, a file
selection window will be displayed where the name and location of the new CMF backup file
must be specified.

Version: 01
CMF backup files, by default, have a .cmf extension. The file selection window provides a
default file name constructed from the current date with a .cmf extension. It is recommended that
CMF backup files from different APs are stored in different directories, so it can be easily deter-
mined to which AP a CMF backup file belongs.
Once a CMF backup filename/location is successfully specified, a connection with the AP is

established. A progress bar is subsequently displayed at the top of the APAC window. This
progress bar will display the name of the AP and the progress of the backup process. The CMF
backup information is stored in the specified backup file.
The CMF backup file can be restored to the AP with the Tools|Transfer to AP command.
This transfer can be scheduled using the APAC Scheduler. Please refer to Chapter 16 - "Schedul-
ing" for more information.
6.3 Transfer New Announcements to AP
Select Tools|AP Transfer|Announcements|Load New to transfer specific announcements to the

selected AP. Initially, the Select Announcements for “AP Name” window will appear.
The Select Announcements window contains an announcement selection list (left-hand list) and
an existing announcements list (right-hand list). The columns in both lists may be sorted by click-
ing on the column headings.
The selection list contains announcements that have not been transferred to the AP, and
announcements with a higher version number than the announcement currently deployed to the
AP. If more than one version of an announcement exists, only the highest version will be shown.
Announcements not displayed in the selection list (e.g. an older version of an announcement) may
be transferred to the AP via the Announcement Information window (see Section 15.8).
To transfer announcements to the selected AP, highlight the announcements that you wish to
transfer, and click the OK button. If you do not wish to transfer any announcements, select the
Cancel button or click the in the upper right-hand corner of the window.

Version: 01
Figure 6-3 Select Announcements to Transfer
After the OK button is selected, a connection with the AP is established. A progress bar is subse-
quently displayed at the top of the APAC window. This progress bar will display the name of the
AP, the current announcement file being transferred and its progress, and the total progress com-
plete relative to all the announcements that must be transferred. The status bar at the bottom of
the APAC window may also display progress information during large data transfers.
After the transfer has successfully been completed, the announcements are active and available
for use.
6.4 Reload All Announcements to AP
Select Tools|AP Transfer|Announcements|Reload All to reload all the announcements previously

transferred to the current AP. When this command is selected, the following confirmation win-
dow is displayed.
Figure 6-4 Announcement Reload Confirmation Window
To reload all the announcements to the specified AP, select OK. To terminate the Announcement
Reload Operation, select Cancel.

Version: 01
After you have selected OK, a connection with the AP is established. A progress bar is subse-
AP and the progress of the announcement reload process.
6.5 Transfer New Fragments to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|Fragments|Load New command to transfer specific fragment(s) to

the selected AP. Fragments are independent voice phrases used by announcements. Announce-
ments on the AP are simply a concatenation of the selected fragments needed to form a specific
announcement. Therefore, in order for an announcement to play correctly, all the fragments used
by the announcement must be stored on the AP.
Initially, the Fragment Selection for "AP Name" appears.
Figure 6-5 Select Fragments to Transfer
From this window you specify which fragment(s) to transfer to the selected AP. To do this, high-
light the fragment(s) that you wish to transfer, and click the OK button. If you do not wish to
transfer the fragment(s), select the Cancel button or click the in the upper right corner of the
window.
After the OK button is selected, a connection with the AP is established. A progress bar is subse-
AP, the current fragment(s) being transferred and its progress, and the total progress completed
relative to all the fragment(s) that must be transferred. The status bar at the top of the APAC win-
dow may also display progress information during large data transfers.
Once the transfer has successfully been completed, the fragments are active and available for use.

Version: 01
6.6 Reload All Fragments to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|Fragments|Reload All command to reload all the fragments previ-
ously transferred to the current AP. When this command is selected, the following confirmation
window is displayed.
Figure 6-6 Fragment Reload Confirmation Window
To reload all the fragments to the specified AP, select OK. To terminate the Fragment Reload
Operation, select Cancel.
After you have selected OK, a connection with the AP is established. A progress bar is subse-
AP and the progress of the fragment reload process.
6.7 Reload All Base Fragments to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|Fragments|Reload All Base command to transfer all of the base
fragments to the current AP. When this command is selected, the following confirmation window
will be displayed.
Figure 6-7 Base Fragment Reload Confirmation Window
To reload all the base fragments onto the specified AP, select OK. To terminate the Base Frag-
ment Reload operation, select Cancel.

Version: 01
If OK is selected, a connection with the AP will be established and a progress bar will be dis-
played at the top of the APAC window. The progress bar will display the name of the AP and the
status of the base fragment reload process.
6.8 Transfer Program File to AP
Use the Tools|AP Transfer|AP Software|Program Load command to transfer a program file to the
selected AP. Program files are generic releases of the AP operating software. They contain a spe-
cific release of the software that controls the AP’s actions. New program file release can contain
upgrades to existing AP operations or they can contain new AP service software. Once placed on
the AP’s disk, this software program may be loaded and executed by the AP.
When this APAC command is selected, a file selection window will be displayed. From this win-
dow, select the AP program file that is to be transferred to the AP’s disk. Once a file is selected, a
confirmation window is displayed where you have the option of continuing with the program file
transfer or canceling the operation. If you elect to continue from the confirmation window, a con-
nection with the AP is established and a progress bar is subsequently displayed at the top of the
APAC window. This progress bar will display the name of the AP, and show the progress of the
program load operation. The status bar at the bottom of the APAC window will also display
progress information.
Once the program file has been transferred from APAC to the AP, APAC will instruct the AP
unit, to which it is connected, to transfer the program file to the mate AP unit. After this inter-unit
transfer is complete, APAC will send commands to the AP units to set their 'boot pointers' to the
new file. The 'boot pointer' indicates which program file should be loaded and executed when an
AP unit is restarted. After the APAC Program Load function is complete, both units will load and
execute the new program file whenever they are restarted.
NOTE: The AP units must be restarted before they will execute the new program load.
Until they are restarted, the units will continue to execute their existing program software.
6.9 Transfer ROM Software to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|AP Software|ROM Load command to initiate application of new
Read Only Memory (ROM) software on the selected AP. The ROM software is executed when
an AP unit is restarted. It performs various low-level tasks during the boot-up process, including
loading and initiating execution of the main program file.

Version: 01
dow, select the AP ROM file that is to be transferred to the AP's disk. Once a file is selected, a
confirmation window is displayed where you have the option of continuing with the ROM file
transfer or canceling the operation. If you elect to continue from the confirmation window, a con-
nection with the AP is established and a progress bar is subsequently displayed at the top of the
APAC window. This progress bar will display the name of the AP, and show the progress of the
load operation. The status bar at the bottom of the APAC window will also display progress
information. The transfer can be aborted by selecting the Cancel button on the progress bar.
Once the ROM file has been transferred from APAC to the AP, APAC will instruct the AP unit, to
which it is connected to transfer the ROM file to the mate AP unit. After this inter-unit transfer is
complete, APAC will send commands to the AP units to apply the ROM file to the ROM chips.
Therefore, after the APAC ROM Load function is complete, both units will execute the new
ROM file whenever they are restarted.
NOTE: Once APAC begins to write the ROM, the process on the AP will run to comple-
tion, even if the APAC Cancel button is pressed. If an error is detected during this phase of
the load process it will be reported by APAC as a failure of the “LOAD ROM” command.
The ROM software load must be retried or the unit replaced. If this failure is not corrected,
it is very likely that the unit will not return to service following the next restart.
6.10 Transfer 6811 Software to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|AP Software|6811 Load command to initiate application of new
software in the 6811 processor of the selected AP. The AP uses its 6811 processor to control the
low-level signaling on the T1 connections.
NOTE: The T1 ports will be removed from service for a short time during this transfer pro-
cess. The ports will be taken out of service for one unit at a time.
dow, select the AP 6811 software file that is to be transferred to the AP's disk. Once a file is
selected, a confirmation window is displayed where you have the option of continuing with the
file transfer or canceling the operation. If you elect to continue from the confirmation window, a
connection with the AP is established and a progress bar is subsequently displayed at the top of
the APAC window. This progress bar will display the name of the AP, and show the progress of
the load operation. The status bar at the bottom of the APAC window will also display progress
information. The transfer can be aborted by selecting the Cancel button on the progress bar.

Version: 01
Once the 6811 software file has been transferred from APAC to the AP, APAC will instruct the
AP unit to which it is connected (referred to as the “local” unit) to transfer the program file to the
mate AP unit. After this inter-unit transfer is complete, APAC will perform the following steps:
1. Remove from service the T1 connections and the 6811 processor in the local unit.
2. Apply the new software to the local 6811 processor.
3. Return to service the local 6811 processor and the T1 connections.
4. Remove from service the T1 connections and the 6811 processor in the mate unit.
5. Apply the new software to the mate 6811 processor.
6. Return to service the mate 6811 processor and the T1 connections.
Therefore, after the APAC 6811 Load function is complete, both units will be executing the new
software.
NOTE: Once APAC begins to write the load to the 6811 processor, this process on the AP
will run to completion, even if the APAC Cancel button is pressed. If an error is detected
during this phase of the load process, reported by APAC as a failure of the “LOAD 6811”
command, the ROM software load must be retried or the unit replaced. If this failure is not
corrected, it is very likely that the functionality of the T1 connections will be adversely
affected.
6.11 Configure DSP and Transfer Software to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|AP Software|DSP Config & Load... command to configure the AP's
8 (4 per unit) Digital Signal Processor (DSP) chips and load them with the correct software. Each
AP unit contains four DSP chips, and each of these processors can be loaded with a specific set of
software to perform a specialized function. The DSPs work in conjunction with the AP's main
processor off loading some of the more complex mathematical calculations relating to the inter-
pretation and generation of audio.
When this command is selected, the DSP Configuration and Load window will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 6-8 DSP Configuration and Load Window
The window is divided into two sections: Unit 1, and Unit 0. Each section contains a diagram
where each DSP is represented, and the current configuration of each DSP chip is shown.
To configure the DSP chips, use the pull-down menu next to each DSP to choose either:
• Tone Detector – Tone Detector DSP mode provides MF and DTMF tone detection capabil-
ities (for Release 4.0 and greater APs). Multiple DSPs per unit may be configured as a Tone
Detector.
• Voice Processor – Voice Processors perform processing on speech signals used in
announcements. A DSP in this mode may process up to 32 simultaneous voice streams for
announcements and voice mail. Only one DSP per AP unit may be configured as Voice
Processor mode.
• Unused – The Unused mode sets the DSP into an idle or unused state.
• Auxiliary Voice – This mode allows the DSP to process up to 16 simultaneous voice
streams for announcements. The Auxiliary Voice mode used in addition to the Voice Pro-
cessor mode allows an AP unit to process up to 48 simultaneous voice streams. Only one
DSP per AP unit may be configured as Auxiliary Voice mode. This mode exists only in
Release 4.0 or greater APs.
• Conference – A DSP configered in this mode will provide the functionality to merge multi-
ple audio channels as necessary to support conference calls. Typically only one DSP per
unit should be configured as a Conference DSP.

Version: 01
Upon selecting one of the above DSP modes, a file selection dialog box will appear, prompting
the user to select the software file to be loaded on to the DSP. Please refer to the AP Software
Release Notes for information about which file to select for DSP code. The File button under
each pull-down menu may also be used to select a different file to be applied to the DSP, that is, if
the user wishes to select a new software file but not change the software type.
If the DSP chip is loaded with Tone Detector software, a green music note will be displayed on
the DSP chip. If the DSP chip is loaded with Voice Processor or Auxiliary Voice software, a yel-
low megaphone will be displayed on the DSP chip.
The window displayed in Figure 6-8 shows the default configuration for the DSPs: two DSPs in
each unit configured as Tone Detectors, one DSP configured as a Voice Processor, and one DSP
configured as Auxiliary Voice. This is the recommended configuration for the current AP
release.
After configuration of the DSPs is complete, select the in the upper right corner of the win-
dow. If any of the DSP configurations have changed, a prompt to save the DSP Configuration
changes will be presented. Selecting Yes will invoke a prompt with the following message;
"There are changes that have not been transferred to the AP. Transfer them now? Yes or No". If
Yes is selected, a connection will be made with the selected AP, and the changes will be trans-
ferred. If No is selected, the DSP Configuration and Load window will disappear and the config-
uration setting will be saved in the APAC database.
To reload the current DSP configuration to all AP DSPs, use the Tools|AP Transfer|AP Soft-
ware|DSP Reload command.
6.12 Reload DSP Software to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|AP Software|DSP Reload command to reload current DSP configu-
ration and software files to all AP DSPs.
dow, select the AP DSP file that is to be reloaded to the AP’s disk (please refer to the AP Soft-
ware Release Notes for information about which file to select for DSP code). Once a file is
selected, a confirmation window is displayed where you have the option of continuing with the
DSP reload or canceling the operation. If you elect to continue from the confirmation window, a
connection with the AP is established and a progress bar is subsequently displayed at the top of
the APAC window. This progress bar will display the name of the AP, and show the progress of
the load operation. The status bar at the bottom of the APAC window will also display progress
information.

Version: 01
6.13 Transfer File to AP
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|File to AP command to transfer a file to the selected AP’s disk.
When this command is selected, the file open dialog box will be displayed. From there, select the
file you wish to transfer and select the Open button. If you do not want to open a file at this time,
select the Cancel button to exit the File Open dialog box.
A connection will be established with the AP, and the file will be transferred. APAC will load the
file on the disk of both AP units. The file on the APs’ disks will have the same name as the file
selected on the PC.
WARNING! If a file with the same name currently exists on the AP, it will be over-
written.
6.14 Patch Manager
The Patch Manager feature is used to update AP software releases with a patch file instead of
loading a new generic release of AP operating software onto the AP system. Patch file updates do
not require a restart of the AP units for the patches to take effect. This feature is only available for
AP systems running AP software release 4.2 or greater.
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|AP Software|Patch Manager command to open the Patch Manager
window (see Figure 6-9). The Patch Manager window is used to display the patch files currently
applied to the selected AP system, and to upload new patch files to the AP system.
Figure 6-9 Patch Manager Window

Version: 01
The Patch Manager window is divided into two panes. The left-hand pane contains a list of the
patches that are present on Unit 0, and the right-hand pane contains a list of the patches that are
present on Unit 1. The lists of patches in these panes should always be identical. When patches
are added or deleted using the Patch Manager, they will automatically be added or deleted from
both units.
To add a patch to the AP, begin by pressing the Upload Patch button. A standard file selection
window will be displayed. Select a patch file (patch files are indicated by a .pch extension) and
press the Open button in the file selection window. The patch will be transferred and loaded on
both AP units.
To delete a patch from the AP, either select the patch file in one of the lists in the Patch Manager
window and press the <Delete> key on the keyboard, or right-click on the patch file to invoke a
popup menu and select the Delete command in the popup. A delete confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Press the Yes button in the confirmation dialog to remove the patch from both AP
units, or press the No button to cancel the deletion.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 7 - SS7 Network
Chapter 7 - SS7 Network
SS7, also known as Signaling System #7, is an out-of-band signaling system used to provide basic
routing information, call set-up, and other call termination functions. Signaling is removed from
the voice channel itself and put on a separate data network. The AP uses the SS7 network to
transfer data related to many of the services provided by the AP, including calling name informa-
tion and information to perform SLPs (Service Logic Programs).
7.1 Configuring the SS7 Network Parameters
Select Tools|SS7 Network to configure the SS7 network parameters for the selected AP. When
this command is selected, the SS7 Network window will be displayed. APAC will now attempt to
collect any existing SS7 Network configuration information from the AP and enter the informa-
tion in the SS7 Network window accordingly.
Figure 7-1 SS7 Network Configuration Window
Complete the following steps to configure the network parameters.

1. Enter the AP point code(s). Initially, the default point code in the AP is displayed in the
Both Units field, indicating that both AP units will use the same point code. If a default
point code is not found, 000.000.000 will be displayed. SS7 point codes are partitioned
into three 3-digit sections: network, cluster, and member. The value of the network por-
tion of the point code must be in the range 1-255.
The normal, default configuration is for the AP system to be treated as a single SS7 net-
work element and therefore both units are assigned the same SS7 point code. However, if
the selected AP is running software release 5.0 or greater, an alternate point code may be
assigned to AP Unit 1. To assign an alternate point code, check the Use Alternate Point
Code box and enter the point code for Unit 1 in the Unit 1 field. The Both Units field will

Version: 01
become the Unit 0 field and AP Unit 0 will use the point code specified in that field. If the
Use Alternate Point Code box is unchecked, the Unit 0 field will revert to the Both Units
field and both AP units will begin using the point code in that field.
2. Set the SS7 Links information for each SS7 data link. The AP currently supports four SS7
data links, two links connected to each AP unit.
a. For each SS7 link that will be used, use the pull-down menu to toggle the SLC (Signal-
ing Link Code) value from Unused to 0-3.
Each used link must be assigned a unique SLC. For example, if Unit 0, Link 0 is set to
1, Unit 1, Link 0 must be set to a value other than 1. The signaling link code used for
each link must match the SLC used in the SRP/STP at the opposite end of the data
link. The SLC is the only common link identity information used at both ends of the
data link and is therefore used by the network element at each end of the link to trans-
fer link status information to the opposite end of the link.
b. Next, enter the Far-end Point Code for each SS7 data link. This identifies the signal-
ing point at the immediate far-end of the SS7 data link. This information is required
for each used SS7 link so that the AP can correctly negotiate link operation activities,
such as link activation.
c. Use the pull-down menu to select a method of Transport for each link.
The usual method for connecting a SS7 link to the AP is RS449. There are two RS449
connectors on the back of each AP unit; one for each SS7 link the AP can support.
When RS449 is selected as the method of transport for a SS7 link, there is a static
mapping of the RS449 connector to a SS7 link number. SS7 Link 0 on each AP unit is
associated with RS449 connector J1200 and SS7 Link 1 on each AP unit is associated
with RS449 connector J1300.
Instead of using the RS449 SS7 link connection, an SS7 link can use an available
channel from one of the T1 circuits attached to the AP unit. The pull-down menu in
the Transport field will contain the T1 channels that APAC has determined are avail-
able. If an expected T1 channel is not shown in the list, use the Trunk Configuration
command to determine if the channel is currently in use by another trunk service, or if
the T1 is not configured as a "connected" T1.
d. Optionally configure linksets (collections of links that use the same point code) for the
SS7 links that are being used. The Linkset Configuration interface (available for AP
systems running software release 5.0 or greater) is accessed by pressing the but-
ton in the toolbar on the left-hand side of the SS7 Network Configuration window. If
no linksets are defined, the AP will assume all links belong to the same linkset and ter-
minate to the same SS7 point code. Defining multiple linksets allows the AP to serve
up to four Service Switching Points (SSPs) with different point codes without requir-
ing an STP. See Section 7.1.1 - "Linkset Configuration" for more information on con-
figuring linksets.

Version: 01
e. If linksets are being used, assign far-end point codes to linkset routes using the Linkset
Route Management interface. The Linkset Route Management interface (see Section
7.1.2) is available for AP systems running software release 5.0 or greater and is
accessed by pressing the button in the toolbar on the left-hand side of the SS7 Net-
work Configuration window.
3. Select the Data Transfer Rate for SS7 over T1. When using a T1 as the transport method,
the SS7 links can be configured for 56K bits-per-second or 64K bits-per-second transfer
rates.
4. Check or uncheck the Perform Link-Test on Activation check box. This option indicates if
the SS7 Signaling Link Test is to be performed on a SS7 link that is transitioning to an
active (or in-service) state. When the box is checked, the link test will be performed.
When the box is unchecked, the link test will not be performed. The link test is meant to
validate the configuration of the link and verify its traffic carrying capability.
5. Enter the subsystem numbers and translation types for the AP’s Calling Name, CMF,
CLASS, MATESCP and Switch Time Monitor features. See Chapter 8 - "Global Title
Translation" for information about subsystem numbers and translation types.
6. A Mate AP System may be selected at this time if this AP is supposed to share calling
name data with another AP system. Calling names added or deleted from either AP will
also be added and deleted on the other AP system.
7. Save (File|Save) the settings to transfer the network parameters to the selected AP.
7.1.1 Linkset Configuration
The Linkset Configuration interface is used to manage linksets for AP systems with software
release 5.0 or greater. A linkset is a collection of SS7 data links that terminate to the same point
code. The following items should be noted before configuring linksets for an AP:
• Only active SS7 links can be placed in linksets. An "active" SS7 link is a link that has been
assigned an SLC value if 0-3 in the SS7 Network Configuration window (see Figure 7-1).
• If any SS7 links are assigned to linksets, then all active SS7 links must be assigned to link-
sets.
• Each linkset serves one far-end point code. Therefore, SS7 links placed in a single linkset
must share the same far-end point code. The Combined Linksets configuration (see Section
7.1.1.3) can be used to join linksets with differing far-end point codes.
• When SS7 links are assigned to linksets, they are re-assigned linkset-specific SLC values.
However, the SLC values defined in the SS7 Network Configuration window (Figure 7-1)
are still retained for internal AP usage and should not be changed. If the SLC value for an
SS7 link is changed from within the SS7 Network Configuration window, that link will be
removed from its linkset.

Version: 01
To access the Linkset Configuration interface, press the button in the toolbar on the left-hand
side of the SS7 Network Configuration window (Figure 7-1). A window similar to Figure 7-2
will be displayed.
Figure 7-2 Linkset Configuration
The Linkset Configuration window is divided into three sections: SS7 Links (see Section 7.1.1.1),
Linksets (see Section 7.1.1.2), and Combined Linksets (see Section 7.1.1.3). These sections are
described below.
Note: Changes made in the Linkset Configuration window will not be saved unless the OK
button is pressed to submit the changes, and then the pending changes are saved from within
SS7 Network Configuration window (see Figure 7-1) by using the File|Save APAC menu
command, or one of the other standard save mechanisms in APAC.
7.1.1.1 SS7 Links Section
The SS7 Links section contains a list of active SS7 links. Links in this list can be assigned to link-
sets by dragging and dropping individual links onto Linkset nodes in the Linksets section. When
a link is dropped on a Linkset node, an SLC Selection window similar to Figure 7-3 will be dis-
played. Any SLC values that are already assigned to links will be unavailable in the SLC Selec-
tion window. Select an available SLC and press the OK button in the SLC Selection window to
complete the link assignment.
Figure 7-3 SLC Selection

Version: 01
To change the SLC for an SS7 link that has been assigned to a linkset, double-click the link in the
Linksets section to open the SLC Selection window, select the new SLC, and then press the OK
button.
7.1.1.2 Linksets Section
The Linksets section contains a tree of four Linkset nodes. When SS7 links are assigned
(described in Section 7.1.1.1) to a Linkset node, they will be displayed under that node, as illus-
trated in Figure 7-4 below.
Figure 7-4 Linksets Tree
To delete an SS7 link from a Linkset node, select the link and press the Remove Link button.
7.1.1.3 Combined Linksets Section
The Combined Linksets section allows multiple linksets to be joined together to allow manage-
ment of different far-end point codes as one cohesive unit. This is typically used when two link-
sets are served by a mated pair of Signaling Transfer Points (STPs). To assign a linkset to a
Combined Linkset node, drag and drop the linkset from the Linksets section onto the desired node
in the Combined Linksets tree. The linkset will be displayed below the target Combined Linkset
node, as illustrated in Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Combined Linksets
To delete a linkset from a Combined Linkset node, select the linkset and press the Remove Linkset
button.

Version: 01
7.1.2 Linkset Route Management
The Linkset Route Management interface is used to assign point codes to linksets (collections of
SS7 data links that may use the same point code). If linksets are being used, assigning point codes
to linksets is necessary to determine the SS7 link to use when transmitting SS7 messages. Link-
sets are defined in the Linkset Configuration window (see Figure 7-2).
The Linkset Route Management interface is available for AP systems running software release
5.0 or greater and will be automatically displayed throughout APAC when new point codes are
added. To manually access this interface, press the button in the toolbar on the left-hand side
of the SS7 Network Configuration window (see Figure 7-1). A window similar to Figure 7-6 will
be displayed.
Figure 7-6 Linkset Route Management Window
The Linkset Route Management window is divided into two sections: Point Codes and Current
Linkset Routes. These sections are described below.
7.1.2.1 Point Codes Section
The Point Codes section contains a list of each far-end point code used by the AP, and the linkset
to which each point code has been assigned. When the AP transmits an SS7 messages to a given
point code, the message will be transmitted on a link in the specified linkset. The point code list
can be sorted by clicking on the Point Code or Linkset column headings.
Point codes are assigned to linksets by dragging and dropping individual point codes onto Linkset
nodes in the Current Linkset Routes section.
7.1.2.2 Current Linkset Routes Section
This section contains a tree of four Linkset nodes. When point codes are assigned to a Linkset
node, they will be displayed under that node. To remove a point code from a linkset, select the
point code in the Current Linkset Routes tree and press the Remove Point Code button.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 8 - Global Title Translation
Chapter 8 - Global Title Translation
Global Title Translation (GTT) is a SS7 standard operation that uses telephone network related
information in a SS7 message in order to determine the destination address of that SS7 message.
It allows SS7 message originators to send messages without knowing the final destination of the
SS7 message. SS7 messages are routed to network elements, such as the AP, where the Global
Title Address is translated to a destination SS7 point code. Once the translation is performed, the
message is forwarded to that SS7 Signaling Point.
This chapter describes how to provision the AP so that it can properly translate received SS7 mes-
sages that require Global Title Translation.
The AP currently supports two types of Global Title Translation, CLASS GTT, and Generic GTT.
The CLASS GTT function performs translation for only CLASS SS7 messages. The Generic
GTT function allows the AP to translate any received SS7 message that requires Global Title
Translation. This Generic GTT function is meant to supersede the CLASS GTT function. Note
that CLASS messages can be translated by the Generic GTT function. The two types of GTT are
mutually exclusive. The AP's GTT function can operate in the CLASS GTT mode or in the
Generic GTT mode, but not in both modes at the same time. By default, the AP is set to operate in
the CLASS GTT mode. However, this can be changed by setting an AP option.
8.1 CLASS GTT
CLASS Global Title Translation, or CLASS GTT defines how the AP translates the NPA-NXX/
thousands group received in CLASS SS7 messages into SS7 Signaling Point Code addresses.
Once the translation is performed, the CLASS message is forwarded to that SS7 Signaling Point.
If a CLASS message is received with an NPA-NXX/Thousands group for which there is no GTT
entry, the AP will forward the message to the SS7 point code that is defined by the CLASS expan-
sion parameter.
Note that the number of CLASS GTT entries available depends on how many the AP System was
licensed to provide. Each thousands group selected for translation is considered one GTT entry.
The Basic AP System provides 1000 GTT entries.
Refer to the AP Installation and Maintenance Manual for more information regarding Global Title
translation for CLASS.
8.1.1 Define a CLASS GTT
Select Insert|Global Title Translation|Class GTT... to define the CLASS GTT entries for the
selected AP. When this command is selected, the Add Global Title Translation window will be
displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 8-1 Add GTT Window
Perform the following steps to complete a GTT entry:

1. Select Insert|Global Title Translation|CLASS GTT.
2. Enter the desired NPA-NXX for which GTT will be done.
3. If all of the thousands groups within the NPA-NXX are to be translated to the same point
code, leave the All box checked. If only selected thousands groups within the NPA-NXX
are to be translated to the specified point code, click on the All check-box to remove the
check mark then check the individual thousands group check-boxes until only the desired
thousands groups are checked.
4. Enter the SS7 Signaling Point Code to which this NPA-NXX/thousands groups should be
translated.
5. Save the changes to commit the NPA-NXX/thousands group to the APAC database, or
close the window and select No to discard the changes. Any saved GTT entries must be
subsequently transferred to the AP using the Transfer to AP command before they take
affect.
8.1.2 Viewing and Editing CLASS GTT Entries
The list of current Global Title Translation entries may be viewed by selecting View|Global Title
Translations|CLASS GTTs. A list of translations will be displayed. To modify or delete a transla-
tion, click on the desired NPA-NXX and click the Edit button. Or if you like, a right mouse click
on the desired entry will display a pop-up menu with these functions.
8.1.3 Convert CLASS to Generic
WARNING! A recent backup of the APAC databases should exist before performing
this function.

Version: 01
Select the Insert|Global Title Translation|Convert CLASS to Generic command to convert exist-
ing CLASS GTT entries to Generic GTT database entries for the selected AP.
NOTE: The conversion process creates a 6-digit GTT output. If a seven digit lookup is
required, use Insert|Global Title Translation|Generic GTT command to enter all CLASS
GTT entries in the Generic GTT form. If you choose to use the Insert|Global Title Transla-
tion|Convert CLASS to Generic command instead, any 7-digit CLASS GTT entries will be
truncated from seven digits to six digits.
When this command is selected, the Convert CLASS GTT to Generic GTT form is displayed.
Figure 8-2 Convert CLASS to Generic
There are three values to enter to control how CLASS GTT entries are converted:
Map Number The Map Number is a number, from 0-19. See the Section 8.2 for more
details on the map number.
CLASS Translation Type The Translation Type value received in the SS7 CLASS message that
requires Global Title Translation. The value range is 1-254. CLASS
messages typically use value 251.
CLASS Subsystem Number The Subsystem Number value placed in the SS7 message after Global
Title Translation. The value range is 1-254. CLASS messages typically
use value 251 for their subsystem number.
The conversion process creates entries in the Generic GTT database from the existing CLASS
GTT entries. These changes must be transferred to the AP with the Tools|AP Transfer|Service
Data to AP command before they become effective in the AP. You must also verify that the
Generic GTT option is enabled from the AP Options screen (Tools|AP Options). The existing
CLASS GTT entries will remain on the AP and in the APAC database. This will allow you to ver-
ify that the Generic GTT function is operating as expected for these new GTT entries. When you
are satisfied that the Generic GTT entries for CLASS are being translated correctly, you can delete
the old CLASS GTT entries using the CLASS GTT list screen (View|CLASS GTTs).

Version: 01
NOTE: After you have completed the conversion process, please refer to Section 9.2 -
"Calling Name GTT" for information about the Insert|Global Title Translation|Add Calling
Name GTT Tables command if this function has not yet been performed. When Generic
GTT is used, a translation type for calling name and map entries needs to be created for all
calling name NPA-NXXs in the Generic GTT form. This command adds the necessary
information to the Generic GTT Tables.
8.2 Generic GTT
Select Insert|Global Title Translation|Generic GTT to edit the Generic Global Title Translation
entries for the selected AP. The AP’s Generic Global Title Translation function allows it to per-
form Global Title Translation on any received SS7 message requiring the translation. This
Generic GTT function supersedes the CLASS Global Title Translation function, which only per-
formed translation for CLASS SS7 messages.
The entries in APAC’s Global Title Translation entry form define how the AP translates the Glo-
bal Title information received in SS7 messages into SS7 Signaling Point Code addresses. Once
the translation is performed, the messages are forwarded to that SS7 Signaling Point.
If you are converting an existing AP system with existing CLASS GTT entries, see the Insert|Glo-
bal Title Translation|Convert CLASS to Generic command to automatically convert the CLASS
GTT to Generic GTT entries.
8.2.1 Define a Generic GTT
Complete the following steps to define a Generic GTT:
1. Select Insert|Global Title Translations|Generic GTT. Initially, the Generic Global Title
Translation window shown in Figure 8-3 will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 8-3 Generic Global Title Translation Window
2. Enter the following in the Generic Global Title Translation window:
Map Number The Map Number is a number, from 0-19, that associates translations of the same
nature under one map number. There may be multiple entries in this table that
use the same map number. All Global Title Values that translate to a destination
of the same type (e.g., Service Switching Point (SSP), Service Control Point
(SCP), etc.) may use the same map number. This map number is used in one or
more Translation Type To Subsystem Number Translations table entries, so that
those types of messages are translated to the same addresses.
Global Title Three through 10-digit Global Title Value number. This is the Global Title infor-
Value mation in the SS7 message to convert to the SS7 address specified in the Destina-
tion Point Code. This value is typically an NPA, NPA-NXX, or 10-digit phone
number. Up to 3 different length Global Title Value entries may be made for
each map number. For example, GT map number 2 entries may contain the GT
Values: 605, 605-995, 605-996, 605-9956120. These entries would constitute the
allowed 3 different lengths of GT Values, 3-digit GT Values, 6-digit GT Values,
and 10-digit GT Values. A subsequent attempt to enter a GT Value that was not
3, 6, or 10 digits will result in an error message.
Destination Primary 9 digit SS7 physical network address. This is the SS7 address to use
Point Code when the associated Global Title Value is found in the SS7 message’s Global Title
information.

Version: 01
Function Selec- This field indicates what actions will be performed by this translation and in what
tor state the SS7 message will be after translation. The default action is Final Trans-
lation. Other options are available through a pull-down menu:
Final Translation – no further Global Title Translation will need to be performed
on the SS7 message after this translation.
Final Translation & Alter SSN – no further Global Title Translation will need to
be performed on the SS7 message after this translation. Set the called SSN in the
message to the value specified in the Subsystem Number field from the Transla-
tion Type to Subsystem Number Translation table.
Intermediate Translation – the translation performed here does not result in the
final destination address of the message. Perform the translation specified in
these tables and mark the SS7 message as requiring additional global title transla-
tions at the point code specified in the Destination Point Code field.
Translation The Translation Type value received in the SS7 message that requires Global
Type Title Translation. The valid range is 1-254.
Subsystem The value to place in the called party subsystem number field if Alter SSN is one
Number of the actions specified in the Function Selector field. The valid range is 0-254.
Subsystem number 0 should not be used if the Function Selector is set to "Final
Translation & Alter SSN". Also, subsystem number 1 is reserved and cannot be
used in this field.
Map Number The Map Number is a number, from 0-19. The value in this field corresponds to
map numbers in the Global Title Value to Point Code Translations table. This
map number indicates how the Global Title Value should be translated for SS7
messages containing this Translation Type value.
Expansion Expansion 9 digit SS7 physical network address. The SS7 message is forwarded
Point Code to this SS7 address if no Global Title Value in the corresponding map entries in
the Global Title to Point Code Translations table matches the Global Title infor-
mation in the received SS7 message.
3. To delete entries, select the row by clicking on the gray box at the extreme left end of the
row and then either press <DELETE> or use the Edit|Delete menu command. You may
also select multiple rows to delete more than one row at once.
4. Save the changes to commit the Generic GTT entries to the APAC database. You may also
close the window without saving any modifications. Any changes must be transferred to
the AP using the data transfer to AP function before they become affective in the AP.
5. A report of the Global Title Translations may be displayed using the View|Reports|Global
Title Translations or the View|Global Title Translations|Generic GTTs command.

Version: 01
8.3 Generic GTT Report
Select View|Reports|Global Title Translations or View|Global Title Translations|Generic GTT to

display a report of Global Title Translations for the selected AP. The Global Title Translation
Report window will display. From this window you specify in what order you would like the
report sorted. You have the options of sorting the report by Map Number, or Global Title/Trans-
lation Type.
After you have selected an option, select the Show Report button to generate the report. The Exit
button can be selected at any time, if you do not wish to display a global title translation report.
Once the Show Report button is selected, the Global Title Translation Report will be displayed.
Figure 8-4 Global Title Translation Report
See Section 8.2 for more details about the information displayed for each global title translation.
8.4 Add Calling Name GTT to Generic GTT Tables
If Generic GTT is being used, a translation type for calling name and map entries needs to be cre-
ated for all calling name NPA-NXXs in the Generic GTT form. To do this, select Insert|Global
Title Translation|Add Calling Name GTT to Generic GTT Tables. This command adds the neces-
sary information to the Generic GTT Tables. For more information, please see Chapter 9 - "Call-
ing Name Delivery and Dip Counts".

Version: 01
8.5 Set AP Options for GTT
The following options can be set for the Global Title Translation (GTT) function from the
Tools|AP Options window:
Figure 8-5 AP Options – GTT
Enable Generic GTT Function This option indicates in which Global Title Translation mode the AP
should operate. If the option is checked, then the AP will perform
GTT on all received SS7 messages that require GTT according to the
Generic GTT tables. If the option is not checked, then the AP will
perform GTT only on received CLASS SS7 messages according to
the Class GTT tables.
CLASS Point Code The point code to which CLASS queries will be sent.
CLASS Translation Type The translation type to use for CLASS queries.
AIN Point Code The point code used when the AP originates an AIN query.
AIN Translation Type The translation type used when the AP originates an AIN query.
See the AP Installation and Maintenance Manual for more information on the AP’s Global Title
Translation function.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 9 - Calling Name Delivery and Dip Counts
Chapter 9 - Calling Name Delivery and Dip Counts
The Calling Name database is created in APAC for the selected AP by adding a subscriber and
saving the data. The database must be subsequently transferred to the AP to take effect. The
Calling Name database may be viewed and reports generated for the selected AP.
Before a subscriber can be added to the APAC database, an NPA-NXX and thousands group must
first be defined for subscribers within that group.
IMPORTANT: Be sure the correct AP is selected if multiple APs have been defined.
Entries made will be saved to a database relative to the AP selected.
9.1 Calling Name NPA-NXXs
To add a new NPA-NXX and/or thousands group(s) for which the selected AP will provide Call-
ing Name Delivery translations, do the following.
1. Select Insert|NPA-NXX|Calling Name NPA-NXX.... When this command is selected, the

NPA-NXX Entry window will be displayed.
Figure 9-1 NPA-NXX Entry Window
2. Enter the NPA-NXX. If all of the thousands groups within the NPA-NXX are to be
added, then the box marked All should be checked. If only selected thousands groups
within the NPA-NXX are to be added, click on the All box so it is not checked, then click
on the individual thousands group check-boxes until only the desired thousands groups are
checked. Selecting All is preferred unless thousands group within a NPA-NXX are split
between switches.
3. Save the changes to commit the NPA-NXX/thousands group to the APAC database.
4. Any saved NPA-NXX/thousands groups must be subsequently transferred to the AP using
the Transfer to AP command before they take affect.

Version: 01
5. When making changes to the NPA-NXX list, it will usually be necessary to update the
Global Title Translation Tables using the methods described in 9.2.1 or 9.2.2.
The list of current NPA-NXX/thousands groups for the selected AP may be viewed by selecting
the View|Calling Name NPA-NXX... command.
9.2 Calling Name GTT
If Generic GTT is being used, you need to create a translation type for calling name and map
entries for all calling name NPA-NXXs in the Generic GTT form. You can either enter the
changes directly into the Global Title Translation form, as outlined in Section 9.2.1, or use the
Adding Calling Name GTT to the Generic GTT Tables command, as outlined in Section 9.2.2.
9.2.1 Global Title Translation
Select the Insert|Global Title Translation|Generic GTT... menu option to open the Global Title
Translation window (see Figure 8-3). Complete descriptions of each field in the Global Title
Translation window may be found in Section 8.2.1.
1. Enter the following into the Translation Type Table.

a. Enter a number from 1-254 in the Translation Type field. The standard value is 5.
b. Enter a number from 0-254 in the Subsystem Number field.
c. Pick an unused map number, and enter it in the field provided. A valid range for this
field is from 0-19. If it is available, the same value as that of the translation type may
be a good choice. The default for this field is 1.
d. In the Expansion Point Code field, enter the point code to which messages that have
failed the calling name translation should be routed (this field is optional). If the City/
State feature is being implemented then the translation should be routed back to the
AP, itself.
2. Define the map entry. Do the following in the Global Title Table.
a. Enter the map number chosen in step c above in the Map Number field.
b. Enter the 3 to 10 digit global title value in the Global Title Value field. This field is
typically an NPA, NPA-NXX, or 10-digit phone number. The value entered here for
calling name is normally an NPA-NXX.
c. Enter the point code of the AP System in the Destination Point Code field.
d. In the Function Selector field, select Final Translation & Alter SSN as the type of
translation to perform.
e. Repeat steps a-d until all of the desired groups have been defined.

Version: 01
3. After all of the information has been entered, a save function must be performed. Click the
Save button, select File|Save, or close the active window and select Yes when prompted to
save. If prompted that the database does not exist, click Yes to have APAC create a new
one.
4. Next, the information must be transferred to the AP for the changes to take affect. To do
this, select the AP Transfer in the Tools menu and choose Service Data to AP. See Chap-
ter 6 - "AP Transfer" for more information about transferring data to the AP.
9.2.2 Adding Calling Name GTT to the Generic GTT Tables
The Add Calling Name GTT function generates an initial GTT table for calling name. This can
be done when converting from the CLASS GTT method to the Generic GTT method, or when ini-
tially creating the name database. It can also be used to update the Global Title Tables when
changes are made to the Calling Name NPA-NXX list. See Section 9.1 for provisioning the NPA-
NXX list.
Use this function to add the necessary Calling Name information to the Generic GTT Table.
Before you select this command, you must enter calling name NPA-NXX information (see Sec-
tion 9.1 - "Calling Name NPA-NXXs"), and complete the SS7 Network information (see Chapter
7 - "SS7 Network") for the selected AP.
To access this command, select Insert|Global Title Translation|Add Calling Name GTT. The fol-
lowing window will appear.
Figure 9-2 Add Calling Name GTT to Generic GTT Tables Window
Enter the following information in this window, and select OK. To exit this window, select Can-
cel.
Map Number Enter an unused map number, or the map number that was previously used for
calling name. A valid range is 0-19. This field will default to 1.
Calling Name Transla- This field will display the CNAME TT field, defined in Tools|SS7 Network.
tion Type This field is not available for modification, and will appear grayed out.

Version: 01
Calling Name Subsystem This field will display the CNAME SSN field, defined in Tools|SS7 Network.
Number This field is not available for modification, and will appear grayed out.
See Section 8.2 - "Generic GTT" and Chapter 7 - "SS7 Network" for more details about the above
fields.
After you select OK, a progress bar will display. When the conversion is complete, a message
will appear in the status bar that states "Calling Name GTT Conversion Complete".
To view the Generic GTT Tables, select View|Global Title Translations|Generic GTTs or
View|Reports|Global Title Translations.
NOTE: After you have completed this command, please refer to Section 8.1.3 for informa-
tion about the Insert|Global Title Translation|Convert CLASS to Generic GTT command if
this function has not yet been performed. This command converts existing CLASS entries
to Generic GTT database entries.
9.3 Add a Calling Name Entry
1. To add a calling name, click the Add Calling Name button on the tool bar or select
Insert|Calling Name|Single Name command using the menus. The Calling Name Entry
window will open.
Figure 9-3 Calling Name Entry Window
2. Enter the following information:
Phone Number Enter the originating phone number. Remember, the NPA-NXX/Thousands
Group of the specified phone number must be added to the APAC database before
the phone number can be added to the Calling Name database. If an existing
phone number is entered, the current information will be displayed.
BGID Enter 0 (zero) if this calling name is not associated with a business group. If non-
zero, this field identifies the business group to be associated with this particular
phone number. The name on this entry is delivered for intra-business group calls.

Version: 01
Flag Specifies what action will be taken for calling name delivery. There are four dif-
ferent status values that are used: Allowed, Toggle, Restricted, and No Indication.
See Appendix B - "Calling Name Flags" for further information.
Status Indicates the status of the entry: Pending - the change will be transferred the next
time calling name information is transferred to the AP. Hold - the change should
not be transferred to the AP until the status is changed to a non-hold value. Hold
entries are not ready to become active either because the information they contain
may not be correct or complete, or because they must wait until a certain time or
event before they can be activated.
Name This field specifies the name (up to 15 characters) that will be delivered for this
phone number / BGID.
A save function must be done to commit the Calling Name entry to the APAC database. If
another name is to be entered, click the save button to save the information and also leave the
Name Entry window open for further additions.
Any saved Calling Names must subsequently be transferred to the AP using the Transfer to AP
command before they actually take affect.
9.4 File Input
9.4.1 Calling Name Entries
A batch Calling Name update for the APAC Calling Name database may be performed using the
File Input function. This allows an ASCII text file of Calling Name entries to be read by the
APAC software to update the Calling Name database. To invoke the command, select
Insert|Calling Name|File Input.
When this menu item is selected, a file selection window will be displayed. From this window
select the Calling Name Input File. By default, the file selection window displays files only with
a TXT extension. However, if the Calling Name Input File has a different extension, the filter can
be changed to display all files. After a Calling Name Input File is selected, a confirmation win-
dow is displayed showing the file name and the AP name to which the names will be loaded. If
all the information is correct, select Yes to continue with the file-input process. If you wish to
cancel and terminate the file input, select No in the confirmation window.
When APAC reads the file, each record is evaluated for proper format and verifies that the NPA-
NXX is allowed. If the record is valid, it is entered into the APAC database. If the record is not
allowed, the reason is logged to a logfile which will be displayed at completion of the input, or
can be viewed using the View|Calling Name|File Input Log... command.

Version: 01
When the import is complete, the File Input Log will automatically display any records that were
rejected and a summary of all records processed. The names that are accepted in APAC must sub-
sequently be transferred to the AP database, using the Transfer To AP command, for system
deployment.
9.4.2 City/State Entries
The Insert|Calling Name|City/State|File Input command is the APAC interface to load a large
number of Calling Name - City/State entries into the APAC database. This command reads a user
specified file that contains one or more NPA-NXXs and location (e.g. City and State) information
associated with each NPA-NXX. The format of this input file must match the Terminating Point
Master (TPM) files produced by Telcordia’s Traffic Routing Administration.
When this command is selected, a file selection window will be displayed:
Figure 9-4 City/State File Input Window
Select the file that contains the City/State information that you wish to read into the APAC City/
State database. Typically, this would be one of the TPM files received from Telcordia’s Traffic
Routing Administration. The full TPM file or the activity TPM file can be used as the source for
the City/State file input.
After the desired file is selected, APAC will display an information bar near the top of the APAC
window, as shown below. The information bar will show the name of the AP system for which
the City/State information is being loaded, the progress of the file input, and a Cancel button so
the file input can be manually terminated.
Figure 9-5 APAC Progress Indicator

Version: 01
As the input file is read, APAC determines if the current entry already exists in the APAC data-
base. If the entry does not exist, it is added with the information from the input file. If the entry
already exists, the entry is updated only if the activity indicator (or change-code) for the current
entry in the input file is non-blank.
The file-input process updates only APAC’s internal database with the City/State information.
This information must be subsequently transferred to the AP system to be put into affect. The
City/State information is transferred to the AP using the Transfer Service Data to AP function on
the screen shown below. When the Call Name service option is selected, any “normal” calling
name entries and any City/State entries will be transferred. The count shown reflects the number
of “normal” names plus the City/State entries to be transferred.
Figure 9-6 Transfer Service Data Screen
9.5 File Input Format
9.5.1 Calling Name File Input Format
The input file is an ASCII text file consisting of a sequence of lines. Each line contains a separate
calling name record, and has the following format:
• 6-digit NPA-NXX, 7-digit NPA-NXX-thousands-group, or 10-digit phone number (digits
only, no spaces or punctuation).
• 8-digit business group ID (if no business group is used, 00000000 is placed in this field).
• A flag character:
A (allowed)
R (restricted)
T (toggle)
N (no indication)

Version: 01
D (deleted)
The letters can be in upper or lower case. The flag D is not a standard flag value, it indicates
the calling name should be deleted.
• A 1 to 15 character name.
• One space is allowed between the above fields.
• Each line is terminated with a <CR/LF> (carriage return / line feed).
A sample line may be as follows:6055551212 00000000 A John Q. Doe
9.5.2 City/State File Input Format
The format of this input file must match the Terminating Point Master (TPM) files produced by
Telcordia’s Traffic Routing Administration.
9.6 Calling Name List
Use the View|Calling Name|List command or click on the View Calling Names button to display a
list of the current Calling Names for the selected AP. This list also allows entries to be modified
or deleted.
Before the list can be displayed, the range of phone numbers to display must be specified. The
following window appears after issuing the Calling Name List command:
Figure 9-7 Calling Name List Range
At a minimum, a NPA must be specified. However, further restriction of the Calling Names dis-
played is allowed. Any value may be entered; from a NPA only, to a complete phone number.
For example, if 605-996 is entered, all the Calling Names within the 605-996 office code will be
displayed. If 605-996-96 is entered, then the Calling Names from 605-996-9600 through 605-
996-9699 will be displayed.

Version: 01
The number of Calling Names within the specified range must not exceed 10,000. If the number
of Calling Names exceeds 10,000, then an error message will be produced and none of the Calling
Name entries will be displayed.
Once the range has been specified, a window similar to the following will appear:
Figure 9-8 Calling Name List Window
The Calling Name list contains the following data for each Calling Name entry:
Phone Number The originating phone number.
Business If non-zero, this identifies the business group associated with this phone number.
Group The name on this entry is delivered for intra-business group calls.
Name Name to be delivered for this phone number / BGID.
Flag Specifies what action will be taken during calling name delivery. There are four
different status values that are used: Allowed, Toggle, Restricted, and No Indica-
tion. See Appendix B - "Calling Name Flags" for further information.
Status Indicates the status of the entry:

Active - the entry has been transferred to the AP and is currently being used, and
no changes are currently pending transfer to the AP for this calling name.
Pending - a change has been made to this entry that has not yet been transferred to
the AP. The change will be transferred the next time calling name information is
transferred to the AP.
Hold - a change has been made to this entry, but the change should not be trans-
ferred to the AP until the status is changed to a non-hold value. Hold entries are
not ready to become active, either because the information they contain may not
be correct or complete, or because they must wait until a certain time or event
before they can be activated.

Version: 01
Because the APAC Calling Name database stores history information about changes made to
Calling Names, the database may contain several records for each Calling Name. This list, how-
ever, displays only the most current entry for each Calling Name in the APAC database. For
example, if a Calling Name currently had an active record and a pending record, only the pending
record will be displayed in this list, because that record is the most current. Use the Calling Name
Report function (see Section 9.7) to display all records associated with the Calling Names.
To modify or delete a Calling Name, perform one of the following actions:

• Select the desired Calling Name entry and then select the Modify or Delete menu command
in the APAC Edit menu.
• Right-click on the desired Calling Name entry to invoke a popup menu, and then select the
Modify or Delete command.
Note: The Modify menu command is not available for 6 or 7-digit entries.
The Modify command will display the Calling Name Entry window (see Figure 9-3), where
changes may be made to the entry. Any saved changes must be transferred to the AP before they
take affect.
APAC records history information about changes to Calling Name entries. Therefore, after a
transfer to the AP, the entry that had been active, if any, now becomes the most recent history
entry and the latest changed entry becomes active. If a Calling Name is deleted, no entry becomes
active, and the entry that was active is now the most recent history entry.
After some time, the Calling Name database may become very large and it may be desirable to
delete all unnecessary history information. See Section 17.3 - "Cleaning Up the Calling Name
Database" for more information on deleting unneeded history records.
9.7 Calling Name Report
The Calling Name Report function may be used to generate a report of an entire set of Calling
Name entries, a certain range of entries, or a single subscriber for the selected AP. The report
may be tailored to your specific requirements. This function provides only a report and does not
allow Calling Names to be modified or deleted. Use the View|Calling Name|List command for
editing the Calling Name database.
The Calling Name Report function is invoked by selecting View|Reports|Calling Name or by
clicking on the Calling Name Report button, . This command opens the Calling Name Report
Options window where report criteria is specified.

Version: 01
Figure 9-9 Calling Name Report Options Window
From this window you specify which calling name entries to display in the report, the type of call-
ing name entries to display, and how they should be sorted. The Report Criteria section speci-
fies the type of entries to display and is initially set to display all records in the APAC Calling
Name database. Select one or more parameters in each sub-section to customize the report to
your specific needs. A checked item will appear in the report. An unchecked item will not appear
in the report.
The Record Status criteria can be broken down as follows:

• Active - Include the calling name entries that are the currently active entries in the AP.
• Pending - Include the entries that have been modified since the last calling name transfer to
the AP. These entries will be transferred to the AP during the next transfer operation.
• Hold - Include the entries that are in a hold condition. These entries will not be transferred
to the AP until they are released from the hold status.
• History - Include the history entries. History entries are entries that at one time were active
for the calling name, but have subsequently been superseded by more recent updates. When
this parameter is selected, you may specify how many history entries to display for each
calling name. Up to 10 of the most recent history entries may be displayed for each calling
name. (See the on-line help, Clean-up Calling Name Database, for information on deleting
history records.)
• Deleted - Include the entries that are pending deletion. On the next calling name transfer to
the AP, the entries marked as deleted will be removed from the AP’s calling name database
as well as the APAC database.
The Flags criteria indicate which entries to display based on the entry’s flag indication value.
Check at least one of the status items in this sub-section. See Appendix B for further flag infor-
mation.

Version: 01
The Phone Number criteria indicates which calling name entries to display based on the tele-
phone number. If Single is selected, enter the telephone number that you want in the report. If
Range is selected, enter the telephone numbers that begin and end the range of numbers you wish
to be included in the report.
The Business Group criteria indicate which entries to display based on the business group associ-
ated with the calling name. If None is chosen, the report will not include any entries with a busi-
ness group ID (i.e. a non-zero business group field). If One is chosen, the report will include all
entries with the specified business group ID. If All is chosen, all entries will be displayed regard-
less of business group ID.
The Sort By section indicates how the entries displayed in the report should be ordered. The
entries may either be ordered by Phone Number / Business Group ID or by the Name associated
with the calling name entry. Once the desired criteria and sort items are set, select the Show
Report button to generate the report. The Exit button can be selected at any time to abort the
report process. The following is an example Calling Name Report.
Figure 9-10 Calling Name Report Window
The top of the Calling Name Report window includes the following functions and information:
• Clicking on the arrow buttons on the left side of the bar changes the page number that is
viewed in the window. In the example above, page 1 of 17 is being viewed.
• Clicking the Cancel button will terminate the report as it is compiled.
• The button changes the screen size of the report to either large, medium, or small. This
is useful if you want to view the entire width of the report without having to scroll the
screen. Viewing the report with the window maximized is recommended.

Version: 01
• The button will print the report to the local printer.
• The button will export the report to a disk file or to a Microsoft Mail (MAPI) recipient.
Clicking on this button will open the Export window where you choose the format of the file
and the destination (file or mail). The following formats are supported:
1. Character-separated values
2. Comma-separated values (CSV)
3. Paginated Text
4. Tab-separated text
5. Tab-separated values
6. Text
7. Microsoft Word document
• The Close button will close the report window.
• The number field "1000 of 1000" in the above example indicates that of 1000 existing Call-
ing Name entries in the range specified in the Options window, all 1000 entries are included
in the report. If "Pending" was the only criteria selected under record status, and only 20 of
the entries in the range specified were marked as pending, then this field would read "20 of
1000" and the report would include only these 20 pending records.
• The field "Total" indicates the number of entries that exist in the specified range.
• The percent indicator will scroll upward to 100% as the report is compiled.
9.8 City/State Report
A report of the city/state entries in the APAC database is generated by selecting the
View|Reports|City/State Reports... function. Initially, the following Report Criteria window
appears.
Figure 9-11 City/State Report Criteria Window
From this window one can specify which city/state entries will be displayed in the report, and in
what order the entries will be displayed.

Version: 01
The Filter section of the window is where the city/state entries to be displayed in the report are
specified. The Filter section is initially set to display all records in the APAC city/state database,
but a portion of the database can be chosen by selecting one of the lower-two radio buttons. If the
Show Selected States button is chosen, the State Selection window (shown below) will appear.
The State Selection window allows selection of the states for which the report will cover.
Figure 9-12 State Selection Window
If the Show Selected NPA-NXXs button is selected, the text boxes next to the button will become
active so that a range of NPA-NXXs can be covered in the report.
The Sort Criteria section of the window indicates how the entries displayed in the report will be
ordered. The entries may be ordered by NPA-NXX, City/State, or by the Last Modified Date.
You can also choose the sort order by selecting the Ascending or Descending radio buttons.
Once the desired criteria and sort items are set, select the Show Report button to generate the
report. The Exit button can be selected at any time if a City/State Report is not needed.
Once the Show Report button is selected, the City/State Report will be displayed. An example
report is shown below.

Version: 01
Figure 9-13 City/State Report
The report shows the following information for each city/state entry:
• NPA-NXX - This field shows the NPA-NXX for the city/state entry.
• City - This field shows the city (up to 10 characters) that is associated with the NPA-NXX.
• State - This field shows the state (2 letter abbreviation) that is associated with the NPA-
NXX.
• Last Modified - This field shows the date for which the specified entry was last modified.
• Modified By - This field shows the login ID of the user who last modified the entry.
9.9 Calling Name Audit
A Calling Name Audit is initiated by selecting the Tools|Database Maintenance|Calling Name

Audit... function. This function provides a mechanism to compare the contents of APAC's calling
name database to the calling name information actually present on the AP system. Normally, the
calling name information between APAC and the AP system will be identical. However, there
may be failure conditions or other abnormal situations that result in calling name information mis-
matches between APAC and the AP system.
The calling name audit function will compare all the calling names on the AP system to the call-
ing name information stored in the APAC database. Any discrepancies will be reported. If calling
name discrepancies are found, the user can decide whether the calling name information on the
AP system or the APAC database is correct. If the AP's calling name information is determined

Version: 01
to be correct, the user can select an option that will update the APAC database to match the AP
system. If APAC's calling name information is determined to be correct, the user can select an
option that will result in the AP system being updated to match the APAC database.
When the calling name audit function is initiated, APAC first establishes a communication ses-
sion with the AP and reads all the calling names from the AP system. Depending on the number
of calling names, this can be a lengthy process. Approximately 1000 calling names per minute
can be transferred from the AP system to APAC. A progress window is displayed to inform the
user of the status of the transfer. This progress window also contains a Cancel button that allows
the user to terminate, at any time, the audit process.
When all the calling names are collected from the AP system, the APAC calling name database is
compared to this collection. Once that comparison is complete, the Calling Name Audit window,
similar to the window shown below, will be displayed. The description for each component in the
Calling Name Audit window is provided below.
Figure 9-14 Calling Name Audit Window
9.9.1 Calling Name Audit Window Description
Calling Name Differences Section

This section lists all the calling name discrepancies found between the AP system and the APAC
database. If no mismatches are found, this list will be empty. If the list is not empty, each row
will contain a single calling name entry, identified by the Phone Number and BGID (business
group ID) fields, where some part of the calling name information did not match between APAC
and the AP system. The remaining fields, other than the Phone Number and BGID fields, indicate
the calling name information found on the AP system and in the APAC database:
• AP Name - This is the calling name text associated with this Phone Number/BGID on the
AP system. If this field is blank, then this Phone Number/BGID calling name entry was not
found on the AP system.

Version: 01
• APAC Name - This is the calling name text associated with this Phone Number/BGID in
the APAC database. If this field is blank, then this Phone Number/BGID calling name entry
was not found in the APAC database.
• AP Flag - This is the Presentation Restrictions Flag value associated with this Phone Num-
ber/BGID on the AP system.
• APAC Flag - This is the Presentation Restrictions Flag value associated with this Phone
Number/BGID in the APAC database.
Summary Section
This section lists the calling name audit results. The following information is reported:
• The total number of calling name entries on the AP system.
• The total number of calling name entries in the APAC database.
• The total number of calling name entries found to be different between the AP system and
the APAC database. This number will match the number of rows in the Calling Name Dif-
ferences section.
• The number of calling name entries found in the APAC database that are not present on the
AP system.
• The number of calling name entries found on the AP system that are not present in the
APAC database.
• The number of calling name entries found on both the AP system and in the APAC data-
base, but where the calling name text or the presentation-restriction flag is different between
APAC and the AP.
Resolve Differences
This section provides two mechanisms for resolving any calling name discrepancies between
APAC and the AP system:
• Update APAC - Use this button if you have determined that the calling name information
on the AP systems is correct and that you want the APAC database to match the calling
name contents of the AP. This button will initiate the process that updates the APAC data-
base to match the current AP calling name information.
• Update AP - Use this button if you have determined that the calling name information in the
APAC database is correct and that you want the AP to match the calling name contents of
the APAC database. The process initiated by this button does not actually update the AP's
calling name information. Instead, it manipulates the APAC database such that after the
next Service Data Transfer To AP function is performed, the AP's calling name information
will match the APAC database. When the APAC database manipulation is complete, a win-
dow will be displayed asking the user if they wish to invoke APAC's Service Data Transfer
To AP function immediately.
Print
This button will print the Calling Name Differences and Summary information.

Version: 01
Help
This button will display the Calling Name Audit online help.
Exit
Close the Calling Name Audit window and terminate the Calling Name Audit function.
9.10 Calling Name Dip OPCs
NOTE: The information provided in this section is only applicable if the AP displayed in
the AP selection box located on the toolbar is running an AP software release older than
version 4.1.1. See Section 9.14.2 for information on managing Dip OPCs for AP systems
with software release 4.1.1 or greater.
The Dip Counts for Name feature provides a count of successful and unsuccessful calling name
queries. The report (see Section 9.12 for more information) is provided for each provisioned
OPC. This feature can also be used to allow calling name responses only to the OPCs that are
provisioned for the feature.
1. Select the Insert|Calling Name|Dip OPC command to identify and modify the list of Orig-
ination Point Codes (OPCs) whose access to the AP’s Calling Name database is tracked.
The Calling Name Dip Count feature counts the number of times different originators
(OPCs) access the AP's calling name database.
2. Initially, the Calling Name Dip OPCs window will be displayed.
Figure 9-15 Calling Name Dip OPCs Window
3. Populate the following fields in this form:

Version: 01
Point Code The 9-digit SS7 physical network address. SS7 point codes are partitioned into three
3-digit sections: network, cluster, and member. It is not necessary to enter complete
SS7 point codes for the OPC. You may enter partial point codes by specifying the
network portion, or network and cluster portions of a point code. This is useful if you
want to include all the point codes used by a specified telephone company.
Description Any descriptive text associated with the OPC. Typically, this is the Telco (telephone
company) name of the OPC. For example, network number 248 refers to US West.
This field is optional.
Allow Look- Types of calling name lookups allowed. Lookups through TARGUSinfo™ links are
ups Through allowed if the Targus checkbox is checked. Likewise, City/State lookups are allowed
if the City State checkbox is checked. If both checkboxes are checked, lookups will
be attempted using TARGUSinfo™ links, with the City/State lookup occurring only
if the TARGUSinfo™ lookup fails. Unchecking a checkbox prevents lookups from
being performed using the subsystem associated with that checkbox.
Number Not The action to take when a calling number is not found in the AP’s local calling name
Found database. The choices for this action are listed below:
Action • Return Error - Return an error for the query.
• Allow City/State - Return the called number’s City/State.
• Allow City/State, Log Error - Return City/State and log an AP error.
• System Default Action - Use the system default action (see Section 9.15 -
"Set AP Options for Calling Name" for more information).
4. After you have entered a point code and description, press the Add button or <ENTER> to
add the OPC to the OPC List. The entry will be shown in the OPC List window. OPCs
cannot be modified after they are added. If an OPC needs to be changed, it should be
deleted and re-added.
5. To delete an OPC, highlight the entry and press the Delete button or press <DELETE>.
6. If you have multiple APs that need similar OPC lists, select the Copy From button to copy
the calling name dip OPCs from another AP. Next, the Select AP window will display.
Select the AP from which to copy the Calling Name Dip OPCs. Select OK to accept the
selection, or select Cancel to terminate this operation. A Copy Confirmation window will
be displayed showing the APs to copy from and to.
7. Select Yes to confirm the selection, or select No to terminate this operation. If you
selected Yes, the copied OPCs will be added to the current AP's Calling Name Dip OPC
List.
8. The padlock icon in the lower left corner toggles the state of the Calling Name Database
Access between restricted and not restricted. When the Calling Name Database Access is
restricted, the padlock icon is shown in a locked position. This indicates only those OPCs
shown in the OPC List will be allowed access to the AP’s calling name database. When

Version: 01
the Calling Name Database Access is not restricted, the padlock icon is shown in an
unlocked position and access to the AP’s database is open to requests from any OPC.
However, calling name accesses by the listed OPCs will still be counted.
9. After you have finished entering or modifying OPCs, and selected the Calling Name Data-
base Access, you are ready to update the AP with your changes. Select the Transfer
Changes button or the Transfer All Data button to save your changes to the AP.
10. Use the AP Auto-Logging button to schedule AP Calling Name Dip Count Auto-Logging.
The auto-logging function allows the recording of the current counts to automatically
occur at regular, scheduled intervals. At the scheduled times, the AP will autonomously
record the current counts in the AP’s Calling Name Dip Count Log file. Note that you can
then also set APAC to automatically read the AP’s Dip Count Log file at regular, sched-
uled times. For more information about this option, see Section 16.1 - "Scheduling APAC
Functions".
11. After you are done transferring your changes to the AP, close the Calling Name Dip OPCs
window. To display a report of Calling Name dip counts, use the View|Reports|Calling
Name Dip Counts command (see Section 9.12 for more information).
9.11 Update the Concerned Point Code List
Use the Insert|Calling Name|Concerned Point Code command to identify signaling point codes
(the address of SS7 network elements) which the AP should notify if the Calling Name function
on the AP is taken out of service or returned to service. Notification is performed by sending a
Subsystem Prohibited or Subsystem Allowed message as appropriate to each signaling point code
on the Concerned Point Code list.
To update the concerned point code for the Calling Name Service, complete the following steps:
1. Select the menu item Insert|Calling Name|Concerned Point Code.
2. Initially, the Calling Name Concerned Point Codes window will be displayed.
Figure 9-16 Calling Name Concerned Point Codes Window

Version: 01
3. To add a new point code to the Concerned Point Code list, enter the following information
in this window:
Point Code The 9-digit physical network address. SS7 point codes are partitioned into three 3-digit
sections: network, cluster, and member. A complete, valid point code must be speci-
fied.
Description Any descriptive text associated with the Concerned Point Code. Typically, this is the
site name of the point code. This field is optional.
4. After you have entered a point code and a description, press the Add button or <ENTER>
to add the point code to the Concerned Point Code List. The entry will then be shown in
the Point Code List window.
5. To delete a Concerned Point Code, highlight the entry in the Point Code List window and
press the Delete button or <DELETE>.
6. If you have multiple APs that need similar concerned point code lists, select the Copy
From button to copy the Calling Name Concerned Point Codes from another AP. Next,
the Select AP window will display. Select the AP from which to copy the Calling Name
Concerned Point Codes. Select OK to accept the selection, or select Cancel to terminate
this operation. A Copy Confirmation window will be displayed showing the APs to copy
from and to. Select Yes to confirm the selection, or select No to terminate this operation.
If you select Yes, the source AP’s Concerned Point Codes will be added to the current
AP's Calling Name Concerned Point Code list.
7. After you have finished entering or modifying the Concerned Point Code list, you are
ready to update the AP with your changes. Select the Transfer Changes button or the
Transfer All Data button to save your changes to the AP.
8. After you are done transferring your changes to the AP, close the Calling Name Con-
cerned Point Code window.
9.12 Calling Name Dip Count Report
The Calling Name Dip Count Report function may be used to generate a report of Calling Name
dip counts. The report may be tailored to your specific requirements. Dip counts keep track of
how many times an originator or OPC accesses the AP's calling name database.
The Calling Name Report function is invoked by selecting View|Reports|Calling Name Dip
Counts. This command opens the Calling Name Dip Count Report window where report criteria
is specified.

Version: 01
Figure 9-17 Calling Name Dip Count Selection Window
From this window you specify what count information to display in the report and the time period
to display in the report.
• The "Collect current data from AP" option specifies whether or not APAC should collect the
latest dip counts from the AP before displaying the report. If APAC is collecting the dip
count information on a scheduled basis, it may not be necessary or desirable to collect the
counts when the report is generated.
• If this option is checked and the Collection Type option is set to Current Data / Reset
Counts, then, when the Show Report button is selected, APAC will query the AP for the lat-
est dip counts for each calling name dip count entry. The count values on the AP will be
reset to zero after they have been collected by APAC. When APAC has finished the count
collection, the report will be displayed.
• If the "Collect current data from AP" option is checked, and the Collection Type option is
set to “From Log”, then, when the Show Report button is selected, APAC will retrieve all
unread records from the AP’s Calling Name Dip Count Log file. When APAC has finished
the count collection, the report will be displayed.
• If the "Collect current data from AP" option is not checked, then, when the Show Report
button is selected, APAC will simply display the report with the data in APAC's database.
This data is from the latest AP dip count collection operation.
• The "Collect current data from AP" checkbox may be disabled if you do not have "Update
AP" access privileges under the "Calling Name Service Administration" access heading.
• The Report Dates section indicates which entries should be displayed in the report. The
entries may contain information between two specified dates or for a specific time interval.
To display information between two specific dates, use the drop-down boxes to select a
month and year, and click on a day in the calendar shown to select a day. The years dis-
played in the Year selection box range from 1900 – 2100. The Quick Date option allows
you to easily select a time interval from the following: All Dates, Previous Month, Previous
3 Months, Previous 6 Months, Previous Year, Year to Date, Month to Date, or Today. The

Version: 01
Begin Date and End Date calendars will change according to your choice. For example, if
the Quick Date option is set to Previous Year, the Begin Date calendar will be shown as Jan-
uary 1, YYYY, and the End Date will be shown as December 31, YYYY.
• The OPC Selection section indicates which entries should be displayed in the report. The
entries may be displayed, by All OPCs or Single OPC value. If you select the Single OPC
value option, you must specify which OPC to display.
• The "Separate Page for each OPC" option specifies whether or not you want each OPC on a
separate report page.
report. To exit the Calling Name Dip Count Report window, select the Cancel button.
Figure 9-18 Calling Name Dip Count Report
The report shows information for each calling name dip OPC:
OPC The OPC (Originating Point Code) to which the data is associated. A description of
the OPC is displayed in the field to the right of each OPC. The description is entered
in the Calling Name Dip OPCs window (see Figure 9-15).
Recorded Date This field shows the date that the dip count was recorded in the APAC database.

Version: 01
Total Dip Counts This field is divided into Successes and Failures. The Successes column shows the
total number of successful dips that went through the AP, and the Failures column
shows the total number of failed dips. This includes local AP lookups, TARGUS-
info™ lookups, and City/State lookups.
Targus Dip Counts This field is divided into Successes and Failures. The Successes column shows the
number of successful dips that went through the TARGUSinfo™ subsystem of the
AP, and the Failures column shows the number of failed dips in the TARGUSinfo™
subsystem of the AP.
Expansion Queries This field shows the number of times an external calling name database was queried
by the AP through the expansion point code. The expansion point code for an OPC
can be defined in the Access Control tab of the Calling Name Configuration window
(see Section 9.14.1).
Total The total number of successful and failed dips for a specific OPC.
Grand Total The total number of successful dips, failed dips, and expansion queries for all OPCs.
The buttons at the top of the report window perform the following functions:
• Scroll pages forward and backward in the report.
• Zoom the report display in and out to see different views of the page.
• Print the report.
• Export the report to a file.
• Close the report window.
To insert or modify the list of OPCs, use the Insert|Calling Name|Dip OPC command.
9.13 Calling Name Internet Expansion
The Calling Name Internet Expansion feature provides the ability to do calling name lookups
through TARGUSinfo™ links over the Internet. Use the Insert | Calling Name | Configure Inter-
net Expansion command to open the Calling Name Internet Expansion Config window (see Fig-
ure 9-19), from which all settings related to Calling Name Internet Expansion may be configured.

Version: 01
Figure 9-19 Calling Name Internet Expansion Config Window
In Figure 9-19, the Calling Name Internet Expansion configuration for Unit 0 of the AP system is
displayed. The configuration of either unit may be viewed by selecting the Unit 0 or Unit 1 tab at
the top of the window. The Calling Name Internet Expansion system will usually keep the con-
figurations of both units synchronized; however, in the event the configuration information
becomes unsynchronized between units, these tabs allow the service administrator to manually
adjust the unit configurations.
The controls in the Calling Name Internet Expansion Config window are divided into four func-
tional areas described below.
Settings - The Settings section contains the controls for setting the TARGUSinfo™ Service ID
and enabling or disabling the Internet Expansion subsystem. These controls are described below:
Service ID The Service ID field displays the current TARGUSinfo™ Service ID. This ID is a
10-digit number used when looking up a name through TARGUSinfo™ links. The
Service ID can be set to its default value by pressing the Default button next to the
Service ID field.
Internet The Internet Expansion Enabled checkbox shows whether or not the Calling Name
Expansion Internet Expansion subsystem is enabled. If the checkbox is checked, the subsystem
can be used for querying calling names. If the checkbox is not checked, the sub-
Enabled?
system cannot be used for querying calling names.

Version: 01
Link Information - This section displays the status of currently configured links as well as links
that are pending add or pending delete (pending links have not had their current status saved to the
AP yet). The Link Information section also contains the controls for adding or deleting links.
Link details are displayed in a table containing the following columns:
Column Name Description

Interface The ethernet interface the AP will use to connect to the TARGUS-
info™ server.
IP Address The IP Address of the TARGUSinfo™ server.
Port Port number of the TARGUSinfo™ server.
Local State The state of the local (AP) side of the connection.
Remote State The state of the remote (TARGUSinfo™) side of the connection.
Enabled Checked if the link is enabled. Unchecked if the link is disabled.
Delete Pending Yes, if the link is pending delete. No, if the link is not pending
delete.
Table 9-1 Link Information Column Descriptions
The data displayed in the Link Information table can be reloaded from the AP by pressing F5 on
the keyboard. If an attempt to reload data is made while changes are pending, a warning dialog
will appear, prompting whether or not to save the changes to the AP instead of overwriting the
changes with data from the AP.
A maximum of 10 links can exist in the Calling Name Internet Expansion system. This includes
pending delete links. If less than 10 links have been configured, the Add button may be pressed to
open the Enter New Link Information dialog (see Figure 9-20).
Figure 9-20 Enter New Link Information Dialog
The following fields must be populated in the Enter New Link Information dialog before the new
link can be added:
IP Address The IP Address of the TARGUSinfo™ server.
Port Port number of the TARGUSinfo™ server.

Version: 01
Interface The ethernet interface the AP will use to connect to the TARGUSinfo™ server.
Once the fields in the Enter New Link Information dialog are populated, press the OK button to
add (pending save) the new link. Press the Cancel button to exit the dialog without adding the
new link.
To delete a link, select a link in the table and press the Delete button below the table. The selected
link will have its Delete Pending column status changed from "No" to "Yes." Any links pending
delete will be deleted when the configuration changes are saved to the AP (see the “Saving/Dis-
carding Configuration Changes” section below).
Test - This section allows the Calling Name Internet Expansion system to be tested by entering a
10-digit phone number into the Phone Number field and pressing the Lookup Number button. If
the AP successfully queries the number, then the name associated with the number will be dis-
played in a dialog box similar to Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-21 Found Number Dialog
Saving/Discarding Configuration Changes - Any changes made in the Calling Name Internet
Expansion Config window are pending until they are saved to the AP. Changes may be saved by
pressing CTRL+S on the keyboard or selecting the File | Save APAC menu command. To discard
all configuration changes, close the window and select the No button when prompted to save Call-
ing Name Internet Expansion changes.
9.14 Calling Name Configuration
The Calling Name Configuration interface is used to manage the AP calling name subsystems for
APs with software release 4.1.1 or greater. To access this interface, select the Insert|Calling
Name|Calling Name Configuration menu option in APAC. The following window will be dis-
played:

Version: 01
Figure 9-22 Calling Name Configuration Window
Select one of the following tabs in the Calling Name Configuration window to access the associ-
ated subsystem:
• Access Control (Section 9.14.1) - Used to configure how originating point codes can use
the calling name subsystem on the AP to retrieve calling names.
• Dip OPCs (Section 9.14.2) - Used to configure the originating point codes whose calling
name database dips will be counted.
• IP Delivery (Section 9.14.3) - Used to configure the delivery of calling name information to
an IP-based host.
In addition to the tab control, there are two buttons in the lower-left corner of the Calling Name
Configuration window (Figure 9-22) that can be used to transfer calling name configuration data
to the AP. If the Transfer Changes button is pressed, only the changed configuration data will be
transferred to the AP. If the Transfer All Data button is pressed, all calling name configuration
data will be transferred to the AP.
9.14.1 Calling Name Access Control
The Calling Name Access Control interface is used to configure how originating point codes can
use the calling name subsystem on the AP to retrieve calling names. To access this interface,
select the Insert|Calling Name|Calling Name Configuration menu option in APAC to open the
Calling Name Configuration window, and then select the Access Control tab (see Figure 9-23).

Version: 01
Figure 9-23 Calling Name Access Control Interface
The Access Control interface (Figure 9-23) contains a list of the currently configured OPC’s and
the methods each OPC is allowed to access the AP’s calling name subsystem. The columns of
this list are described in Table 9-2. The three buttons along the bottom of the list are used for add-
ing, editing, or deleting OPC’s to/from the list. These buttons are described in detail below Table
9-2.
There is also a “Lock/Unlock” padlock button located in the lower left corner of the Access Con-
trol interface. This button can be in one of two states: locked or unlocked . If the button
is in the locked position, it means that only switches with point codes listed in the OPC list will be
allowed to access the AP’s calling name subsystem. Requests from any other switch (originating
point code) will be rejected with an error indication. If the button is in the unlocked position, any
switch can access the AP’s calling name subsystem regardless of whether or not the switch’s
point code is in the OPC list. Requests from switches with point codes not in the OPC list will
attempt a lookup using the City/State system (other extended lookup systems are disabled) if the
name is not found.

Version: 01

OPC Originating Point Code of the switch originating the calling name
lookup. This OPC can be specified to the network, cluster, or
member level.
Description A short description (26 characters maximum) of the entry.
Targus Set to “Yes” if lookups through TARGUSinfo™ links are allowed.

Set to “No” if lookups through TARGUSinfo™ links are not
allowed.
City/State Set to “Yes” if lookups through the AP’s City/State system are
allowed. Set to “No” if lookups through the AP’s City/State system
are not allowed.
Expansion Set to “Yes” if lookups through an expansion point code are

allowed. Set to “No” if lookups through an expansion point code
are not allowed.
Expansion PC/TT The expansion point code and translation type that will be used if
lookups through an expansion point code are enabled for this OPC.
IP Delivery Set to “Yes” if calling names will be sent using IP Delivery. Set to
“No” if calling names are not sent using IP Delivery.
Name Not Found The action to take when a calling number is not found in the AP’s
Action local calling name database. The choices for this action are listed
below:
• Return Error - Return an error to the requesting switch.
• Extended Lookup: No Error - Do an extended calling
name lookup through one of the AP’s extended lookup
mechanisms (i.e., TARGUSinfo™ links or City/State) and
do not log an error.
• Extended Lookup: Log Error - Do an extended calling
name lookup through one of the AP’s extended lookup
mechanisms (i.e., TARGUSinfo™ links or City/State) and
log an error to the AP’s standard error log.
• System Default Action - Use the system default “Name Not
Found” action (see Section 9.15 - "Set AP Options for Call-
ing Name" for more information).
Table 9-2 Access Control List Column Descriptions
Add Button
When the Add button is pressed, a dialog similar to Figure 9-24 will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 9-24 Calling Name OPC Entry Dialog
The fields in the OPC Entry dialog match the columns described in Table 9-2 and are initially
blank. The only fields that require special formatting are Point Code and Expansion Point Code.
An originating point code can be a 3, 6, or 9-digit code specified to the network, cluster, or mem-
ber level. An expansion point code must be a 9-digit code. All used placeholders for the point
codes must be filled with 0’s (i.e., a point code like 101.1.92 would be entered as 101.001.092,
and a point code like 24.201 would be 024.201). The Expansion Point Code and Expansion
Translation Type fields will be disabled if the Expansion PC checkbox is unchecked or the cur-
rently selected AP system does not have software release 4.2 or greater.
To add a new OPC, populate the fields in the dialog and press the OK button. To exit the OPC
Entry dialog without saving the new point code, press the Cancel button.
Edit Button
When an existing OPC is selected in the list and the Edit button is pressed, a dialog similar to Fig-
ure 9-24 will be displayed. The OPC Entry dialog fields will be populated with the current set-
tings of the selected OPC, and the Point Code field will be disabled. After any changes to the
OPC settings are completed, press the OK button to save the changes. The Cancel button can be
pressed at any time to exit the dialog without saving the changes.
Delete Button
To begin deleting an OPC from the list, select the OPC to delete and press the Delete button. A
delete confirmation dialog will be displayed. If the Yes button is pressed in the confirmation dia-
log, the selected OPC will be removed from the list and will be deleted from the AP the next time
data is transferred to the AP.

Version: 01
9.14.2 Calling Name Dip OPCs
NOTE: The information provided in this section is only applicable if the AP displayed in
the AP selection box located on the toolbar is running an AP software release of version
4.1.1 or greater. See Section 9.10 for information on managing Dip OPCs for AP systems
with a software release older than 4.1.1.
The Calling Name Dip OPCs feature provides a count of successful and unsuccessful calling
name queries. A dip count report (see Section 9.12 for more information) is provided for each
provisioned OPC. To access the interface used to configure which originating point codes will
have calling name dips counted on them, select the Insert|Calling Name|Calling Name Configu-
ration menu option in APAC. The Calling Name Configuration window will open. Select the
Dip OPCs tab to display an interface similar to Figure 9-25.
Figure 9-25 Calling Name Dip OPCs Interface
The Dip OPCs interface (Figure 9-25) contains a list of the currently configured Dip OPCs and a
short description of each OPC. The three buttons along the bottom of the list (Add, Delete, AP
Auto-Logging) are described in detail below.
Add Button
Figure 9-26 Dip OPC Entry Dialog

Version: 01
The Dip OPC Entry dialog contains the following fields:
Point Code The 9-digit SS7 physical network address. SS7 point codes are par-
titioned into three 3-digit sections: network, cluster, and member.
It is not necessary to enter complete SS7 point codes for the OPC.
You may enter partial point codes by specifying the network por-
tion, or network and cluster portions of a point code. This is useful
if you want to include all the point codes used by a specified tele-
phone company. When entering a point code, all used placeholders
of the point code must be filled with 0’s (i.e., a point code like
101.1.92 would be entered as 101.001.092, and a point code like
24.201 would be 024.201).
Description Any descriptive text associated with the OPC. Typically, this is the
telephone company or switch name of the OPC. For example, net-
work number 248 refers to US West. This field is optional.
Populate the fields in the dialog and press the OK button to add the Dip OPC to the list, or press
the Cancel button to exit the dialog without adding a new Dip OPC.
Delete Button
To begin deleting a Dip OPC from the list, select the Dip OPC to delete and press the Delete but-
ton. A delete confirmation dialog will be displayed. If the Yes button is pressed in the confirma-
tion dialog, the selected Dip OPC will be removed from the list and will be deleted from the AP
the next time data is transferred to the AP.
AP Auto-Logging Button
Press the AP Auto-Logging button to open the APAC Event Scheduler and schedule AP Calling
Name Dip Count Auto-Logging. The auto-logging function allows the recording of the current
counts to automatically occur at regularly, scheduled intervals. At the scheduled times, the AP
will autonomously record the current counts in the AP’s Calling Name Dip Count Log file. For
more information about this option, see Section 16.1 - "Scheduling APAC Functions".
9.14.3 Calling Name IP Delivery
The Calling Name IP Delivery interface is used to configure the AP’s calling name IP delivery
settings. To access this interface, select the Insert|Calling Name|Calling Name Configuration
menu option in APAC to open the Calling Name Configuration window, and then select the IP
Delivery tab (Figure 9-27). For information on managing individual calling name IP delivery
numbers, see Section 9.14.3.1.

Version: 01
Figure 9-27 Calling Name IP Delivery Interface
The IP Delivery interface (Figure 9-27) contains a list of the currently configured IP delivery
NPA-NXXs and the settings each NPA-NXX uses to send calling name information out to the
AP. The columns of this list are described in Table 9-3. The three buttons along the bottom of the
list are used for adding, editing, or deleting NPA-NXXs from the list. These buttons are described
in detail below Table 9-3.

NPA-NXX NPA-NXX of called phone numbers that will send calling name
information out of the AP.
Description A short description (50 characters maximum) of the entry. This is

typically the location that the NPA-NXX covers (i.e., an exchange
name).
Ethernet Port AP ethernet port to send out IP delivery messages on. This should
be the WAN connection on the AP.
Target IP Addr. The target IP address to which the calling name data will be sent.
Target UDP Port The target UDP port to which the calling name data will be sent.
Table 9-3 IP Delivery List Column Descriptions
Add Button

Version: 01
Figure 9-28 IP Delivery Entry Dialog
The fields in the IP Delivery Entry dialog match the columns described in Table 9-3 and are ini-
tially blank. To add a new IP delivery NPA-NXX, populate the fields in the dialog and press the
OK button. To exit the dialog without saving the new IP delivery entry, press the Cancel button.
Edit Button
When an existing NPA-NXX is selected in the list and the Edit button is pressed, a dialog similar
to Figure 9-28 will be displayed. The IP Delivery Entry dialog fields will be populated with the
current settings of the selected NPA-NXX, and the Called NPA-NXX field will be disabled. After
any changes to the IP delivery settings for the NPA-NXX are completed, press the OK button to
save the changes. The Cancel button can be pressed at any time to exit the dialog without saving
the changes.
Delete Button
To begin deleting an IP delivery NPA-NXX from the list, select the NPA-NXX to delete and
press the Delete button. A delete confirmation dialog will be displayed. If the Yes button is
pressed in the confirmation dialog, the selected entry will be removed from the list and will be
deleted from the AP the next time data is transferred to the AP.
9.14.3.1 IP Delivery Members
The management of calling name IP delivery members is done through the IP Delivery Numbers
window (see Figure 9-29). This window can be accessed by selecting an AP with software
release 4.1.1 or greater in the AP selection box, and then selecting the Insert|Calling Name|IP
Delivery Members menu option in APAC.

Version: 01
Figure 9-29 IP Delivery Numbers Window
The IP Delivery Numbers window consists of a list used to display IP delivery numbers, a section
for adding/deleting/finding numbers, and a section for transferring IP delivery numbers to the AP.
These sections are described below.
Called Number List

The Called Number list is a single column that displays any IP delivery numbers that have been
added or found using the Add and Find buttons described in the next section. These numbers are
always displayed as 10-digit directory numbers.
Configure Called Numbers Section

This section contains an edit box for entering phone numbers, and three buttons. The functions of
these buttons are described below.
Find Enter a 6 to 10-digit called number into the edit box and press this button to
find and display all matching numbers in the list. For example, entering 605-
995 in the edit box and pressing the Find button would display all called num-
bers with an NPA-NXX of 605-995.
Add Enter a 10-digit number into the edit box and press the Add button to add a
new 10-digit called number to the IP delivery numbers list. The new number
must start with an NPA-NXX entered in the IP Delivery section (see Section
9.14.3) of the Calling Name Configuration interface (see Section 9.14), or it
will not be added.
Note: For each number added, a termination attempt trigger must be placed
on that line for IP Delivery to function correctly.

Version: 01
Delete The Delete button is used to remove a number or range of numbers from the
IP delivery numbers list. Deleting works as follows:
• If a single number is selected in the numbers list, and the Delete button
is pressed, the selected number will be deleted.
• If no items are selected in the numbers list, and a 6 to 10-digit number
is entered in the edit box, then all numbers matching the entered digits
will be deleted when the Delete button is pressed. For example, enter-
ing 605-995 in the edit box and pressing the Delete button will delete
all called numbers beginning with an NPA-NXX of 605-995.
When the Delete button is pressed, a confirmation dialog always appears
before the actual deletion takes place. If the Yes button is pressed in the con-
firmation dialog, the number or range of numbers will be removed from the
list and will be deleted from the AP the next time data is transferred to the
AP.
Update AP
This section has two buttons: Transfer Changes, and Transfer All Data. If the Transfer Changes
button is pressed, only the IP delivery numbers with pending changes will be transferred to the
AP. If the Transfer All Data button is pressed, then all IP delivery number information will be
transferred to the AP.
The calling name IP delivery numbers can also be transferred to the AP database at any time using
the Transfer To AP function (see Section 6.1) in APAC, or at scheduled intervals using the APAC
Event Scheduler (see Section 16.1).
9.15 Set AP Options for Calling Name
services. The following options can be set for Calling Name by selecting the Tools|AP Options
menu command and clicking on the Calling Name tab in the AP Options window:

Version: 01
Figure 9-30 AP Options - Calling Name
Name Not Found The action to take when a calling number is not found in the AP’s local calling name
Action database. The choices for this action are listed below:
• Error - Return an error if the calling number is not found in the AP's local data-
base.
• Extended, No Error - Lookup the calling name through the AP's extended
lookup system. If the name is not found, do not log an error.
• Extended, Log Error - Lookup the calling name through the AP's extended
lookup system. If the name is not found, log an error.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 10 - Call Management Features (CMF)
Chapter 10 - Call Management Features (CMF)
NOTE: The Call Management Features are for use with the Nortel DMS-10 switch only.
10.1 The CMF Customer Information Window
The CMF (Call Management Features) Customer Information window is used to view a sub-
scriber’s record and configure the call management capabilities of the subscriber with access to
CMF on the AP. From the CMF Customer Information window you may assign or remove
administrative capabilities, query a subscriber’s CMF data, delete a subscriber from the CMF
database or change a subscriber’s PIN (Personal Identification Number).
Please see the AP Installation and Maintenance Manual for a description of the Call Management
Features and instructions for using the features on the telephone.
To open the CMF Customer Information window, select View|CMF Customer Info. The PC must
have access to the AP at this time because the CMF database is located in the AP, not the PC. The
connection will automatically be made whether the connection is over a modem or directly con-
nected. Once a connection is made, a window similar to the following will appear.
Figure 10-1 CMF Customer Information Window
To modify or view a customer’s CMF data, enter the telephone number of the subscriber in the
area provided. After the phone number has been entered, the following functions may be accom-
plished by clicking on one or more of the buttons below the phone number entry.

Version: 01
1. Query - The APAC software will query the CMF database in the AP and post the sub-
scriber’s CMF record in the Customer Information section. The following will be dis-
played:
• PIN
• Whether the phone is an Administrative Phone
• Whether One Plus calls are allowed
• Number of speed calls attempted
• Speed Code list
• Number of 900 calls attempted
• 900 Blocking status
• NXX list
Because the customer controls most of the data in the CMF database, it is possible that the
data has changed since the query was first initiated. The Query button allows the data on
the screen to be updated as frequently as desired.
2. Reset PIN - Resets the posted subscriber’s PIN to 0000.
3. Delete- Deletes the subscriber from the CMF database.
4. Set Admin Phone - Assigns CMF administration privileges to this station. Selected stations
can manage a CMF subscriber’s data from their telephones by dialing special access
codes. Administrative Phones can be used to reset a subscriber's PIN to 0000 or delete a
subscriber from the CMF database. Please see the AP Installation and Maintenance Man-
ual for further information regarding the use of Administrative Phones.
5. Clear Admin Phone - Removes CMF administration privileges from this station.
If the subscriber is not in the CMF database a window will open stating, "The specified customer
does not exist in the AP database."
10.2 Setting the AP Options for the Call Management Features
The AP Options function (Tools|AP Options) is used to set generic system parameters associated
with different AP services. The following options can be set for the Call Management Features
from the AP Options window:

Version: 01
Figure 10-2 AP Options - CMF
Max 900 NXX Codes This option sets the maximum number of 900 NXX codes to be allowed for each
CMF subscriber. The value must be between 0 and 252 and is set in multiples of
4. If the value is not a multiple of 4, the value will be rounded up to the next mul-
tiple of 4. Default is 12.
Max Speed Call Codes This option sets the maximum number of Speed Call Codes to be allowed for
each CMF subscriber. The value must be between 0 and 255. Default is 12.
Carrier Code This option sets the CMF carrier code in the AP. The CMF carrier code is
returned as the Carrier Value in the CMF response message. It must match the
value specified in OVLY CNFG LDBS CARR prompt in the DMS-10. It must
not equal the carrier code of a carrier defined in OVLY EQA. The default value
is 0110.
See the AP Installation and Maintenance Manual for more information on the Call Management
Features.
10.3 Backup CMF Database
phone, APAC does not keep CMF data in a database on the PC. Rather, the CMF data from the
AP may be backed up and stored in a backup file located on the PC. This file will be used to
restore the CMF database in the AP in the event that both AP units lose their data, e.g., both units
losing power at the same time will cause the databases to be lost.

Version: 01
Select Tools|AP Transfer|Service Data From AP or click the Backup data from AP button on the
toolbar. The Transfer from AP window will display. Check the Call Management Features
option and click Start Transfer. A window will appear asking you to specify a name and location
for the backup file. If desired, the default filename and directory may be used. The default file-
name is the current date followed by two zeros and a CMF extension. When the name and direc-
tory have been specified, click the Save button to start the backup process. A transfer progress bar
will appear indicating the progress of the backup. The backup process may take some time.
10.4 Restore CMF Database
To restore the CMF database click the Transfer To AP button on the toolbar or select Tools|AP
Transfer|Service Data To AP. The Transfer to AP window will appear. Select the All Data option
and then check the Call Management Features Restore box. A window will appear prompting
you to specify a CMF backup file (usually the most current file). Click Open after a file has been
selected. A confirmation box will appear. Click Yes to continue.
You may choose not to restore any other databases at this time. If this is the case, remove the
check marks from all of the other boxes. Click the Start Transfer button to begin the restore pro-
cess. A transfer progress bar will appear indicating the progress of the restore.
IMPORTANT: The CMF Restore process will overwrite all CMF information in the AP
database with the new information. This process should only be required if the entire CMF
database is lost, e.g., when power is removed from both units at the same time. Care should
always be taken to avoid removing power from both units at the same time.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 11 - Time
Chapter 11 - Time
11.1 Managing the Time in the Application Peripheral
The AP system clock, by itself, is not extremely accurate. There are three methods described in
this chapter that may be used to ensure the AP system time is correct. They are as follows:
• Switch Time Monitoring (Section 11.1.1) - The Switch Time Monitoring feature is for use
with the Nortel DMS-10 switch only. It provides the ability to periodically set the AP time
by querying the DMS-10 switch's time. Switch Time Monitoring using a switch as the mas-
ter timekeeper is the recommended mechanism, when available, to update the AP's time. If
the AP is the master timekeeper, then it is recommended that Network Time Protocol be
used to maintain accurate AP system time.
• Manually Setting the AP Time (Section 11.1.2) - The AP system time may be manually set
to the current PC time using the interfaces accessed through the Tools|Manage AP Time
menu command in APAC.
• Network Time Protocol (Section 11.1.4) - AP systems with software release 4.2.1 or
greater may use Network Time Protocol (NTP) to periodically synchronize the AP system
time with the clocks of computers over the Internet. This feature should not be used in con-
junction with the Switch Time Monitoring feature unless the AP is the master timekeeper in
the Switch Time Monitoring configuration.
The AP also uses T1 synchronization to maintain accurate AP system time. T1 synchronization

occurs (autonomously) when one or more T1’s are connected to the AP system. The AP system
uses the very stable and accurate T1 signals to regulate its internal clock. Therefore, once the AP
system time is set (manually), the AP will continue to keep accurate time as long as the T1(s) stay
in service.
NOTE: If there are no T1 circuits connected to the AP system to provide clock synchroni-
zation, and the Switch Time Monitoring and Network Time Protocol methods are not being
used to periodically update the AP system time, then the AP time should be set manually
(see Section 11.1.2) on at least a weekly basis to ensure the AP is keeping accurate time.
APAC also has a Time Zone Offset feature, which allows the time of Point Codes, NPA-NXXs,
and 10-digit Directory Numbers to be offset from -12 hours to +12 hours from GMT (Greenwich
Mean Time). See Section 11.1.5 - "Time Zone Offset Management" for more information about
this feature.

Version: 01
11.1.1 Switch Time Monitoring
The AP monitors the time of a set of telephone switches and reports if the variation from the mas-
ter switch exceeds a specified amount. The switch time monitoring functions operate only in the
unit in which they are provisioned. It is recommended that this be done in one unit only. Switch
time monitoring commands are local to the unit.
IMPORTANT: The switch time monitor feature allows defining a master switch. When
this is done, the master switch sets the AP time and date each time it is read. It is recom-
mended that the master switch and a rate be defined even if the switch time monitoring fea-
ture is not to be used. This provides the AP with an accurate time source.
11.1.1.1 Configuring Switch Time Monitoring in the AP
1. Select Tools|Time Monitoring to configure time monitoring for the selected AP system.
When this command is selected, the Time Monitoring Configuration window will be dis-
played.
Figure 11-1 Time Monitoring Configuration Window
2. Enter the following information:

Version: 01
Master PC Primary 9 digit SS7 physical network address or point code (PC) of the mas-
ter switch. Each query to the master switch will update the date and time in
the AP. This is the switch to which all other switches will be compared. If a
point code of '0 0 0' is entered in this field, the master switch is undefined and
the switch times will be compared against the time in the AP. It is recom-
mended to define the master switch by entering a valid point code other than
'0 0 0' instead of using the AP as the master timekeeper.
NOTE: If the AP is used as the master timekeeper, then it is recommended
that Network Time Protocol (see Section 11.1.4) be used to ensure the AP
system time is kept accurate.
Rate in min The rate at which the time queries is placed. For example, to set a rate of 10
minutes, you would enter '10' in this field. After this is done, time queries
will be sent to each of the switches in the switch time monitoring table every
10 minutes.
Deviation The maximum allowable time deviations. For example, if you enter '4' for
this field, a switch will have to be 4 minutes off of the master before the alarm
is set. This value can range from 1 to 120 minutes.
Enable Monitoring Activates or de-activates time monitoring. To activate time monitoring, select
Yes. If no queries are to be sent to the switches, select No. This field will ini-
tially default to No.
Enable Alarms Activates or de-activates the alarms. If minor alarms are to be generated
when a maximum deviation is met, select Yes. To prevent minor alarms from
being generated, select No. This field will initially default to No.
Manage Point Defines the point codes of the switches that will be queried for time. Up to 20
Codes point codes can be entered. To add the point code, simply select the Add but-
ton after entering the point code. To remove or delete the point code, simply
highlight the point code from the list of point codes that are being monitored,
and select the Delete button.
3. Save the changes by clicking the in the upper right-hand corner of the active window,
or by selecting the Close button. You will be prompted on whether to save the changes or
not. Select Yes to save the changes. A save may also be performed by using the File|Save
function or pressing CTRL + S.
11.1.1.2 Configuring Switch Time Monitoring in the Switch
For switch time monitoring to function in the DMS-10, the subsystem number for Time must be
provisioned. The subsystem number specified in the Application Peripheral must match the value
specified in OVLY CNFG SUB LDMG prompt in the DMS-10. In APAC, the subsystem number

Version: 01
in the Application Peripheral is set in the SS7 Network Configuration window by selecting Tools
| SS7 Network. The default value is 6. Note that a translation table number is also displayed in
this window but is not used. This number will also default to 6.
11.1.1.3 Displaying the Switch Time Monitor Table
The Switch Time Monitoring table may be viewed by selecting Tools|Time Monitoring. See Fig-
ure 11-1 - "Time Monitoring Configuration Window". The point code for each switch entered for
time monitoring will be displayed.
11.1.2 Manually Setting the AP Time
Use the Tools|Manage AP Time command to access the interfaces used to manually set the time
of the selected AP based on the current PC time. As noted previously in this chapter, Switch
Time Monitoring (see Section 11.1.1) is the recommended mechanism to update the AP's time. If
the Manage AP Time function is used to set the AP's time, and there are no T1 circuits connected
to the AP system to provide clock synchronization, then you should perform this function weekly
to ensure the AP is keeping accurate time.
To set the AP's time based on the PC time, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools|Manage AP Time from the APAC menu. The Manage AP's Time window
will display, as shown below. The name of the current AP will be displayed at the top of
the window.
Figure 11-2 Manage AP's Time Window
The Manage AP's Time window contains the following information:
AP Time This shows the current time read from the AP.

Version: 01
Local Time This shows the APAC PC's current time.
Select AP Time Zone This setting allows you to select the time zone in which the AP resides.
Time Zone Time Time at the selected time zone. This time is calculated based on the cur-
rent computer time and the selected time zone. The AP’s time will be set
to this time when the OK button is pressed.
If this is the first time you have used this function, the Select AP Time Zone setting will
default to the time zone currently set on the APAC PC. If you have previously used this
function to set the AP's time, the Select AP Time Zone setting will show the time zone
selected at the last use of this function.
2. To select the time zone in which the AP resides, click the with your left mouse button
to access the drop-down menu. Use the scroll bars on the right side of the drop-down
menu to examine the entire list of time zones.
Figure 11-3 Selecting the Time Zone
3. From the drop-down list, select the time zone where the AP is located. The Time Zone
Time will change to display the time according to the selected time zone.
4. Press the Set Time and Time Zone on AP button to set the time on the AP to the time dis-
played in the Time Zone Time field. This change will be immediately transferred to the
selected AP.
5. If the current AP system has software release 4.2.1 or greater, then there will be a Config-
uration tab at the top of the window. If this tab is present, the Daylight Savings Time set-
tings (see Section 11.1.3) in the Configuration tab should be configured at this time.

Version: 01
6. If you have more settings to configure in the Manage AP’s Time window, do so at this
time. If you are finished with all changes to settings in the Manage AP’s Time window,
press the OK button to accept all of these changes, or press the Cancel button to exit the
window without saving your changes. Help is available through the Help button.
7. If you selected OK, the Manage AP’s Time window will be closed and all of the changes
to settings in the Manage AP’s Time window will be immediately transferred to the
selected AP.
11.1.3 Daylight Savings Time Management for the AP
Daylight Savings Time is supported on AP systems with software release 4.2.1 or greater, and
should be configured on all AP systems that have the feature available.
To configure how the AP handles Daylight Savings Time, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools|Manage AP Time from the APAC menu. The Manage AP's Time window
will be displayed, and the name of the current AP will be displayed at the top of the win-
dow.
2. Select the Configuration tab at the top of the window. A screen similar to Figure 11-4 will
be displayed.
Figure 11-4 Manage AP’s Time - Configuration Tab
The Daylight Savings Time settings are located in the AP Time Zone Configuration sec-
tion at the bottom of the window. They are described below:
Recognize Daylight This setting is used to determine whether or not the AP is in a time zone that
Savings uses Daylight Savings Time. Select the Yes radio button if Daylight Sav-
ings Time is recognized in the AP’s time zone, or select No if it is not.

Version: 01
Adjust For DST This setting determines whether or not the system time on the AP will be
automatically adjusted for Daylight Savings Time. Select Yes to configure
the AP to automatically adjust its time, or select No to prevent the AP from
adjusting its system time for Daylight Savings Time.
3. Set the Daylight Savings Time settings described above and make any other desired
changes to settings in the Manage AP’s Time window.
4. When you are finished with all changes to settings in the Manage AP’s Time window,
press the OK button to accept these changes, or press the Cancel button to exit the window
without saving your changes. Help is available through the Help button.
selected AP.
11.1.4 Network Time Protocol
Network Time Protocol (NTP) allows AP systems to periodically synchronize their system time
with the clocks of computers over the Internet. This feature is only available on AP systems with
software release 4.2.1 or greater and should not be used in conjunction with the Switch Time
Monitoring feature (see Section 11.1.1) unless the AP is the master timekeeper in the Switch
Time Monitoring configuration.
To configure NTP for the selected AP system, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools|Manage AP Time from the APAC menu. The Manage AP’s Time window
will be displayed, and the name of the current AP will be shown in the window’s caption.
2. Select the Configuration tab at the top of the window. A screen similar to Figure 11-5 will
be displayed.
Figure 11-5 Manage AP’s Time - Configuration Tab

Version: 01
The NTP settings and controls are located in the NTP Configuration section at the top of
the window. They are described below:
Timer The rate (in minutes) at which requests will be sent to the time servers. This
value can range from 0 to 600 minutes. Setting this field to 0 will prevent
requests from being sent and will effectively turn off the feature.
Deviation The maximum allowed difference (in seconds) between the AP system time
and the time returned from the time servers before a minor time alarm is gen-
erated. For example, if 120 is entered for this field, the AP will have to be 2
minutes off the time returned by the time servers before an alarm is set. This
value can range from 0 to 600 seconds. If this field is set to 0, then allowed
deviation checks will never occur and the AP time will always be updated if
Allow NTP to Update AP is set to Yes.
NOTE: If automatic updates to AP time are allowed (Allow NTP to Update
AP is set to Yes), then the allowed deviation must be exceeded two request
cycles in a row before the AP will be updated with the returned time. This
ensures that any time returned by the time servers that exceeds the allowed
deviation is not an aberration.
Time Server List The list of time servers configured for NTP. If multiple servers are in this list,
then requests for time will be sent to all servers and the first valid time
returned by a server will be used. If all servers fail to respond for four consec-
utive request cycles (based on the Timer setting), then an alarm will be gener-
ated. Information about the columns in this list is available in Section 11.1.4.1
- "Add a Time Server".
Allow NTP to Select the Yes option to allow the AP system time to be set to the time returned
Update AP from the servers if the returned time exceeds the allowed deviation or the
allowed deviation is set to 0 (see the Deviation description above for more
information). Select the No option to prevent the AP system time from being
automatically updated.
Read NTP Press this button to immediately query the time servers for the current time
and update the AP with the returned time. This method of updating the AP
time overrides the Allow NTP to Update AP and Deviation settings.
3. Enter values into the Timer and Deviation fields, select an Allow NTP to Update AP
option, and add or delete time servers. Instructions for adding time servers are given in
Section 11.1.4.1, and instructions for deleting time servers are given in Section 11.1.4.2.
4. Set the NPA Configuration settings described above and make any other desired changes
to settings in the Manage AP’s Time window.
5. When you are finished with all changes to settings in the Manage AP’s Time window,
press the OK button to accept these changes, or press the Cancel button to exit the window
without saving your changes. Help is available through the Help button.

Version: 01
selected AP.
11.1.4.1 Add a Time Server
Time servers are computers that maintain accurate time. The AP uses NTP to request the time
from these servers and then compares the returned server time with the AP system time. All of
the time servers for the selected AP are displayed in a list below the Timer field in the Configura-
tion tab of the Manage AP’s Time window (accessed through the Tools|Manage AP Time menu
command in APAC). See http://www.ntp.org for more information about NTP and public NTP
servers.
The time server list has three columns. They are described below:
Time Server IP The host name and/or IP address of the time server.
Port The port of the time server. Port values must be in the range of 1-65535. The
default and recommended port for time servers is 123.
Eth Num The AP ethernet port used to send out requests to this time server. This should
be the WAN connection to the AP.
To add a time server, right-click in the time server list to invoke a popup menu (see Figure 11-6)
and select the Add NTP Server command in the popup. A dialog similar to Figure 11-7 will be
displayed.
Figure 11-6 NTP Server Popup Menu
Figure 11-7 Add NTP Server Dialog

Version: 01
The NTP Server Dialog contains the following fields:
NTP Server Select the Host Name option and enter the host name (i.e., time.nist.gov) of an
Address NTP server, or select the IP Address option and enter the IP address (i.e.,
192.43.244.18) of an NTP server.
Port Enter the port of the time server. Port values must be in the range of 1-65535.
The default and recommended port is 123.
Eth Num Select the AP ethernet port used to send out requests to this time server. This
should be the WAN connection to the AP.
Once all fields are set, press the OK button to add the new time server to the list, or press the Can-
cel button to exit the dialog without adding a new time server. If Yes is selected, the new time
server will be immediately transferred to the AP.
11.1.4.2 Delete a Time Server
To delete a time server, right-click the row of the time server you wish to delete to invoke a popup
menu (see Figure 11-6), and then select the Delete NTP Server command in the popup. A delete
confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press the Yes button in the confirmation dialog to complete
the deletion, or press the No button to cancel the deletion. If Yes is selected, the deletion will be
immediately transferred to the AP.
11.1.5 Time Zone Offset Management
The Time Zone Offset feature allows the time of Point Codes, NPA-NXXs, and 10-digit Direc-
tory Numbers to be offset -12 hours to +12 hours from GMT. This feature is only available on AP
systems with software release 4.2.1 or greater. To access the interface used to manage this fea-
ture, complete the following steps:
1. Select Tools|Manage AP Time from the APAC menu. The Manage AP’s Time window
will be displayed, and the name of the current AP will be shown in the window’s caption.
2. Select the TZ Offsets tab at the top of the window. A screen similar to Figure 11-8 will be
displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 11-8 Manage AP’s Time - TZ Offsets Tab
The TZ Offsets tab is partitioned into two sections: Point Code Offsets (see Section
11.1.5.1) and Dialed Number Offsets (see Section 11.1.5.2).
3. Add and delete Point Code Offsets and Dialed Number Offsets as desired. For instruc-
tions on adding and deleting Point Code Offsets, see Section 11.1.5.1. For instructions on
adding and deleting Dialed Number Offsets, see Section 11.1.5.2.
NOTES: All additions and deletions made in the TZ Offsets tab are immediately trans-
ferred to the selected AP.
11.1.5.1 Point Code Offsets
Point Code Offsets are used by the AP to determine the current time for switches that are not in
the same time zone as the AP system. All of the Point Code Offsets for the selected AP are dis-
played in the Point Code Offsets list in the TZ Offsets tab of the Manage AP’s Time window
(accessed through the Tools|Manage AP Time menu command in APAC). Only point codes that
are served by the selected AP, and are not in the same time zone as this AP, should be entered in
the Point Code Offsets list.
The Point Code Offsets list has three columns. They are described below:
Point Code The 9-digit point code configured for this feature.
Offset The number of hours this point code is offset from GMT. This value may
range from -12 to +12.
Recognize DST Does this point code recognize Daylight Savings Time? Yes or No.

Version: 01
Instructions for adding and deleting entries to and from the Point Code Offsets list are given
below.
NOTE: All additions and deletions made in the TZ Offsets tab are immediately transferred
to the selected AP.
Add a Point Code Offset

To add a Point Code Offset, right-click in the Point Code Offsets list to invoke a popup menu (see
Figure 11-9) and select the Add command in the popup. A dialog similar to Figure 11-10 will be
displayed.
Figure 11-9 Point Code Offset Popup Menu
Figure 11-10 Add PC Dialog
The Add PC Dialog contains three settings: PC, Time Zone and Recognize DST. Enter a 9-digit
point code into the PC field, select the Time Zone of that point code, and choose the Yes option for
the Recognize DST setting if this point code recognizes Daylight Savings Time, or the No option
if it does not. If the offset of the selected time zone is not an even number of hours, it will be
rounded down to the nearest whole hour (i.e., Newfoundland would be treated as GMT -3:00
instead of GMT -3:30). Once all the fields are set, press the OK button to add the new point code
to the list. The Cancel button may be pressed at any time to exit the dialog without adding a new
point code.
Delete a Point Code Offset

To delete a Point Code Offset, right-click the row of the point code you wish to delete to invoke a
popup menu (see Figure 11-9), and then select the Delete command in the popup. A delete confir-
mation dialog will be displayed. Press the Yes button in the confirmation dialog to complete the
deletion, or press the No button to cancel the deletion.

Version: 01
11.1.5.2 Dialed Number Offsets
Dialed Number Offsets are used by the AP to determine the current time for phone numbers that
are not in the same time zone as the AP system. All of the Dialed Number Offsets for the selected
AP are displayed in the Dialed Number Offsets list in the TZ Offsets tab of the Manage AP’s Time
window (accessed through the Tools|Manage AP Time menu command in APAC). Only NPA-
NXXs or phone numbers that are served by the selected AP, and are not in the same time zone as
this AP, should be entered in the Dialed Number Offsets list.
A Dialed Number Offset may be a 6-digit NPA-NXX or a 10-digit directory number. To deter-
mine the offset of a phone number, the AP will first check the directory numbers in the list to see
if a match is found. If a match is found, then the offset associated with that number will be used.
If a match is not found, then the AP will check for the NPA-NXX of the phone number in the list.
If the NPA-NXX is found, then the offset of that NPA-NXX will be used to determine the time of
the phone number.
The Dialed Number Offsets list has three columns. They are described below:
Dialed Number The 6-digit NPA-NXX or 10-digit directory number configured for this fea-
ture.
Offset The number of hours this dialed number is offset from GMT. This value
may range from -12 to +12.
Recognize DST Does this NPA-NXX or directory number recognize Daylight Savings
Time? Yes or No.
Instructions for adding and deleting entries to the Dialed Number Offsets list are given below.
NOTE: All additions and deletions made in the TZ Offsets tab are immediately transferred
to the selected AP.
Add a Dialed Number Offset

To add a Dialed Number Offset, right-click in the Dialed Number Offsets list to invoke a popup
menu (see Figure 11-11) and select the Add command in the popup. A dialog similar to Figure
11-12 will be displayed.
Figure 11-11 Dialed Number Offset Popup Menu

Version: 01
Figure 11-12 Add DN Dialog
The Add DN Dialog contains the following fields:
DN or NPA/NXX Select the DN option and enter a 10-digit directory number into the field next
to the DN option button, or select the NPA/NXX option and enter a 6-digit
NPA-NXX in the field next to the NPA/NXX option button.
Time Zone Select the Time Zone of this NPA-NXX or directory number. If the offset of
the selected time zone is not an even number of hours, it will be rounded down
to the nearest whole hour (i.e., Newfoundland would be treated as GMT -3:00
instead of GMT -3:30).
Recognize DST Select the Yes option this NPA-NXX or directory number recognizes Daylight
Savings Time, or the No option if it does not.
Once all fields are set, press the OK button to add the new number to the list. The Cancel button
may be pressed at any time to exit the dialog without adding a new number.
Delete a Dialed Number Offset

To delete a Dialed Number Offset, right-click the row of the number you wish to delete to invoke
a popup menu (see Figure 11-11), and then select the Delete command in the popup. A delete
confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press the Yes button in the confirmation dialog to complete
the deletion, or press the No button to cancel the deletion.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 12 - Trunk Configuration
Chapter 12 - Trunk Configuration
The Trunk Configuration command allows you to configure the trunks connected to the AP. The
trunk facilities, provided through the T1 circuits, are used by the AP to provide voice services
(e.g., announcements) or for routing calls in certain SLPs (Service Logic Programs).
12.1 T1 Configuration
When Tools|Trunk Configuration is selected, the T1 Configuration window will initially be dis-
played. Use this window to configure the physical location of the AP’s T1 connections. Each AP
unit has two T1 interfaces: connector J900, known as T1 #0, and connector J1000, known as T1
#1. A T1 circuit connects the AP to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). For more
information on the physical configuration of T1 circuits, see the AP Installation Manual and the
AP Engineering Document.
The first time that the Trunk Configuration command is selected, the settings will default to those
shown below. The default T1 connections are as follows: 1) Unit 0, T1#0, Connected to PSTN,
Standby, and 2) Unit 1, T1#0, Connected to PSTN, Standby. However, you are able to move and
delete the connections to match your current physical settings.
Figure 12-1 T1 Configuration Window
To quickly view the settings for a T1, hover the mouse pointer over a T1 connector icon, . A
tooltip will appear that provides the Mode, Framing, Linecode, and LBO (Line Build Out) config-
uration information for that T1 circuit.

Version: 01
• To connect the T1 circuits to the PSTN, simply select the desired T1 connector, , with the
left mouse button, then drag and drop the selected T1 connector onto the PSTN.
• To delete a connection, either select a T1 connector icon and then press the Delete T1 Con-
nection button in the toolbar on the left side of the window, or right-click on a T1 con-
nector icon to invoke a popup menu and select the Delete Connection option in the popup
menu.
• After you have configured the trunk settings, you may transfer the changes to the AP. To do
this, select Transfer Trunk Configuration Changes button, , from the toolbar on the left
side of the window. The icon resembles an AP unit with a small arrow pointing towards it.
• You also have the option of transferring all of the trunk configuration data to the AP. To do
this, select the Transfer All Trunk Configuration Data button, , from the toolbar on the
left side of the window.
• If the AP trunk configuration has been updated with an APAC that is not the current APAC
being used, the Retrieve Trunk Configuration from the AP button, , can be used to syn-
chronize the APAC database with the AP trunk configuration.
T1 circuit settings are modified using the T1 Configuration dialog (see Figure 12-2). This dialog
can be accessed using any of the following three methods:
• Connect a T1 circuit to the PSTN.
• Double-click the T1 connector icon of a T1 circuit that is already connected to the PSTN.
• Right-click on a T1 connector icon to invoke a popup menu and select the Edit Properties
option in the popup menu.
Figure 12-2 T1 Configuration Dialog
The settings available in the T1 Configuration dialog (Figure 12-2) are listed below:
Active If this option is selected, it indicates that the T1 circuit is ready to be placed in-ser-
vice. When APAC transmits the trunk configuration information to the AP, APAC
will attempt to place in-service all active T1 connections.

Version: 01
Standby If this option is selected, it indicates that the T1 connection is a T1 that should not be
placed in-service at the current time. Perhaps it is simply being pre-positioned for
future use. When APAC transmits the trunk configuration information to the AP,
APAC will de-activate (i.e., put in man-made-busy (MMB) state) any standby T1
connections.
Framing Framing may be set to D3/D4 or ESF. The default is D3/D4.
Linecode Linecode may be set to AMI or B8ZS. The default is AMI.
LBO The Line Build Out may be set to one of the following ranges: 0-133ft, 133-266ft,
266-399ft, 399-533ft, or 533-655ft. The default is 0-133ft.
To continue configuring the usage of T1 channels, select the Next>> button, , in the lower
right corner of the window.
12.2 Trunk Configuration – Unit 0
To display the Trunk Configuration – Unit 0 window, select Tools|Trunk Configuration, and then
select the Next>> button from the T1 Configuration window. From this window, you can config-
ure how the T1 channels are to be partitioned between the different functions that require trunk
circuits. T1 channels are grouped into logical entities known as Trunk Groups. A trunk group is
then assigned to a Trunk Service (i.e., voice/announcement function), thereby associating the T1
channels in the trunk group with the specific trunk service. These channels are dedicated to the
specific service to which they are assigned and cannot be use by any other service.
NOTE: From this window you are configuring the trunk services on AP unit 0 only. The
trunk services for each AP unit are configured independently. In fact, not all trunk services
need be provided from both AP units. For example, by assigning a trunk group to the Auto-
matic Number Announcement function only in AP unit 0, you have configured the system
so that Automatic Number Announcement functions are performed only from unit 0. To
configure the trunks on unit 1, press the Next>> button.

Version: 01
Figure 12-3 Trunk Configuration – Unit 0
The window is divided into four sections: available T1 Channels, Trunk Groups, Trunk Services,
and Service Description.
The T1 Channels section contains a drop-down menu of each T1 connected to the PSTN, and a
list of the 24 channels, , that belong to the T1 currently selected in the drop-down menu. The
trunk group to which each channel is assigned is displayed next to the channel number in the list.
The Trunk Groups section lists the 32 Trunk Groups, , and the T1 channels, , associated
with each trunk group. (Note: AP systems running a software release less than version 4.2 will
only have 16 trunk groups available.)
The Trunk Services section lists the trunk services, and trunk groups to which the services are
assigned. The services which can appear in this section are either announcements, , or SLP
(ISUP) services, . The Service Description section contains descriptive text about a service.
The description for a service is displayed when the service is selected in the Trunk Services list.
You are only allowed to enter a description for the General Announcement type of services.
Following is a brief description of commands available from the Trunk Configuration – Unit 0
window:
Deletes the selected trunk group member. That is, it removes

Delete Trunk Group Member, the association of a T1 channel to a trunk group. This command
is only available when a T1 channel under a trunk group is
selected in the Trunk Group tree.

Version: 01
Delete the trunk group from the selected trunk service. This
Delete Service Trunk Group, command is available when a trunk service that has been
assigned a trunk group is selected.
View the properties of the selected trunk service.

Trunk Service Properties,
Display a report of the current configuration of the trunk groups.

Trunk Group Report, See Section 12.4 for more information.
Transfer Trunk Configuration Transfer all pending trunk configuration changes to the AP.
Changes,
Transfer All Trunk Configuration Transfer all of the trunk configuration information to the AP.
Data,
Retrieve Trunk Configuration Data Transfer all of the trunk configuration information from the AP
to the APAC database.
from the AP,
Complete the following steps to configure the trunks for AP Unit 0:

1. Using the left mouse button, select an available channel, , from the T1 section, and drag
and drop it on a Trunk Group, , in the Trunk Groups section. A Trunk Group may con-
tain more than one channel. Note that multiple channels can be selected and assigned to a
trunk group at one time.
2. After you have completed step 1, the channel(s) that you selected should be shown under
the appropriate Trunk Group. For example, if you selected Channel 1 and dropped it on
Trunk Group #2, Trunk Group number 2 will be shown in the Trunk Group column in the
T1 section, and Channel 1 should be listed under Trunk Group #2 in the Trunk Group sec-
tion.
3. Next, we need to associate the Trunk Group, , with a Service, . Trunk Groups can
be shared between the AIN, Std/CLASS, and General Announcement Services. Trunk
Group #2 could be used by both AIN and Std/CLASS Announcement services. However,
a Trunk Group used by any service other than those mentioned above cannot be shared by
any other service. To continue with the example explained in step 2, let's associate Trunk
Group #2 with the ANA (Automatic Number Announcement) service. To do this, select
Trunk Group #2, and drag and drop it onto the ANA service.
4. The Automatic Number Announcement property window will then appear. Similar win-
dows will also appear for the other Trunk Services, such as the Change Number
Announcement and General Announcements 1 and 2 services. Please refer to Section
12.5 - "Trunk Services" for more information.

Version: 01
Figure 12-4 Automatic Number Announcement Properties
5. Use the pull-down menus to select the Trunk KP (Key Pulse) Digit and Trunk ST (Stop)
Digit. These MF (Multi-Frequency) digits must be set to match signaling used by the
trunk group type in the switch.
KP Digits ST Digits
NONE ST
KP STP
KPP ST2P
KP2P ST3P
KP3P
6. Enter the Announcement Number Length. This is the number of digits in the Announce-
ment Number.
7. Enter the Default Announcement Number. This is the number of the Announcement Num-
ber to be played if no other announcement is provided.
8. Enter the Announcement Repeat Count. This is the number of times the announcement
should be repeated when the Automatic Number Announcement is played.
9. Save your changes. You will be prompted with a dialog box that states "Transfer trunk
configurations to the AP? Yes or No". To transfer the changes, select Yes. Otherwise,
select No. If you select No, your changes will still be saved, but will not be transferred to
the AP.
10. To continue and configure the usage of T1 channels in unit 1, select the Next>> button in
the lower right corner of the AP Unit 0 window. To go back to the T1 Configuration win-
dow, select the <<Back button in the lower left corner of the window.

Version: 01
12.3 Trunk Configuration – Unit 1
To display the Trunk Configuration – Unit 1 window, select Tools|Trunk Configuration, and then
select the Next>>, , button twice. This is the third screen in the Trunk Configuration wiz-
ard. Like the previous window (Trunk Configuration - Unit 0), from this window, you can config-
ure how the T1 channels are to be partitioned between the different functions that require trunk
circuits.
NOTE: From the Unit 1 window you are configuring the trunk services on AP unit 1 only.
The trunk services for each AP unit are configured independently. In fact, not all trunk ser-
vices need be provided from both AP units. For example, you could configure the system
so that Automatic Number Announcement functions are performed only from AP unit 0. To
configure the voice functions on unit 0, press the Back button, .
Figure 12-5 Trunk Configuration – Unit 1
This window is very similar to the Unit 0 window. However, notice that the channels, , associ-
ated with Trunk Services in Unit 0 are no longer shown in the T1 section of the window. Those
channels to the PSTN are no long available to be used because they are being used by services in
unit 0. Likewise, when channels are assigned to trunk groups in this unit (unit 1), they will not be
available to be used in unit 0 and therefore not shown in unit 0’s T1 channel list.
See Section 12.2 - "Trunk Configuration – Unit 0" for information about the available commands.
Complete the following steps to configure the trunks for AP Unit 1:

1. Repeat Steps 1-9 in Section 12.2.

Version: 01
2. When you are done configuring the trunks for Unit 1, save your changes. You will be
prompted with a dialog box that states "Transfer trunk configurations to the AP? Yes or
No". To transfer the changes, select Yes. Otherwise, select No. If you select No, your
changes will still be saved, but will not be transferred to the AP.
3. Finally, use the Back button to go back to the Trunk Configuration, or T1 Configuration
windows to make any final changes to the other screens. After you are satisfied with the
T1 Configuration settings, and Trunk configuration settings for Units 0 and 1, select the
Transfer Trunk Configuration Data button to transfer all of the trunk configuration infor-
mation to the selected AP.
12.4 Trunk Group Configuration Report
Use the Trunk Group Configuration command to display a report of the current configuration of
the trunk groups. To access this command, select View|Reports|Trunk Group Configuration, or
click the Trunk Groups Report toolbar button, , from Tools|Trunk Configuration.
The Trunk Group Information report will display. Please see Section 4.2.5 - "Viewing and Print-
ing Reports" for a listing of the options available from the report menu. The report is divided into
three sections: Trunk Group Information, Trunk Group Members, and Services. The fields that
appear on the report depend on whether the service is an Announcement or an ISUP SLP. The
fields for both services are described below.
Figure 12-6 Trunk Group Report - Announcements
Trunk Group Information

• AP Unit – The AP unit in which the Trunk Group is assigned (Unit 1 or Unit 0).
• Trunk Group Number – This is the identification number assigned to this group of trunks.
Trunk groups are associated with services using the Tools|Trunk Configuration screen.
• Direction – The direction of the calls on this trunk group (Incoming or Outgoing).
Trunk Group Members

• AP Unit -- The AP unit to which the physical T1 circuit is connected (Unit 1 or Unit 0).

Version: 01
• T1 Number – Each AP unit has two T1 interfaces: connector J900, known as T1 #0, and
connector J1000, known as T1 #1.
• T1 Channel Number – T1 channel within the T1 circuit.
Services
• Name – The name of the service.
• Annc. Type – Indicates the type of announcement played by this service.
• Annc. Number Length – The number of digits in the Announcement Number.
• Default Annc. Number – The Announcement Number to be played if no other announce-
ment is provided.
• Repeat Count – The number of times the announcement is repeated when the service
announcement (e.g., Automatic Number Announcement) is played. A repeat count of zero
is infinite repeating.
• KP – Key Pulse Digits for the service. These digits match signaling used by the trunk group
type in the switch.
• ST – Start Digits for the service. These digits match signaling used by the trunk group type
in the switch.
• Description -- Text that indicates the purpose of the service. For example, the user may
assign a trunk group to General Announcements that will be used for outgoing calls for a
wakeup/reminder service.
Figure 12-7 Trunk Group Report – ISUP SLP
Trunk Group Information

• AP Unit – The AP unit in which the Trunk Group is assigned (Unit 1 or Unit 0).
• Trunk Group Number – This is the identification number assigned to this group of trunks.
Trunk groups are associated with services using the Tools|Trunk Configuration screen.
• Trunk Group Name – Option descriptive name used to identify the use of the trunk group.
• Direction – The direction of the calls on this trunk group (Incoming, Outgoing, or Two-
way).

Version: 01
• Signaling Type – Signaling method of the trunk group (In-band MF, ISUP, FXS-GS, FXS-
LS, FXO-GS, FXO-LS, or SIP).
• Far-End Name – Shown if the signaling type is ISUP.
• Far-End Point Code – Shown if the signaling type is ISUP.
Trunk Group Members

• AP Unit -- The AP unit to which the physical T1 circuit is connected (Unit 1 or Unit 0).
• T1 Number – Each AP unit has two T1 interfaces: connector J900, known as T1 #0, and
connector J1000, known as T1 #1.
• T1 Channel Number – T1 channel within the T1 circuit.
• ISUP CIC – Circuit Identification Code for the ISUP trunks in the trunk group.
Services
• Name – The name of the service.
• Description -- Text that indicates the purpose of the service. For example, the user may
assign a trunk group to General Announcements that will be used for outgoing calls for a
wakeup/reminder service.
12.5 Trunk Services
The property windows of services in the Trunk Services list fall under one of the following con-
figurations: Announcements (see Section 12.5.1), ISUP SLP (see Section 12.5.2), or Dedicated
Announcements (see Section 12.5.3). Descriptions of Trunk Services are available in Section
12.5.4.
12.5.1 Trunk Service Window - Announcements
To access a property screen for an announcement service, highlight the service (e.g., General
Announcements 0) in the Trunk Services section of the Trunk Configuration window
(Tools|Trunk Configuration), and select the Trunk Services Properties button, , or double click
the left mouse button in the Trunk Services section. A trunk service window similar to the one
shown below will appear.

Version: 01
Figure 12-8 Sample Announcement Service Window
The primary functions of the announcement service window are to associate a service with a trunk
group, configure the "KP" (Key Pulse) and "ST" (Start) digits, the number of MF digits in the
announcement number, and the direction of calls (incoming or outgoing).
The announcement service window may contain some (or all) of the following fields:
Trunk Group - This is the trunk group to which the service is assigned. Note that this field is for
information only, and cannot be updated in this window. Trunk groups are associated with ser-
vices using the Trunk Configuration screen (as documented in Section 12.2).
Direction - Use the pull-down menu to select the direction of the calls on this trunk group
(Incoming or Outgoing).
Trunk KP (Key Pulse), and ST (Start) Digits - Use the pull-down menu to select the appropri-
ate MF digits. These digits must be set to match signaling used by the trunk group type in the
switch.
KP Digits ST Digits
NONE ST
KP STP
KPP ST2P
KP2P ST3P
KP3P
Start Type - Use the pull-down menu to select the appropriate start-of-dialing signal used
between the AP and the far-end switch. This field may be set to either Wink or Immediate.
Announcement Number Length - Enter the number of digits in the Announcement Number in
this field.

Version: 01
Default Announcement Number - Enter into this field the number of the announcement to be
played if no other announcement is provided. This field will default to the recommended
announcement number.
Default CNA Announcement - This is the Change Number Announcement used when no entry
is found for the called number in the Change Number Announcement database. This field will
default to the recommended announcement number.
Call Control - This property indicates which end of the trunk is responsible for controlling the
call disconnect. The default value is Either, which means the AP will play the announcement the
number of times indicated by the Announcement Repeat Count value and then hang-up, if the
switch does not hang-up before the repeat count is reached. If Switch is selected, the announce-
ment will stop when the switch disconnects the trunk, and the Announcement Repeat Count field
will be set to zero and disabled.
Announcement Repeat Count - Enter the number of times the announcement should be repeated
when the service announcement (e.g., Automatic Number Announcement) is played. This field
will default to the recommended repeat count. A repeat count of zero is infinite repeating. For
the Standard/CLASS and General Announcements services, either the AP or the switch, or just
the switch can control the repeat count. If the AP controls the repeat count, then a value may be
entered into this field, otherwise the switch controls the repeat count and this field will be set to
zero and disabled. The repeat count control is set through the Call Control field.
Announcement Type - Use the pull-down menu to select an announcement type to play on this
trunk service.
Description - Enter text that indicates the purpose of the General Announcement service. For
example, the use may assign a trunk group to General Announcements that will be used for outgo-
ing calls for a wakeup/reminder service. See the sample trunk service window on the previous
page for more information.
NOTE: The description text will help you to remember the use of the service/trunk group
for future reference. This text will be shown in the Service Description section of the Trunk
Configuration - Unit 0 or Unit 1 windows when you highlight a service from the Trunk Ser-
vices list.
AP DRA Number - This field will appear grayed out, and is provided for information only. Each
General Announcement service is associated with a certain DRA (Digital Recorded Announce-
ment) number of the AP; this field simply shows that DRA number. There are instances when
you may need to know this number, (e.g., for use in an AIN service).

Version: 01
12.5.2 Trunk Service Window - ISUP SLP
When a trunk group is assigned to a SLP, that trunk group must use ISUP as its signaling method.
Therefore, upon trunk group assignment to a SLP, the ISUP Trunk Group Properties window will
be displayed. This window can also be displayed by:
1. Selecting a SLP, , from the Trunk Services list and then selecting the Trunk Service
Properties button, , on the toolbar.
2. Double clicking on a SLP in the Trunk Services list.
3. Adding T1 channels to an ISUP trunk group. The window is displayed so the new chan-
nels can be assigned CIC values.
The ISUP Trunk Group Properties window is where the ISUP trunk group configuration parame-
ters are set. An example ISUP Trunk Group Properties window is shown below. The window has
4 panes, from left to right: general ISUP trunk group parameters, Circuit ID Codes (CIC) for all
T1 channels assigned to this trunk group, a list of phone numbers for ISUP-based services sharing
this trunk group, and a list of CICs already in use on the AP system.
Figure 12-9 Example ISUP Trunk Group Properties Window
General ISUP Parameters Pane

The General ISUP Parameters Pane is the first pane of the ISUP Trunk Group Properties Window.
The following are brief descriptions of the parameters inside of this pane:
• Trunk Group - This field will indicate the trunk group number whose properties are being
displayed and modified. This is a read-only field that is populated by APAC before the win-
dow is displayed.

Version: 01
• Trunk Group Name - This is an optional descriptive name for the trunk group. The text
can be any alphanumeric string up to 25 characters in length. Administrators can use this
name to help identify the use and/or destination of this trunk group. This name will be dis-
played in the trunk group configuration report.
• Signaling Type - This field indicates the signaling type for this trunk group. The signaling
type can be set to ISUP, FXS-GS (Foreign Exchange Station - Ground Start), FXS-LS (For-
eign Exchange Station - Loop Start), FXO-GS (Foreign Exchange Office - Ground Start), or
FXO-LS (Foreign Exchange Office - Loop Start) if the AP system has an AP software
release of 4.2 or greater, or SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) if the software version is 5.0 or
greater. The signaling type is restricted to ISUP if the release version is less than 4.2.
• Direction - This field indicates the direction of call setup for this trunk group: Incoming,
Outgoing, or 2-Way (only available for AP systems with software release 4.2 or greater).
Incoming trunk groups accept call origination from the switch at the far end of the trunks.
Outgoing trunks can originate calls to the switch at the far end of the trunk. Trunk groups
set to 2-Way may accept and originate calls with the switch at the far end of the trunk.
Depending on the SLP, this field may be automatically populated by APAC and read-only.
APAC can populate this field if the SLP only handles incoming calls or only handles outgo-
ing calls. If the SLP handles both incoming and outgoing calls, then, when the user assigns
the first trunk group to the service, they will have to select the direction. If this is the second
trunk group assigned to a SLP that handles incoming and outgoing calls, then the direction
will be set to the opposite value of the first trunk group.
• RLT - Use the pull-down menu to select a Release Link Trunking setting. Release Link
Trunking allows the AP to release facilities between the AP and the switch and merge the
remaining established portions of the call to eliminate the AP from the call path. Without
this feature, two facilities between the switch and the AP must be held during the entire call.
This field is only available for AP systems with software release 4.2 or greater, and may be
set to one of the values listed below:
0 Indicates the Release Link Trunking feature is turned off. This is the default value.
1 Turns the Release Link Trunking feature on for an EWSD switch.
2 Turns the Release Link Trunking feature on for a DMS-10 switch.
• Start Type - Use the pull-down menu to select the appropriate start-of-dialing signal used
between the AP and the far-end switch. This field is only available for FX signaling types
and may be set to one of the following values:
WINK The AP will return a wink back to the switch when an off-hook is
received. Digit collection will not begin until the wink has been
returned.
IMED The AP will not return a wink and will begin digit collection
immediately after an off-hook is received.

Version: 01
• Far-end Name - This is the descriptive name for the network element (normally a switch) at
the immediate far end of the trunks in the trunk group. The text can be any alphanumeric
string up to 25 characters in length. Because an ISUP trunk group can contain trunks that
terminate at only one end point, this field identifies, by name, that far-end network element.
This field is associated with the Far-end Point Code field in the advanced-settings section.
When a name is selected from the drop-down list, the Far-end Point Code field will be
updated with the point code associated with that name. If a new name is typed in this field,
then the administrator must populate the Far-end Point Code field.
• Far-end Point Code - This field indicates the SS7 address (signaling point code) of the
switch at the immediate far-end of the trunks in the trunk group. This field is associated
with the Far-end Name field and can be automatically populated when a pre-field must be
manually populated. Modifying this field can change an existing Far-end Name’s point
code. Also, if a point code is entered that matches a name other than the name specified in
the Far-end Name field, then the user is given the following three choices:
1. Have APAC change the name associated with the point code to the name specified
in the Far-end Name field.
2. Have APAC change the name in the Far-end Name field to match the name cur-
rently associated with the specified point code.
3. Allow the user to change the point code to another value that does not conflict with
an existing name.
• Guard Time - This value, specified in milliseconds, is the time interval that an individual
trunk must be idle before it can be selected for use on another call. This field is only appli-
cable to outgoing and 2-way trunk groups. The valid ranges for this field are 500ms to
1500ms for both ISUP and analog trunk groups. The default value is 768ms.
• Glare Control - If the direction of call setup for this trunk group is set to 2-Way (see the
Direction field description above), then this field is used to determine which end of the cir-
cuit will gain control if both ends simultaneously attempt to seize the circuit. The circuit
that does not become the controlling end will attempt the call on another available circuit.
Options for this field are listed below:
ALL The AP will be the controlling end for all instances of glare.
NONE The far-end will be the controlling end for all instances of glare.
UNC Uncontrolled. This is the default value. The controlling end will
be determined on a per-trunk basis following the rules outlined in
GR-317.
This field is only applicable if the signaling type is ISUP and is only available for AP sys-
tems with software release 4.2 or greater.
• Pick Order - This field is used to specify how a trunk will be selected within the trunk
group for an outbound call. This field is only applicable to outgoing and 2-way trunk
groups and is only available for AP systems with software release 4.2 or greater. For 2-way
trunk groups it is important to select a pick order to minimize glare.

Version: 01
The order of ISUP trunks is based on CIC, while the order of analog trunks is based on T1
and channel number. For example, channel 1 on T1-0 is lower than channel 1 on T1-1.
Channel 24 on T1-0 is lower than channel 1 on T1-1. Searches will span the T1 circuits to
find an available trunk, but will not span units. Sequential searches will “wrap” to the
appropriate T1 when upper or lower bounds have been reached. The options available for
this field are listed below:
LOW Starting with the lowest trunk in the trunk group, the first available
trunk will be selected.
HIGH Starting with the highest trunk in the trunk group, the first available
trunk will be selected.
LSEQ Low-Sequential. The last trunk used is stored. Selection begins

with the next highest trunk until an available trunk is found. The
search “wraps” to the lowest trunk in the trunk group.
HSEQ High-Sequential. The last trunk used is stored. Selection begins

with the next lowest trunk until an available trunk is found. The
search “wraps” to the highest trunk in the trunk group.
LUSE Least used. When a trunk is used in a call a time stamp is created
when the call is started. The least used option will select the trunk
that has not been used in a call for the longest time.
MUSE Most used. When a trunk is used in a call a time stamp is created
on call start. The most used option will select the trunk that was
most recently used in a call.
• Continuity Rate - This field indicates the number of calls that should be allowed between
continuity checks on outbound calls. The valid range is 0-100, with 0 indicating that conti-
nuity is not to be performed on outbound calls, and 1 indicating that continuity is to be per-
formed on every outbound call. This field is only applicable to outgoing and 2-way trunk
groups and is only available for AP systems with software release 4.2 or greater. The
default value is 0. Selecting NONE in the Continuity Rate combo box is the equivalent of
entering 0. Selecting EVERY is the same as entering 1.
• Decrement Hop Count - This field indicates whether the Hop Count parameter, if present
in an ISUP message, should be decremented. This action is only useful on incoming trunk
groups and only when the AP is an intermediate point, not the final destination, of a call.
That is, if an incoming call is to be switched through the AP to an outgoing trunk, then the
decrement hop count action is applicable. If this option is checked then the Hop Count
parameter will be decremented. Default setting is unchecked.
• Send Confusion Message - This field indicates how the reception of unknown ISUP mes-
sages is to be handled. If this field is checked, then a Confusion message is returned to the
originator of the unknown message. If this is not checked, then unknown messages are han-
dled as stated in GR-317. Default setting is unchecked.

Version: 01
• Pass Access Transport Parameter - This action is only applicable to incoming trunk
groups and only when the AP is an intermediate point, not the final destination, of a call.
That is, if an incoming call is to be switched through the AP to an outgoing trunk, then the
‘pass access transport parameter’ action is applicable. If this field is checked, then any
Access Transport parameter, received in an incoming message, will be passed along on the
outgoing leg of the call. Default setting is unchecked.
• In Recv Cont. Tone - This field allows the inbound ISUP trunk receive continuity tone to
be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz. The default
receive continuity tone is 1780 Hz.
• In Trans Cont. Tone - This field allows the inbound ISUP trunk transmit continuity tone to
be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz. The default
transmit continuity tone is 2010 Hz.
• Out Recv Cont. Tone - This field allows the outbound ISUP trunk receive continuity tone
to be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz. The default
receive continuity tone is 2010 Hz.
• Out Trans Cont. Tone - This field allows the outbound ISUP trunk transmit continuity
tone to be viewed and adjusted. The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz. The
default transmit continuity tone is 1780 Hz.
Trunk Group CIC Pane

The Trunk Group CIC Pane is the second pane of the ISUP Trunk Group Properties Window.
This section of the window lists all of the trunks (T1 channels) currently assigned to the trunk
group. A unique CIC number (unique within the AP system) must identify every trunk assigned
to an ISUP trunk group.
For each trunk, a CIC number must be entered in the CIC column. The valid CIC number range is
0-16383. To make this CIC assignment task easier, APAC has an “auto-populate” function.
After a number is entered in an empty CIC cell, APAC will populate all empty cells with CIC val-
ues incremented by one from the previously entered value. If the CIC selected is currently in use,
APAC will increment the potential CIC value until an unused value, within the valid CIC range, is
found.
APAC also allows the configuration of “virtual” trunk groups. Virtual trunk groups have no asso-
ciated physical trunks, but do have associated CICs. This virtual trunk capability allows the AP to
handle and manipulate call setup messages for the associated CICs, but the audio for these calls
does not have to be switched through the AP.
To enable the virtual trunk capability, complete the following steps:
1. Assign a trunk group with no physical trunks to the service that will be using the virtual
trunks.
2. Assign a second trunk group to the service used in step 1. The service now has Incoming
and Outgoing trunk groups.
3. Ensure both trunk groups have the same values in the Far-end Name and Far-end Point
Code fields.

Version: 01
4. Close the Trunk Group Properties windows for both trunk groups, and then open the
Trunk Group Properties windows.
After the steps above are completed, the Trunk Group CIC Pane in Trunk Group Properties win-
dow will have one row with a blank CIC field. When a value is entered into the CIC field, the
word "Virtual" is displayed in the Trunk column and another row is added to the display with a
blank CIC field. A virtual trunk is "deleted" the same way a normal trunk group member is
deleted, that is, by selecting the virtual trunk beneath the trunk group in the Trunk Groups section
of the Trunk Configuration window and pressing the Delete Trunk Group Member button.
Figure 12-10 Properties Window Showing Virtual Trunks
The CIC entry for virtual trunks also has an “auto-populate” feature. When one presses the Enter
key in a blank CIC field, that CIC field will be populated with the next available value that is
greater than the CIC value in the immediately preceding CIC field. Pressing the return key in the
first CIC row has no effect.
Service Phone Numbers Pane

The Service Phone Numbers pane is the third pane of the ISUP Trunk Group Properties Window.
This pane is only enabled if more than one ISUP-based service is using this trunk group. The pur-
pose of this pane is to allow service administrators to designate the service to which an incoming
call is routed. Services can have up to nine phone numbers assigned to them. If an incoming
call’s destination phone number is listed below a service, then the call will be routed to that ser-
vice. If an incoming call’s destination number cannot be found, then the default service will be
invoked. The default service is designated by not having any phone numbers listed below it. All
services other than the default service must have at least one phone number assigned to them.

Version: 01
To add a phone number below a service listed in the Service Phone Numbers pane, select a ser-
vice and then press the Add Number button. A new number item will be added with the words
“Enter New Number” highlighted. Enter the new 10-digit directory number into the highlighted
space and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The new number will be added to the selected ser-
vice.
To delete a phone number from a service, select the number to delete and press the Delete Num-
ber button. The selected number will be removed from the list.
Used CIC Pane

The Used CIC Pane is the fourth pane of the ISUP Trunk Group Properties Window. This pane is
informational only. It lists all the currently used CIC numbers in the AP system, and the devices
using those CIC numbers. It is presented to aid the service administrator in selecting CIC num-
bers.
12.5.3 Trunk Service Window - Dedicated Announcements
The Dedicated Announcement service can be used to deliver an announcement to many telephone
users simultaneously from a single T1 channel. A single T1 channel is required for each dedi-
cated announcement the switch uses. Each channel designated as a dedicated announcement
source will have a specific announcement assigned to it. The same announcement can be
assigned to more than one channel. All channels in use as dedicated announcement sources are
assigned to the same trunk group. This trunk group is assigned to the dedicated announcement
service for the unit.
When a trunk group is assigned to the Dedicated Announcements service, the Dedicated
Announcements assignment window will be displayed. If a trunk group has already been
assigned to this service, the assignment window can also be displayed by double-clicking the ser-
vice in the Trunk Services section of the Trunk Configuration window, or by highlighting the
Dedicated Announcements service in the Trunk Services section of the Trunk Configuration win-
dow and selecting the Trunk Services Properties button, , on the toolbar.
Figure 12-11 Dedicated Announcements Window
At the top of the Dedicated Announcements window is a Start Type drop-down menu. This menu
is used to select the appropriate start-of-dialing signal used between the AP and the far-end
switch. This field may be set to either Wink or Immediate.

Version: 01
The Dedicated Announcements window also contains a list of the channels in the trunk group
assigned to the Dedicated Announcements service. The additional columns of this list are
described below:
Column Description
Announcement The announcement associated with this channel. A dedicated
announcement may be assigned to a channel by clicking the arrow
below the Announcement column in the same row as the channel it
is to be assigned to and choosing the announcement from the drop-
down list. Any announcement without parameters that is deployed
to the associated AP will be available in the drop-down list.
Mode The repeat mode of the announcement. Options include:

• Continuous – The announcement is played in a continuous
loop that contains a short on hook period each time the
announcement completes. The switch uses the off hook just
before the announcement begins playing as the time to con-
nect new users to the announcement source. This ensures that
users hear the full announcement and are not cut in sometime
during the announcement play.
• On Demand – When the channel goes off hook, the AP plays
the announcement the number of times specified in the Play
Count field.
The Mode can be changed by clicking the arrow below the Mode
column in the same row as the associated channel, and then choos-
ing an option from the drop-down list.
Play Count The number of times the dedicated announcement will be played.
This parameter is only used if the Mode for the same dedicated
announcement channel is set to On Demand. If the Play Count is
set to 0, the announcement will be repeated continuously until the
line goes on hook.
There are two parameters, Dedicated Announcement Repeat Interval and Dedicated Announce-
ment Off Hook Delay, associated with the playback of dedicated announcements on the AP.
These parameters can be set through the Trunk Timing tab of the AP Options dialog (see Section
12.6).
12.5.4 Service Descriptions
The trunk services listed below, with the exception of the General Announcements service, will
be displayed in the Trunk Services list only if one or more announcements of that service have
been deployed to the associated AP.

Version: 01
AIN (Advanced Intelligent Network)

The AIN service is used to provide announcements for AIN type services. Many AIN services
require service-specific announcements that provide information and instructions to the AIN ser-
vice user. The trunk group associated with this trunk service will be used to access and play the
announcements to the AIN service user. This service is associated with an incoming trunk group.
ANA (Automatic Number Announcement)

The ANA trunk service is used to provide the Automatic Number Announcement capability. The
Automatic Number Announcement feature will play an announcement that reports the directory
number of the station that originated the call. This is an incoming trunk group service. A default
announcement and the number of repetitions before trunk-release are specified for this service.
CNA (Change Number Announcement)

The CNA trunk service is used to provide the Change Number Announcement capability. The
Change Number Announcement feature plays an announcement that indicates a directory number
has been disconnected or changed. Through this service, several properties of the CNA feature
can be configured. This is an incoming trunk group service. This service will attempt to look up
the called party's number in a local database and play either an announcement with the new num-
ber information or a default announcement.
DCO Std/CLASS Announcements

The DCO Std/CLASS Announcements trunk service is used to access and play Siemens DCO
standard and CLASS types of announcements. The ANA and CNA trunk services described
above provide the Automatic Number Announcement and Change Number Announcement capa-
bilities for DCO announcements. This announcement service will only be displayed in the list of
services if one or more DCO announcements have been deployed to the associated AP. One
incoming trunk group can be associated with this announcement service, and cannot be shared
with any other service.
Dedicated Announcements
The Dedicated Announcements trunk service is used to designate a trunk group as a Dedicated
Announcement trunk group and assign announcements to the channels in that trunk group. All
channels in a Dedicated Announcement trunk group must be assigned an announcement. This
feature is only available on switches that support Dedicated Announcements and will be dis-
played in the Trunk Services list only if one or more Standard/CLASS or DCO announcements
have been deployed to the associated AP.
EWSD Std/CLASS/AIN Announcements

The EWSD announcement trunk services are used to provide trunk access to Siemens EWSD
announcements in the AP. The EWSD Std/CLASS/AIN Announcements service will access and
play the EWSD standard, CLASS, or AIN types of announcements. This announcement service
will only be displayed in the list of services if one or more EWSD announcements have been
deployed to the associated AP. One incoming trunk group can be associated with this announce-
ment service, and cannot be shared with any other service.

Version: 01
EWSD Automatic Number Announcement

The EWSD Automatic Number Announcement service will access and play the EWSD Auto-
matic Number Announcement, which reports the directory number of the station that originated
the call. One incoming trunk group can be associated with this announcement service, and cannot
be shared with any other service. A default announcement and the number of repetitions before
trunk-release are specified for this service. This announcement service will only be displayed in
the list of services if one or more EWSD announcements have been deployed to the associated
AP.
EWSD Change Number Announcement

The EWSD Change Number Announcement service will access and play the EWSD Change
Number Announcement, which states a directory number has been disconnected or changed. The
service will attempt to look up the called party’s number in a local database and play either an
announcement with the new number information, or a default announcement. One incoming
trunk group can be associated with this announcement service, and cannot be shared with any
other service. This announcement service will only be displayed in the list of services if one or
more EWSD announcements have been deployed to the associated AP.
General Announcements
The General Announcement trunk services provide the ability to access announcement capabili-
ties that are not associated with the other, specific trunk services. These are generic announce-
ment services that can be used for any user defined announcement capability. The general
announcement may be used for either incoming or outgoing calls. The outgoing call mode would
be used by a service, such as WakeUp, which would place an outgoing call from the AP and
would play an announcement once the called party answered.
ISUP Trunk Services

ISUP trunk services are a set of SLP’s (Service Logic Programs) that manipulate AP trunks or
switch trunks to perform the desired effect of the respective SLP. They are different from the ser-
vices previously described in that they do not use trunks strictly for announcements. A SLP such
as Toll Restriction will either set up switch trunks for a call (using ISUP over SS7) or block the
call, based on information concerning the calling party – information stored in the AP database.
Standard/CLASS
The Standard/CLASS trunk service is used to provide trunk access to the Standard and CLASS
announcements in the AP. The Standard and CLASS announcements are industry-defined
announcements that are used for CLASS features and to provide other call-progress information
(e.g. "all circuits busy" announcement) to subscribers. The trunk group associated with this trunk
service will be used to access and play the Standard and CLASS announcements. This is an
incoming trunk group service.

Version: 01
12.6 Set AP Options for Trunk Timing
services. The following options can be set for Trunk Timing from the Tools|AP Options window:
Figure 12-12 AP Options - Trunk Timing
Min Wink The minimum amount of time the switch must stay off hook for a WINK to be rec-
ognized by the AP. Default is 150 ms.
Max Wink The maximum amount of time the switch must stay off hook for a WINK to be rec-
ognized by the AP. Default is 300 ms.
Min Hook The amount of time the switch must stay off hook for an OFF-HOOK to be recog-
nized by the AP. Default is 310 ms.
Wink The amount of time the AP will remain off the hook for a WINK signal to be sent
to the switch. Default is 200 ms.
MF Long Inter-Digit The amount of time the AP will wait to receive the first digit of the MF signalling
stream. Default is 1640 ms.
MF Short Inter-Digit The amount of time the AP will wait between digits in the MF signalling stream.
Default is 320 ms.

Version: 01
Build Announcement The amount of time the AP will wait after the end of signalling before sending an
OFF-HOOK. Default is 320 ms.
Off Hook Out The amount of time the AP will wait for the switch to recognize the OFF-HOOK
signal before voicing the announcement. Default is 30 ms.
Repeat The amount of time the AP will signal the ON-HOOK between announcement rep-
etitions. Default is 1000 ms.
Ded. Annc. Repeat The amount of time the AP will signal ON-HOOK at the end of each dedicated
Interval announcement before starting the announcement again. Default is 500 ms.
Ded. Annc. Off Hook The amount of time the AP will wait after going OFF-HOOK before starting to
Delay play a dedicated announcement. Default is 30 ms.
DTMF Long Inter- The amount of time the AP will wait to receive the first digit of the DTMF signal-
Digit ing stream. Default is 15000 ms.
DTMF Short Inter- The amount of time the AP will wait between dialed DTMF digits. Default is 4000
Digit ms.
12.7 SIP Configuration
The SIP Configuration interface is used to configure PSTN to SIP and SIP to PSTN mappings for
the SIP & RTP (Session Initiation Protocol & Real Time Protocol) feature. The SIP & RTP fea-
ture allows ISUP services to use SIP-based trunks. This allows the AP to connect to both Voice
Over IP (VoIP)-based phones and VoIP-based switches using SIP/RTP.
The SIP Configuration interface (see Figure 12-13 below) is available for AP systems running
software release 5.0 or greater and is accessed through the Tools|SIP Configuration menu com-
mand in APAC.

Version: 01
Figure 12-13 SIP Configuration Window
The SIP Configuration window is partitioned into two lists: Phone Number to SIP Mappings (see
Section 12.7.1), and SIP to Phone Number Mappings (see Section 12.7.2). These lists and the
functions available in these lists are described below:
12.7.1 Phone Number to SIP Mappings
Phone Number to SIP Mappings are used when the AP originates an SIP-based call to a given
phone number. When the SIP Configuration window is opened, the current Phone Number to SIP
mapping entries will be displayed in this list.
Descriptions of the columns in the Phone Number to SIP Mappings list are given below:
Phone Number The phone number (called party) that will be looked up when the AP places an
outgoing call.
TG The SIP-based trunk group used to route calls for this phone number.
SIP Address The SIP address to which calls will be placed.
IP #1 The IP address to which the SIP INVITE will be sent. This is the primary end-
point IP address.
Port #1 The port number to which the SIP INVITE will be sent. This is the primary
endpoint port.
IP #2 An alternate IP address to which the SIP INVITE can be sent. This is the sec-
ondary endpoint IP address.

Version: 01
Port #2 The port of the alternate IP address.
SIP-T Use SIP-T for this phone number? Yes or No.
Echo Canc. Use echo cancellation for this phone number? Yes or No.
Echo Suppr. Use echo suppression for this phone number? Yes or No.
To add an entry to the Phone Number to SIP Mappings list, press the Add button located below
the list. The Add New DN to SIP Entry window will be displayed (see Figure 12-14).
Figure 12-14 Add New Phone Number to SIP Entry
The Add New DN to SIP Entry window contains the following fields:
Phone Number Enter the 6-digit NPA-NXX or 10-digit phone number to map to the entered
SIP address.
SIP Address Enter the Name portion of the SIP address in the first field, and the Domain
portion of the SIP address in the second field.
Note: If a 6-digit NPA-NXX is entered in the Phone Number field, the Name
portion of the SIP address will be replaced, when the new entry is saved, by the
following: 0000000000. This allows SIP calls to be handled for all of the
phone numbers in the NPA-NXX.
Trunk Group Select the SIP-based trunk group used to route calls for this phone number.
The signaling type of a trunk group can be set to SIP from within the Trunk
Group Properties window (see Section 12.5.2 - "Trunk Service Window -
ISUP SLP" for more information).
Use SIP-T? Use SIP-T for this phone number? Yes or No.
Use Echo Use echo cancellation for this phone number? Yes or No.
Cancellation?

Version: 01
Use Echo Use echo suppression for this phone number? Yes or No.
Suppression?
Primary IP Address: The IP address to which the SIP INVITE will be sent. This will
Endpoint typically be the IP of a receiving SIP phone or a SIP proxy.
Port: The port number to which the SIP INVITE will be sent. This will value
will typically be 5060.
Secondary Check this box if two SIP endpoints are to be used for this phone number. The
Endpoint SIP traffic will be load-shared between the Primary and Secondary Endpoint IP
addresses. This is typically used when the traffic is to be routed to an AP sys-
tem. This allows the traffic to be shared between the two AP units. The IP
Address and Port fields below this checkbox will be disabled if this box is
unchecked.
IP Address: The alternate IP address to which the SIP INVITE will be sent.
This will typically be the IP of a receiving SIP phone or a SIP proxy.
Port: The port number to which the SIP INVITE will be sent. This will value
will typically be 5060.
Populate the fields listed above and press the OK button to add the new entry, or press the Cancel
button to exit without adding a new entry.
A current list entry can be edited by either double-clicking the entry, or selecting the entry and
pressing the Edit button located below the list. This will invoke the Edit DN to SIP Entry window
(see Figure 12-15), which will be populated with the current settings of the selected entry. All
fields in the Edit DN to SIP Entry window function as they do when adding a new entry, except
for the Phone Number field, which will be disabled.
Figure 12-15 Edit Phone Number to SIP Entry

Version: 01
To delete entries from the Phone Number to SIP Mappings list, select the entry and press the
Delete button located below the list. A delete confirmation message similar to Figure 12-16 will
be displayed. Select Yes in the confirmation message to complete the deletion, or select No to
cancel the deletion.
Figure 12-16 Delete Phone Number to SIP Entry
12.7.2 SIP to Phone Number Mappings
SIP to Phone Number Mappings are used by the AP to determine how to handle incoming SIP
calls. When the SIP Configuration window is opened, the current SIP to Phone Number mapping
entries will be displayed in this list.
Descriptions of the columns in the SIP to Phone Number Mappings list are given below:
SIP Address The SIP address (the FROM field in the INVITE message) that is looked up
when an AP receives an incoming SIP call.
Phone Number The phone number that this SIP address will be routed to when the AP receives
a call for this SIP address.
TG The SIP-based trunk group to which this caller is assigned.
To add an entry to the SIP to Phone Numbers Mappings list, press the Add button located below
the list. The Add New SIP to DN Entry window will be displayed (see Figure 12-17).
Figure 12-17 Add New SIP to DN Entry
The Add New SIP to DN Entry window contains the following fields:

Version: 01
SIP Address Enter the Name portion of the SIP address in the first field, and the Domain
portion of the SIP address in the second field.
Note: If a 6-digit NPA-NXX is entered in the Phone Number field, the Name
portion of the SIP address will be replaced, when the new entry is saved, by a
string in the following format: NPANXXFFFF. This allows SIP calls to be han-
dled for all of the phone numbers in the NPA-NXX.
Phone Number Enter the 6-digit NPA-NXX or 10-digit phone number to which the entered
SIP address will be routed when the AP receives a call for this SIP address.
Trunk Group Select the SIP-based trunk group to which this caller is assigned.
The signaling type of a trunk group can be set to SIP from within the Trunk
Group Properties window (see Section 12.5.2 - "Trunk Service Window -
ISUP SLP" for more information).
Populate the fields listed above and press the OK button to add the new entry, or press the Cancel
button to exit without adding a new entry.
A current list entry can be edited by either double-clicking the entry, or selecting the entry and
pressing the Edit button located below the list. This will invoke the Edit SIP to DN Entry window
(see Figure 12-18), which will be populated with the current settings of the selected entry. All
fields in the Edit SIP to DN Entry window function as they do when adding a new entry, except
for the SIP Address fields, which will be disabled.
Figure 12-18 Edit SIP to DN Entry
To delete entries from the SIP to Phone Number Mappings list, select the entry and press the
Delete button located below the list. A delete confirmation message similar to Figure 12-19 will
be displayed. Select Yes in the confirmation message to complete the deletion, or select No to
cancel the deletion.
Figure 12-19 Delete SIP to DN Entry

Version: 01

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 13 - CNA Service Management
Chapter 13 - CNA Service Management
The Change Number Announcement function is used to provide an announcement when a

changed directory number (i.e., a directory number marked for Change Number Intercept) is
dialed. The announcement informs the originating party that they have dialed a number that has
been changed and may include a new directory number.
13.1 Update Change Number Announcement Data
To update change number announcement data for the selected AP, select the Change Number
Announcement command from the Insert menu. The Change Number Announcement window
will display.
Figure 13-1 Change Number Announcement Window
Enter the following information:

Version: 01
Changed Number The phone number that is being changed to a new number. It can be 7 or 10
digit number, depending on the trunk signaling provisioned in the switch.
New Number The 10-digit phone number to which the Changed Number is being changed.
Start Date The date (MM/DD/YY format) that the change number announcement will
start. This will default to the current day's date.
End Date The date (MM/DD/YY format) that the change number announcement will end.
If no change number announcement data records exist, the End Date will
default to 60 days from the Start Date. Subsequent records will use the same
date span (60 days between Start Date and End Date) unless the End Date is
modified to span a different number of days (i.e., 90 days). Additional records
will then use the new date span (i.e., 90 days) by default.
Announcement Number The number of the announcement to be played when a customer dials the
changed number. Announcement 150 is the announcement provided for this
purpose. Custom announcements can be provided on a per-number basis.
The Start Date and End Date fields indicate the time period that the change number announcement
should be in affect for the specific entry. These dates are used by APAC to determine when to
transfer entries to the AP and when to delete entries from the AP. APAC will not transfer an entry
to the AP until its start date is reached. When the end date is reached, APAC will delete the entry
from the AP. These additions and deletions are not performed autonomously, but are performed
by APAC when the data transfer to AP function is invoked. That is, when a Start Date or End
Date is reached, APAC will mark the entry as requiring transfer to the AP, but the entry will not
actually be transferred until the data transfer to AP function is invoked.
To delete entries, select the row by clicking on the gray box at the extreme left end of the row and
then either press <DELETE> or use the Edit|Delete menu command. You may also select multi-
ple rows to delete more than one row at a time.
Save the changes to commit the Change Number Announcement entry to the APAC database. You
may also close the window without saving any modifications. Any changes must be transferred to
the AP using the Tools|Transfer to AP|Service Data to AP function before they become affective
in the AP.
13.2 Change Number Announcement Peg Count Report
The Change Number Announcement Peg Counts Report function may be used to generate a
report of Change Number Announcement peg counts for the selected AP. Peg counts keep track
of how many times each change number announcement is played.

Version: 01
The Change Number Announcement Peg Counts Report function is invoked by selecting
View|Reports|Change Number Announcement Peg Counts. Initially, the following Change Num-
ber Announcements Report window appears.
Figure 13-2 Change Number Announcements Report Window
From this window you specify what count information to display in the report, and in what order
the entries should be displayed.
The "Collect latest counts from AP" option specifies whether or not APAC should collect the lat-
est peg counts from the AP. If this option is checked, then, when the Show Report button is
selected, APAC will query the AP for the latest peg count for each Change Number Announce-
ment entry and reset that count in the AP to zero. The collected peg count value will be stored in
APAC’s database and will also be added to an accumulation count in APAC’s database. The accu-
mulation count is the sum-total of all count values collected for the specific entry. If the "Collect
latest counts from AP" option is not checked, then, when the Show Report button is selected,
APAC will simply display the report with the data in APAC’s database. This data is from the last
AP peg count collection operation. This checkbox may be disabled if you do not have "Update
AP" access privileges under the "Change Number Announcement Service Administration" access
heading.
The Sort By section indicates how the entries displayed in the report should be ordered. The
entries may either be ordered in ascending order, by Changed Number, or Interval Count value.
report. If you do not wish to display a change number announcement peg count report, select the
Exit button at any time.

Version: 01
Figure 13-3 Change Number Announcement Report
The report shows the following information for each change number announcement entry:
Changed Number The phone number that is being changed to a new number.
New Number The phone number to which the Changed Number is being changed.
Start Date The date that the change number announcement will start.
End Date The date that the change number announcement will end.
Interval Counts Total number of times the change number announcement has been played in the
Peg Counts current time interval. The time interval starts from the date in the Last Reset field
to the current date (if the counts were collected from the AP before displaying this
report). This information is retrieved from the AP when the Collect Counts check-
box is checked.
Interval Counts The date that the peg count was reset last. This is basically the "start date" for the
Last Reset value in the Interval Counts Peg Counts field.
Total Count Total accumulated number of times the change number announcement has been
played for this entry.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 14 - Service Logic Management
Chapter 14 - Service Logic Management
14.1 Service Logic Management Screen
Select View|Service Logic Management to view information for all SLPs (Service Logic Pro-
grams) in the APAC database. Initially, the Service Logic management screen will display.
Figure 14-1 Service Logic Management Screen
The service information is partitioned according to the tabs across the top of the screen. Each tab
displays a tree with SLP information organized by the tab selected. The hierarchy of the tree dis-
plays the relationships of the parent items to its child items. For example, if you select the Ser-
vices tab, you will see a tree with all the SLP projects and services as the main or "root" items.
Under each service are child items that show the different resources used by a service, such as
tables, announcements, and logs used. A Part Number is also displayed below the service. Each
SLP is associated with a unique Part Number that identifies it to the SLP vendor.
The APs to which this service has been deployed are also shown. Each tab also has its own tool-
bar and pop-up menu (activated by clicking the right mouse button) that contain the service logic
management commands and actions that can be performed on the items displayed in the tree. The
menu items and toolbar buttons will enable and disable themselves based on what is selected in
the tree and whether the particular function can be performed on that item. See Figure 14-2 for a
listing of the toolbar buttons, and their functions.

Version: 01
14.1.1 Tab Descriptions
Following is a brief description of the information displayed in each tab:
Services View and manage the contents of the entire service, or project. SLPs are grouped by
Project. Each project may contain one or more related services. Services may include
documents, tables, announcements, child SLPs, and logs. By clicking on the plus sign to
the left of these services, you can view the contents of the project. Through the Services
tab, you are able to view a description or more information about an item, shutdown,
unlock, or delete an item. You can also transfer, re-deploy, or import services to or from
the selected AP.
The Services tab is discussed in further detail in Section 14.3 of this manual.
Tables View and manage the tables. Tables are the resource where data used by one or more
SLPs are stored. You are able to view a description, or more information about an item.
Through this tab, you are also able to modify table data, query a single entry, or delete
entries. You can also transfer or import services to or from the selected AP.
The Tables tab is discussed in further detail in Section 14.4 of this manual.
Announcements View a description, or more information about the announcements used by services. You
can also transfer or import services to or from the selected AP.
The Announcements tab is discussed in further detail in Section 14.6 of this manual.
Logs View a description, or more information about the various logs. Logs are resources used
by services to record the occurrence of certain events. A service administrator can view
the contents of the log, and appropriate action can be taken if necessary. Through this
tab, you are also able to shutdown, or unlock the log. You can transfer or import a service
from the selected AP.
The Logs tab is discussed in further detail in Section 14.5 of this manual.
Aps View SLP information grouped by the AP systems to which resources have been
deployed. The services, tables, and logs are displayed for each AP. You can also modify
table data, read logs, or delete items shown in the tree, transfer, re-deploy, or import ser-
vices to or from the selected AP.
The Announcements tab is discussed in further detail in Section 14.7 of this manual.
14.2 Service Logic Management Toolbar
Figure 14-2 shows the buttons on the toolbar and their functions:

Version: 01
Button Function
View more information.
View a description.
Shutdown an object.
Unlock an object.
Retrieve the SLPs' current operational status.
View a document or report.
Read a log.
Resize a redundant log.
Change redundant log alarm threshold.
Modify table data.
View the data for a single entry.
Import a service into APAC.
Delete a selected object.
Transfer specified service to the AP.
Retrieve data for the selected table from the AP.
Backup specified table to AP disk.
Figure 14-2 Service Logic Management Toolbar Icons
The same functions may also be found in the various tabs in Service Logic Management.

Version: 01
For further information about specific APAC functions, use the online help for that specific func-
tion. Detailed help is provided on each function and can be displayed by selecting the desired
function and pressing the F1 key.
14.3 Services
Use the Services tab of the Service Logic Management screen to view and manage the contents of
the entire service, or project. To access this tab, simply click on the Services tab at the right side
of the Service Logic Management screen. Initially, the screen will default to display the projects
as parent items. Click the plus (+) sign in front of the projects to expand the tree items, and dis-
play the child items. See Figure 14-3 for an example of this tab.
Figure 14-3 Services Tab of Service Logic Management
The root level of the tree shows the list of projects. A project is a grouping of one or more related
Service Logic Programs (SLPs). For example, it may take multiple SLPs to implement one ser-
vice. In this case the project may indicate the service and will contain the SLPs that make up that
service. Clicking the plus (+) sign next to the individual project names will expand the tree to
reveal more details about the project. The tree will branch out to reveal the SLP(s) contained in
the project. Further expansion will reveal other resources associated with each SLP, such as the
documents, tables, announcements, logs, and/or child SLPs associated with this service. Also, the
tree will display the AP(s) to which the specific SLP is deployed.

Version: 01
14.3.1 Services Details
Following is a brief explanation of the details shown below each AP name to which the service
has been deployed:
Lock Status This shows the status of the service. If the service is unlocked, the service is placed
in an in-service-and-ready-for-execution condition. If the service status reads
Locked, the service is out of service. See the Shutdown and Unlock commands in
Section 14.6.
SLP ID This is the AMA (Automatic Message Accounting) SLP (Service Logic Program)
ID. The SLP ID identifies the SLP/Service when AIN AMA recording is performed.
It is defined when you deploy the AIN service to the AP.
Subsystem Number This number is assigned to each AIN service that is directly invoked by receiving a
SS7 message. For more information about this field, please see Section 8.2.1 -
"Define a Generic GTT" for a description of the Insert|Global Title Transla-
tion|Generic command. It is defined when you deploy the AIN Service to the AP.
Trunk Groups Trunk groups used by the SLP are shown (when appropriate). As is the case above,
this only appears for those SLPs that are allocated Trunk Groups.
14.3.2 Services Tab Command Descriptions
Following is a brief description of the commands available from this tab:
NOTE: For a more detailed description of each command listed below, please refer to Sec-
tion 14.8 - "Service Logic Command Descriptions".
Description Show the selected item's description. It is activated when you select a tree item for
which there is a recorded description. For any selected tree item, if the description
toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, then a description can be viewed for that
item.
To access this command, select the Description button (shown to the left) from the
toolbar menu or select Description from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking
your right mouse button).

Version: 01
More Information View more information about the selected item. It is activated when you select a
tree item with parent items of announcements, tables, logs, or child SLPs. Depend-
ing on the tree item that is selected when the More Information command is per-
formed, the display will switch to the appropriate tab and expand the selected item
in that tab. For example, if you select to view more information about an announce-
ment, the display will switch to the Announcement tab. The announcement that you
selected will be displayed with all of the tree branches expanded to show more
information. For any selected tree item, if the more information toolbar button or
pop-up menu is enabled, then more information can be viewed for that item.
To access this command, select the More Information button (shown to the left)
from the toolbar menu or select More Information from the pop-up menu (activated
by clicking your right mouse button).
Shut-down Shutdown the object. This command allows a service to be taken out of service. It
is activated when you select the name of an AP to which the service has been
deployed. The selected AP is where the service will be shutdown.
To access this command, select the Shut-down button (shown to the left) from the
toolbar menu or select Shut-down from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your
right mouse button).
Unlock Unlock the object. This command allows a service to be placed in an in-service-
and-ready-for-writing condition. It is activated when you select the name of an AP
to which the service has been deployed. The selected AP is where the service will
be unlocked.
To access this command, select the Unlock button (shown to the left) from the tool-
bar menu or select Unlock from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right
mouse button).
Delete Delete the selected object. This command deletes a selected service from an AP, or
the APAC database.
To delete a service from the AP, select the AP under the concerned service from
which the service is to be deleted. In order to delete a service on an AP, the service
must be shutdown. The delete command will not become active for services that are
unlocked.
To delete a service from the APAC database, select a service under a project. The
delete command will only be activated if the service is not deployed to any AP.
To access this command, select the Delete button (shown to the left) from the tool-
bar menu or select Delete from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right
mouse button).
Transfer SLP Transfer specified services to the AP. This command is always active.
To access this command, select the Transfer SLP button (shown to the left) from the
toolbar menu or select Deploy Service from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking

Version: 01
Import SLP Import a Service Logic Program into APAC. This toolbar button is always active.
Please refer to Section 14.8.11 for more detailed information about this command.
To access this command, select the Import SLP button (shown to the left) from the
toolbar menu or select Import New Service from the pop-up menu (activated by
clicking your right mouse button).
View View a document or report. It is activated when you select the child items under the
parent item labeled "Documents". Documents associated with a service will pro-
vide additional, detailed information about the service (e.g., service operation, or
installation instructions).
To access this command, select the View button (shown to the left) from the toolbar
menu or select View from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right mouse
button).
Modify Table Data Modify data in the selected table. The data for a table is AP specific (i.e., each AP
will have different data in a table); therefore, the table must be deployed to an AP
before this command is activated allowing you to modify the data.
To enable this menu item, either:
Select an AP from the tree under the table name whose data you wish to modify.
Select the table name in the tree and the main toolbar AP selection window, select
the AP whose table data should be modified.
This should allow you to modify the data for that specific table in that specific AP.
To access this command, select the Modify Table Data button (shown to the left)
from the toolbar menu or select Modify Table Data from the pop-up menu (activated
Re-deploy Service Re-deploy a service to the AP. This command is only available from the pop-up
menu, and is activated when you select a service that is currently deployed to any
AP.
To access this command, select Re-deploy Service from the pop-up menu (activated
14.4 Tables
Tables store data used by one or more services. Some SLPs have associated Add-ons that are
used to manage the table data (for more information about Add-ons, see Section 14.10). If an
Add-on is provided, the ability to modify table data using the Tables tab may be disabled. If an
Add-on is not provided, use the Tables tab of the Service Logic Management screen to view, and
manage the data tables associated with SLPs. To access this tab, simply click on the Tables tab at
the top of the Service Logic Management screen. Initially, the screen will default to display the
tables as parent items. Click on the plus (+) sign in front of the tables to expand the tree items,
and display the child items.

Version: 01
Figure 14-4 Tables Tab of Service Logic Management
The root level of the tree shows the table. The tree will expand to reveal the service(s) contained
in the table, and the APs to which the service(s), and thus the tables, are deployed. Each AP that
contains the table will be shown. Clicking on the plus (+) sign next to the individual AP names
will expand the tree to reveal more details about the table.
14.4.1 Table Details
that contains the table has been deployed:
Licensed Number of This entry is present when the table is limited to the specified maximum
Entries: size by a license arrangement. The table cannot be sized to contain more
entries than the license specifies.
Max Table Entries This is the current maximum number of entries the table can contain. Use
the Resize Table function to change this value.
Number of Used Entries This is the number of entries currently contained in the table.
Changes Pending Transfer This is the number of changed table entries and list entries waiting to be
transferred to the AP. Use the Modify Table Data command to modify the
table data.
Max <TableListName> List This is the maximum number of list entries that the specified table list can
Entries contain. Use the Resize Table function to change this value.

Version: 01
14.4.2 Tables Commands
Description Show the selected item's description. It is activated when you select a tree item
for which there is a recorded description. For any selected tree item, if the
description toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, then a description can be
viewed for that item.
To access this command, select the Description button (shown to the left) from
the toolbar menu or select Description from the pop-up menu (activated by click-
ing your right mouse button).
tree item with parent items of announcements, tables, logs, or child SLPs.
Depending on the tree item that is selected when the More Information command
is performed, the display will switch to the appropriate tab and expand the
selected item in that tab. For example, if you select to view more information
about an announcement, the display will switch to the Announcement tab. The
announcement that you selected will be displayed with all of the tree branches
expanded to show more information. For any selected tree item, if the more
information toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, then more information can
be viewed for that item.
from the toolbar menu or select More Information from the pop-up menu (acti-
vated by clicking your right mouse button).
Modify Table Data Modify data in the selected table. The data for a table is AP specific (i.e., each
AP will have different data in a table); therefore, the table must be deployed to an
AP before this command is activated allowing you to modify the data.
Select the table name in the tree and the main toolbar AP selection window, select
the AP whose table data should be modified.
This should allow you to modify the data for that specific table in that specific
AP.
from the toolbar menu or select Modify Table Data from the pop-up menu (acti-

Version: 01
Query Single Entry View the data for a single entry in the selected table. The data for a table is AP
specific (i.e., each AP will have different data in a table); therefore, the table must
be deployed to an AP before this command is activated. The menu item is acti-
vated when the user selects the tree item that is displaying the "AP Name". This
tree item can be found by expanding the branches of the tree. After selecting this
command, you will be asked for the key value of the entry you wish to view.
To access this command, select the Query Single Entry button (shown to the left)
from the toolbar menu or select Query Single Entry from the pop-up menu (acti-
Resize Table Change the maximum number of entries in a table. This menu item is only avail-
able from the pop-up menu. It is activated when the user selects the tree item that
is displaying the "Max Table Entries" or "Max <listname> List Entries". These
items can be found under the "AP Name" branch.
To access this command, select Resize Table from the pop-up menu (activated by
Backup to AP Disk Performs an immediate backup to the selected table's contents to the AP's
disk. The backup data is used in the event of an AP system failure, allow-
ing the table to be restored from the disk image.
To access this command, select the Backup button (shown to the left) from the
toolbar menu, or select Backup to AP Disk from the pop-up menu (activated by
Delete Delete the selected object. This command deletes a selected table from an AP, or
the APAC database.
To delete a table from the AP, select the AP under the table name to be deleted.
You cannot delete a table if it is still used by services that are deployed to an AP.
In this case, you must delete those services before you can delete the table.
To delete a table from the APAC database, select a table name. In order to delete
a table from APAC, it cannot be deployed to any AP, and all of the services that
use the table must be deleted from the APAC database first.
To access this command, select the Delete button (shown to the left) from the
toolbar menu or select Delete from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your
Transfer Data to AP Transfer specified SLP data to the AP. This menu item is always active. This
command provides a mechanism to transfer the updated data table stored in the
APAC database to the selected AP.
To access this command, select the Transfer Data to AP button (shown to the left)
from the toolbar menu or select Transfer Table Data to AP from the pop-up menu
(activated by clicking your right mouse button).

Version: 01
Retrieve Data from AP Retrieve data for the selected table from the AP. This command provides a mech-
anism to collect data from SLP tables on the AP and store the data in the APAC
database. The table must be deployed to an AP before this command is acti-
vated. For any selected tree item, if the retrieve data toolbar button or pop-up
menu is enabled, then the data may be retrieved from the AP.
To access this command, select the Retrieve Data from AP button (shown to the
left) from the toolbar menu or select Transfer Table Data from AP from the pop-
up menu (activated by clicking your right mouse button).
Import Service Logic Import a service into APAC. This menu item is always active.
Program To access this command, select the Import SLP button (shown to the left) from
the toolbar menu or select Import New Service from the pop-up menu (activated
14.5 Logs
Use the Logs tab of the Service Logic Management to view a description, or more information
about various logs. Logs are resources used by services to record the occurrence of certain
events. A service administrator can view the contents of a log, and appropriate action can be
taken if necessary. To access this tab, simply click the Logs tab at the top of the Service Logic
Management screen. Click on the plus (+) sign in front of the logs to expand the tree items, and
display the child items.
Figure 14-5 Logs Tab of Service Logic Management
The root level of the tree shows the log(s). The tree will branch out to reveal the log type (“Stan-
dard” or “Redundant”), service(s) that use the log(s), and the APs to which the service(s), and thus
the logs, are deployed. Each AP that contains the log will be shown. Clicking on the plus (+) sign

Version: 01
next to the individual AP names will expand the tree to reveal more details about the log, as
shown in the example above. The options contained in the details are set when you transfer the
service that contains the log to the AP. For more information about this, see the Transfer SLP
command in Section 14.6
14.5.1 Log Details
that contains the log has been deployed:
Max Log Entries This is the maximum number of unread log entries that the log can contain. When the
number of unread entries in the log reaches this limit, the action specified by the "Log
Full Action" will be triggered. Log entries can be read by using the Read command.
Log Full Action This property specifies what the log should do when it becomes "full". That is, when
the number of unread entries reaches the limit specified in the "Max Log Entries"
property. In the example above, the Log Full Action is Stop Logging. This means that
once the maximum number of unread log entries has been reached, no more informa-
tion will be written to the log.
The other option for this command is Wrap to beginning and continue. This means
that the information will continue to be written to the log, even after the maximum
number of log unread entries has been reached. The existing log entries will be over-
written, beginning with the oldest entries, until the log is read.
Alarm Threshold The Alarm Threshold property is displayed for Redundant logs. It shows the level, in
percentage of capacity, at which the AP will generate an alarm.
Status This shows the status of the log. If the log is unlocked as in the example above, the
log is placed in an in-service-and-ready-for-writing condition. If the log status reads
Locked, the log is taken out of service, and no information may be written to it. The
service administrator may change the status using the Shut-down or Unlock com-
mands.
14.5.2 Logs Tab Commands

Version: 01
item.
toolbar menu or select Description from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the
ing on the tree item that is selected when the More Information command is per-
by clicking the right mouse button).
Read Log Read the log's contents from the AP. A service administrator can view the contents
of the log, and appropriate action can be taken if necessary. This command is only
activated if the SLP that includes the log has been transferred to the AP. This com-
mand is activated when you select an AP under a log branch. Selecting the com-
mand then reads the selected log from the selected AP.
To access this command, select the Read Log button (shown to the left) from the
toolbar menu or select Read Log from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the
Unlock Unlock the object. This command allows a log to be placed in an in-service-and-
ready-for-writing condition. It is activated when you select the name of an AP to
which the log has been deployed. The selected AP is where the log will be
unlocked.
bar menu or select Unlock from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the right
mouse button).

Version: 01
Shut-down Shutdown the object. This command allows a log to be taken out of service. That
is, it can not be written to by its associated services. It is activated when you select
the name of an AP to which the log has been deployed. The selected AP is where
the log will be shutdown.
toolbar menu or select Shut-down from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the
Resize Log Increase the size of the selected log. To access this command, select an AP name,
or the Max Log Entries property under an AP name, and then select the Resize Log
button (shown to the left) from the toolbar menu, or select Resize Log from the pop-
up menu (activated by clicking the right mouse button).
Change Alarm Modify the alarm log threshold. This command allows administrators to change the
Threshold alarm threshold of a redundant log after it has been deployed.
To access this command, select an AP name, or the Alarm Threshold property
under an AP name, and then select the Change Alarm Threshold button (shown to
the left) from the toolbar menu, or select Change Alarm Threshold from the pop-up
menu (activated by clicking the right mouse button).
Delete Delete the selected object. This command deletes a selected log from an AP, or the
APAC database.
To delete a log from the AP, select the AP under the log to be deleted. The log must
be in a locked state before the delete command is activated. If you attempt to delete
a log that is still used by services deployed to the AP, an error message is displayed
and the log delete function is terminated. Also, if the log currently contains unread
information, you are given the option of reading that data before performing the
delete command.
To delete a log from the APAC database, select the log to be deleted. If the log is
not used by any service and is not deployed to any AP, the delete command will be
activated.
To access this command, select the Delete button (shown to the left) from the tool-
bar menu or select Delete from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right
mouse button).
Transfer SLP Transfer specified Service Logic Program to the AP. This command is always
active.

Version: 01
14.6 Announcements
Use the Announcements tab of the Service Logic Management screen to view a description or
more information about the announcements used by services. To access this tab, simply click on
the Announcements tab at the right side of the Service Logic Management screen. Initially, the
screen will display to show the Announcements as parent items. Click on the plus (+) sign in
front of the Announcements to expand the tree items, and display the child items. See Figure 14-
6 for an example of this tab.
Figure 14-6 Announcements Tab of Service Logic Management
The root level of the tree shows the announcements. The tree will branch out to reveal the ser-
vice(s). Clicking on the plus (+) sign next to the Services parent item will reveal the specific ser-
vice(s) that use the announcement. To learn more information about the specific service(s),
highlight the service and then select the More Information command from the toolbar on the left
side of the screen, or from the pop-up menu. The display will then switch to the Services tab and
expand the selected item in the tab.
14.6.1 Announcements Tab Commands
Following is a brief description of the commands available from the Announcements tab:

Version: 01
Description Show the selected item's description. For announcements, the description is the text
that the announcement will voice. The command is activated when you select a tree
item for which there is a recorded description. For any selected tree item, if the
description toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, then a description can be
viewed for that item.
toolbar menu or select Description from the pop-up menu (activated by right mouse
button click).
ing what tree item that is selected when the More Information command is per-
Transfer SLP Transfer specified Service Logic Program to the AP. This command is always
active.
14.7 APs
From this tab, you can view SLP information grouped by the AP systems to which services have
been deployed. To access this tab, simply click on the APs tab at the right side of the Service
Logic Management screen. Initially, the screen will default to display the APs as parent items.
Click on the plus (+) sign in front of the APs to expand the tree items, and display the child items.

Version: 01
Figure 14-7 APs Tab of Service Logic Management
The root level of the tree shows the APs. The tree will branch out to reveal the SLP object(s)
deployed to the APs, including the services, logs, or tables. Clicking on the plus (+) sign next
each item will expand the tree to reveal more details about each item, as shown in the example
above. The options contained in these details are set when you transfer the service(s) to the AP.
For more information about this, see the Transfer SLP command.
14.7.1 APs Details
Following is a brief explanation of the details shown below each AP name to which the SLP
objects have been deployed:
Lock Status This shows the status of the service. If the service is unlocked, the service is
placed in an in-service-and-ready-for-writing condition. If the service status
reads Locked, the SLP is taken out of service.
SLP ID This is the AMA (Automatic Message Accounting) SLP (Service Logic Pro-
gram) ID. The SLP ID identifies when AIN AMA recording is performed.
It is defined when you deploy the AIN service to the AP.
Subsystem Number This number is assigned to each AIN service that is directly invoked by
receiving a SS7 message. For more information about this field, please see
the Insert|Global Title Translation|Generic command in Chapter 8 - "Glo-
bal Title Translation". This field is defined when you deploy the AIN Ser-
vice to the AP.

Version: 01
Trunk Groups Trunk groups used by the SLP are shown (when appropriate). As is the case
above, this only appears for those SLPs that are allocated Trunk Groups.
Max Table Entries This is the maximum number of entries the table can contain. Use the resize
table function to change this value.
Number of Used Entries This is the number of entries currently contained in the table.
Licensed Number of This entry is present when the table is limited to the specified maximum size
Entries by a license arrangement. The table cannot be sized to contain more entries
than the license specifies.
Changing Pending Trans- This is the number of changed table entries and list entries waiting to be
fer transferred to the AP. Use the Modify Table Data command to modify the
table data.
Max <TableListName> This is the maximum number of list entries that a table can contain. Use the
List Entries Resize Table function to change this value.
Max Log Entries This is the maximum number of unread log entries that the log can contain.
When the number of unread entries in the log reaches this limit, the action
specified by the "Log Full Action" will be triggered. Log entries can be read
by using the Read command.
Log Full Action This property specifies what the log should do when it becomes "full". That
is, when the number of unread entries reaches the limit specified in the
"Max Log Entries" property. In the example above, the Log Full Action is
Stop Logging. This means that once the maximum number of unread log
entries has been reached, no more information will be written to the log.
The other option for this command is Wrap. This means that the informa-
tion will continue to be written to the log, even after the maximum number
of log unread entries has been reached. The existing log entries will be
overwritten, beginning with the oldest entries, until the log is read.
Status This shows the status of the log. If the log is unlocked as in the example
above, the log is placed in an in-service-and-ready-for-writing condition. If
the log status reads Locked, the log is taken out of service, and no informa-
tion may be written to it. The service administrator may change the status
using the Shut-down or Unlock commands.

Version: 01
14.7.2 APs Tab Commands
item.
toolbar menu or select Description from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your
More Information View more information about the selected item. It is activated when you select a tree
item with parent items of announcements, tables, logs, or child SLPs. Depending on
the tree item that is selected when the More Information command is performed, the
display will switch to the appropriate tab and expand the selected item in that tab.
For example, if you select to view more information about an announcement, the dis-
play will switch to the Announcements tab. The announcement that you selected will
be displayed with all of the tree branches expanded to show more information. For
any selected tree item, if the more information toolbar button or pop-up menu is
enabled, then more information can be viewed for that item.
To access this command, select the More Information button (shown to the left) from
the toolbar menu or select More Information from the pop-up menu (activated by
View View a document or report. It is activated when you select the child items under the
parent item labeled "Documents". Documents associated with a service will provide
additional, detailed information about the service (e.g., service operation, or installa-
tion instructions). For any selected tree item, if the view toolbar button or pop-up
menu is enabled, then you can view the document or report.
To access this command, select the View button (shown to the left) from the toolbar
menu or select View from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right mouse
button).

Version: 01
Unlock Unlock the object. This command allows a service to be placed in an in-service-and-
ready-for-execution condition. It is activated when you select the name of an AP to
which the service has been deployed. The selected AP is where the service will be
unlocked. For any selected tree item, if the unlock toolbar button or pop-up menu is
enabled, then the item can be unlocked.
bar menu or select Unlock from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right
mouse button).
Shut-down Shutdown the object. This command allows a service to be taken out of service. It is
activated when you select the name of an AP to which the service has been deployed.
The selected AP is where the service will be shutdown. For any selected tree item, if
the shutdown toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, then the item can be shut-
down.
toolbar menu or select Shut-down from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your
Lock Locks the selected object by method of a forced shutdown.
WARNING! The Lock command should be used with extreme caution, and
only when directed by vendor support personnel or written operation docu-
mentation.
To access this command, select Lock from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking
the right mouse button).
Get AP SLP Status Retrieve the current operational status of all SLPs from the specified AP(s).
To access this command, select the Get AP SLP Status button (shown to the left)
from the toolbar menu or select Get AP SLP Status from the pop-up menu (activated
by clicking the right mouse button).
Modify Table Data Modify data in the selected table. The data for a table is AP specific (i.e., each AP
will have different data in a table); therefore, the table must be deployed to an AP
before this command is activated allowing you to modify the data.
Select the table name in the tree and the main toolbar AP selection window, select the
AP whose table data should be modified.
This should allow you to modify the data for that specific table in that specific AP.
from the toolbar menu or select Modify Table Data from the pop-up menu (activated

Version: 01
Read Log Read the log's contents from the AP. A service administrator can view the contents
of the log, and appropriate action can be taken if necessary. This command is only
activated if the SLP that includes the log has been transferred to the AP. This com-
mand is activated when you select an AP under a log branch. Selecting the command
then reads the selected log from the selected AP.
To access this command, select the Read Log button (shown to the left) from the tool-
bar menu or select Read Log from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right
mouse button).
Delete Delete the selected object. This command deletes a selected table, service, or log
from the AP.
To delete a service from the AP, select the AP under the concerned service from
which the service is to be deleted. In order to delete a service on an AP, the service
must be shutdown. The Delete command will not become active for services that are
unlocked.
To delete a log from an AP, select the AP under the log to be deleted. The log must
be in a locked state before the delete command is activated. If you attempt to delete a
log that is still used by services deployed to the AP, an error message is displayed and
the log delete function is terminated. Also, if the log currently contains unread infor-
mation, you are given the option of reading that data before performing the delete
command.
To delete a table from the AP, select the AP under the table name to be deleted. You
cannot delete a table if it is still used by services that are deployed to an AP. In this
case, you must delete those services before you can delete the table.
To access this command, select the Delete button (shown to the left) from the toolbar
menu or select Delete from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right mouse
button).
Transfer SLP Transfer specified service to the AP. This command is always active.
Re-deploy Service Re-deploy a service to the AP. This command is only available from the pop-up
menu, and is activated when you select a service that is currently deployed to any AP.
To access this command, select Re-deploy Service from the pop-up menu (activated

Version: 01
Retrieve Data from Retrieve data for the selected table from the AP. This command provides a mecha-
AP nism to collect data from tables on the AP and store the data in the APAC database.
The table must be deployed to an AP before this command is activated. For any
selected tree item, if the retrieve data toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, the
data may be retrieved from the AP.
To access this command, select the Retrieve Data from AP button (shown to the left)
from the toolbar menu or select Retrieve Data from AP from the pop-up menu (acti-
Import SLP Import a service into APAC. This toolbar button is always active.
toolbar menu or select Import New Service from the pop-up menu (activated by click-
ing your right mouse button).
14.8 Service Logic Command Descriptions
The following section provides additional information about certain commands.
14.8.1 Viewing a Description
Use the Description command to view the selected item's description. This command is available
from all of the tabs in Service Logic Management using the toolbar on the left side of the window,
or using the pop-up menu (activated by clicking your right mouse button). It is activated when
you select a tree item for which there is a recorded description. Items that generally have
recorded descriptions are services, tables, logs, and announcements. For any selected tree item, if
the description toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, then a description can be viewed for
that item. When this command is selected, a window will pop up with a short description of the
item. The description shown for an announcement is the text that will be played by the announce-
ment.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Description
14.8.2 Viewing More Information
Use the More Information command to view more information about the selected item. It is a
way to quickly jump to an item in a different tab in order to view more specific information about
the item. This command is available from all of the tabs in Service Logic Management using the
toolbar on the left side of the screen, or using the pop-up menu. It is activated when you select a

Version: 01
child tree item that has additional information about it contained elsewhere in the Service Man-
agement display. Depending on the tree item that you select, the display will switch to the appro-
priate tab, highlight the item, and automatically expand its branch in the tree.
For any selected tree item, if the more information toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled, then
more information can be viewed for that item.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: More Information
14.8.3 Shutting Down a Log or Service
Use the Shut-down command to shutdown an object, specifically a log or service that has been
deployed to an AP. This command is available from the Services, Logs, and APs tabs in Service
Logic Management using the toolbar on the left side of the window, or using the pop-up menu.
This command allows a service or log to be taken out of service. The logs or services must be
deployed to an AP before this command is activated. It is enabled when you select the name of an
AP to which the service has been deployed. The selected AP, in the displayed tree, is where the
service will be shutdown. For any selected tree item, if the shut-down toolbar button or pop-up
menu is enabled, then the object can be shutdown or locked.
When this command is selected, a connection is established with the AP. The service or log will
be shutdown. Select the plus sign in front of the service or log to display the status of the menu
item. The Status will be shown as Locked.
Shutting down the object makes the service or log unavailable. Use this command if you no
longer wish to offer a service on a particular AP, or are having problems writing information to a
log. To re-activate the object, use the Unlock command.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Shut-down
14.8.4 Locking a Service

WARNING! The Lock command should be used with extreme caution and only when
directed by vendor support personnel or written operation documentation.
The Lock command is enabled when the user selects a SLP that is in an Unlocked state. It is
available from the AP tab in Service Logic Management using the pop-up menu (activated by

Version: 01
The Lock command is similar to the Shut-down command in that it puts the selected SLP in a state
where it cannot be invoked and executed. However, the Shut-down command closes an SLP in a
graceful way, allowing all active sessions to end and, in the meantime, preventing new sessions
from starting. The Lock command, on the other hand, immediately forces any active SLP to ter-
minate even though it may be currently executing its service logic. In almost all situations, you
should use the Shut-down command instead of the Lock command to transition a SLP to an out-
of-service state.
Pop-up menu selection: Lock
14.8.5 Unlocking a Log or Service
Use the Unlock command to unlock an object, specifically a log or service that has been deployed
to an AP. This command allows a service to be placed in an in-service-and-ready-for-execution
condition. It is available from the Services, Logs, and APs tabs in Service Logic Management
using the toolbar on the left side of the window, or using the pop-up menu. The logs or services
must be deployed to an AP before this command is activated. It is activated when you select the
name of an AP to which the service has been deployed. The selected AP is where the service will
be shutdown. For any selected tree item, if the unlock toolbar button or pop-up menu is enabled,
then the object can be unlocked.
When this command is selected, a connection is established with the AP. The service or log will
be unlocked. Select the plus sign in front of the service or log to display the status of the menu
item. The Status will be shown as Unlocked.
Unlocking the object makes a service or log that has been locked or shutdown available again.
Use this command to activate services and logs that have been deployed to an AP. To de-activate
the object, use the Shut-down command.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Unlock
14.8.6 Viewing Documents and Reports
Use the View command to view a document or report. This command is available from the Ser-
vices and APs tabs in Service Logic Management using the toolbar on the left side of the window,
or using the pop-up menu. This menu item is activated when you select a tree item for which
there is a document or report. Documents are available from the Services tab. Documents associ-
ated with a service provide additional detailed information about the service (e.g., service opera-
tion, or installation instructions). Reports are available from the APs tab.

Version: 01
When this command is selected, a window will pop up displaying either the document or report.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: View
14.8.7 Reading Logs
Use the Read Log command to read the log's contents from the AP. This command is available
from the Logs and APs tabs in Service Logic Management using the toolbar on the left side of the
window, or using the pop-up menu. It is only activated if the service that includes the log has
been transferred to the AP. This menu item is activated when you select an AP under a log
branch.
When this command is selected, the Select Log Read Mode dialog box will be displayed.
Figure 14-8 Select Log Read Mode Window
1. Select the log read mode of your choice (Read all unread log entries, or Read log entries
starting at a specified date/time or sequence number), and press the OK button. If you do
not wish to read the log's content now, press the Cancel button.
2. If the Read all unread log entries option is selected, all data that has not been previously
marked as read in the log will be retrieved and displayed. The entries will then be marked
as read in the log and may be overwritten by new log entries.
3. If the Read log entries starting at: option is selected, all data from the specified point will
be retrieved and displayed. However, any entries that are currently marked as unread in
the log will remain marked unread.
4. If the Get Mirror Copy of Log checkbox is checked (the checkbox is only enabled if the
log type is “Redundant”), then the “mirror” copy of the redundant log will be retrieved
from the mate unit.
5. A connection will be made with the AP, the requested log data will be retrieved, and the
log contents will be displayed. A service administrator can view the contents of the log,
and appropriate action can be taken if necessary.
6. Once the log data is displayed, it can be subsequently saved to a file on the APAC PC or
Local Area Network.

Version: 01
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Read Log
14.8.8 Resizing Logs
Use the Resize Log command to increase the size of a log after it has been deployed. This com-
mand is available from the Logs tab in Service Logic Management using the toolbar on the left
side of the window, or using the pop-up menu. It is only activated if the service that includes the
log has been transferred to the AP. This menu item is enabled when you select an AP under a log
branch or when the Resize Log property under an AP name is selected.
When this command is selected, the Set Log Maximum Entries dialog box will be displayed.
Figure 14-9 Set Log Maximum Entries Dialog Box
A new log size may now be set by entering a new maximum number of log entries and pressing
the OK button. The new log size cannot be smaller than the original log size. If you do not wish
to change the size of the log, press the Cancel button.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Resize Log
14.8.9 Changing the Alarm Threshold
Use the Change Alarm Threshold command to change the percentage of capacity of a redundant
log at which the AP will generate an alarm alerting the service administrator that log data should
be read to avoid data loss. The initial alarm threshold is specified when the service is deployed.
This command is available from the Logs tab in Service Logic Management using the toolbar on
the left side of the window, or using the pop-up menu. It is only activated if the service that
includes the log has been transferred to the AP and if the log type is “Redundant.” This menu
item is enabled when you select an AP under a log branch or when the Change Alarm Threshold
property under an AP name is selected.
When this command is selected, the Set Log Alarm Threshold dialog box will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 14-10 Set Log Alarm Threshold Dialog Box
The new redundant log alarm threshold is set by moving the slider to the desired percentage (0%-
100%) and pressing the OK button. Any changes made since the dialog was shown can be can-
celled by pressing the Cancel button.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Change Alarm Threshold
14.8.10 Querying a Single Table Entry
Use the Query Single Entry command to view the data for a single entry in the selected table. The
data for a table is AP specific (i.e., each AP will have different data in a table); therefore, the table
must be deployed to an AP before this command is activated. This command is available from the
Tables and APs tabs in Service Logic Management using the toolbar, and using the pop-up menu.
The menu item is activated when the user selects the tree item that is displaying the "AP Name".
This tree item can be found by expanding the branches of the tree.
When this command is selected, the Query Single Entry window (Figure 14-11) is displayed.
Figure 14-11 Query Single Entry Window

Version: 01
1. Select the AP and Table Name of the table that you wish to query (this information is ini-
tialized based on your selection in the Services window), and enter the key value of the
entry you wish to view in the Search Value field. Then check or uncheck the Retrieve data
from AP option, and select the Start Search button.
2. If the Retrieve data from AP option is not checked, APAC will attempt to find the
requested key in the APAC database when the Start Search button is pressed. If the key
value is found, all of the data in the table associated with this key is displayed. If the key
value is not found, you are informed that the requested entry does not exist.
3. If the Retrieve data from AP option is checked when the Start Search button is pressed,
APAC will establish communication with the specified AP and attempt to retrieve the cur-
rent data associated with the requested key from the AP. Once the data is retrieved from
the AP, the APAC database is updated with the current information and the data is dis-
played to the user. If the key value is not found, you are informed that the requested entry
does not exist.
4. Once the requested data is displayed, you may modify the data for this entry directly from
the data display window. Any changes must be subsequently transferred to the AP using
the Tools|Transfer Service Data to AP function.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Query Single Entry
14.8.11 Importing Service Logic Programs
Use the Import Service Logic command to import a SLP (Service Logic Program) into APAC.
You can also import fragments, announcements, and tables. This command is available from
File|Open menu item or from the tabs in Service Logic Management using the toolbar on the left
side of the window, or using the pop-up menu.
When this menu item is selected, the File Open dialog box will be displayed.
1. The File Open dialog box will default to show service files (*.sbe) in the <APAC-
folder>\SLPs folder (e.g., C:\APAC\SLPs\). This folder is where service files downloaded
from the Internet should be stored. Select the service file (*.sbe) that you wish to open
and select Open. If you do not want to open a file at this time, select Cancel to exit the
File Open dialog box.

Version: 01
NOTE: If you want to import one of your initial SLP service files, they can be
found on the Application Peripheral CD-ROM supplied with your system or
upgrade. On the CD-ROM, the service files can be found in the folder titled
"Service Logic Programs".
To import one of the SLPs from the Application Peripheral CD-ROM, do the fol-
lowing:
• Place the Application Peripheral CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive. If the
APAC Install starts, select Cancel.
• In APAC, in the File Open dialog box, select the pull-down menu next to
the Look in: option to find the Application Peripheral CD-ROM. Then
locate and select the “SLPs” folder.
• After you have done this, select the SLP service file (*.sbe) you wish to
open and select Open. If you do not want to open a file at this time, select
Cancel to exit the File Open dialog box.
2. Next, the Import window will be displayed, as shown in Figure 14-12. Through this win-
dow, select the service or services to be imported into APAC by highlighting the service
and clicking the hand icon. This will move the service from the ‘Source Services’ section
of the window to the ‘Services to Import’ section of the window. To remove the service,
first select it, and then click on the X icon.
Figure 14-12 Importing a Service Logic Program

Version: 01
3. Next, import the service by selecting the Import button. After the transfer is complete,
you will receive a message box that states "Import Successful". To exit the Import win-
dow without importing the file, select the Exit button.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Import SLP
14.8.12 Backing Up Tables to the AP's Disk
Select Backup to AP Disk from the pop-up menu (activated by right mouse button click) in the
Tables tab of the Service Logic Management screen to back up the contents of the selected table
to the AP disk. This command will perform an immediate backup to the selected table's contents
to the AP's disk. The backup data is used in the event of an AP system failure, allowing the table
to be restored from the disk image.
NOTE: The table backups are also done after APAC transmits changes to the table on the
AP, and backups can be scheduled on the AP (Tools|AP Backups|Schedule AP Backup) so
they are performed at regular intervals.
This command is enabled when:

• A table name is selected and that table has been deployed to the AP selected in the main
toolbar AP-selection window.
• An AP name is selected that is subordinate to the desired table.
To schedule automatic backups to the AP, see Section 16.2 - "AP Scheduling".
Pop-up menu selection: Backup to AP Disk
14.8.13 Deleting Services
Use the Delete command to delete a selected object. This command deletes a selected object
(e.g., service) from the APAC database or from the AP. It is available from all of the tabs except
Announcements in Service Logic Management using the toolbar on the left side of the window, or
using the pop-up window. To delete an object from the APAC database, the selected object must
not be currently deployed to any AP. For any selected item, if the delete toolbar button or pop-up
menu is enabled, then the menu item can be deleted.
Toolbar button:

Version: 01
Pop-up menu selection: Delete
14.8.14 Modifying Table Data
Use the Modify Table Data command to modify data in the selected table. This command is
available from the Services, Tables and APs tabs in Service Logic Management using the toolbar
on the left side of the window, or using the pop-up menu. The data for a table is AP specific (i.e.,
each AP will have different data in a table); therefore, the table must be deployed to an AP before
this command is activated allowing you to modify the data.

• Select an AP from the tree under the table name whose data you wish to modify.
• Select the table name in the tree and, in the main toolbar AP selection window, select the AP
whose table data should be modified.
When this command is selected, the Update Table Data window will display. The window is
divided into two sections, Table Data and List Data. The Table Data section of the window dis-
plays the table name and the various fields included in the table displayed in columns. These col-
umn headings will vary depending on how the table is defined. In the AcctCodeGroupInfoTable
shown in Table 15-10, there are four columns: GroupNumber, NumberofCodes, NumberofDigits,
and UsePin. In this case, the Number of Digits field defaults to 4, and the UsePin column defaults
to a check mark. These defaults are set at service/table creation time.
1. To add a new entry (or row), go to the bottom of the current table data and begin entering
data in the first empty row. If there are no empty rows, then the number of entries cur-
rently contained in the table has reached the maximum size set for the table. Use the
Resize Table function to increase the size of the table.
2. Populate the columns with new data. When the cursor is placed in a field, the type of data
to be entered in a field or column and a short description of the field will be shown on the
APAC status bar at the bottom of the APAC window.
3. To delete entries, select the row by clicking on the gray box at the extreme left end of the
row and press the Delete Row button. You may also select multiple rows to delete more
than one row at a time. To print the table, select the Print button located at the right side
of the window.

Version: 01
Figure 14-13 Update Table Data Window
The bottom half of the Update Table Data window contains the List Data section. The col-
umn headings found in this section will also vary depending on how the table is defined.
The following explains how table data and list data are related. A table can be defined
such that it has one or more associated lists. This means that each entry in the main table
contains those lists with data specific to that table entry. Lists usually hold data where
there can be multiple pieces of information for one table entry. For example, for a speed-
calling service, each person subscribed to the speed-calling service would have his or her
own list of speed call numbers. The table would be defined so that the main table held the
subscriber's ID, and a list of the subscriber's speed call codes.
Subscriber ID: 605-996-1234

Speed Code List: Speed Code = 1 Number: 605-996-1235
Speed Code = 2 Number: 605-996-1236
Subscriber ID: 605-996-1235

Speed Code List: Speed Code = 1 Number: 605-996-8765
4. Populate the columns in the List Data section with new data.

Version: 01
NOTE: List data is essentially additional data for the table row selected in the
Table Data portion of the window. It is important to insure that the correct row is
selected before altering the list data.
Adding new entries (or rows) is the same as described for the Table Data section. And like
the Table Data section, the type and description of each field will be shown in the APAC
status bar as the cursor is placed in a field. To delete entries, select the row by clicking on
the gray box at the extreme left end of the row and press the Delete Row button. You may
also select multiple rows to delete more than one row at a time. To print the table, select
the Print button located at the right side of the window
5. When you have finished entering and printing out the new information, select the Finished
button located at the lower right side of the window.
6. Use the Tools|Transfer Service Data to AP command to transfer the updated table infor-
mation to the AP. The changes will not take effect until this command is completed.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Modify Table Data
14.8.15 Resizing Tables
Use the Resize command to change the maximum number of entries allowed in a table. This
menu item is available from the Tables tab in Service Logic Management using the pop-up menu.
The size and data for a table is AP specific (i.e., a table will have different sizes in each AP);
therefore, the table must be deployed to an AP before this command is activated. The menu item
is activated when user selects the tree item that is displaying the "Max Table Entries" or "Max
<listname> List Entries" under the table that is to be changed.
When this command is selected, the Change Table Size window (Figure 14-14) is displayed.
Figure 14-14 Change Table Size Window

Version: 01
Populate the New Maximum Size field with number of your choice as long as it is less than the
Licensed Maximum Size. This number will define the maximum number of entries allowed in this
table. Select the OK button to commit the changes to the AP. Next, communication will be estab-
lished with the AP, and the changes will be transferred to the selected table stored on the selected
AP. Select the Cancel button to exit this window without performing any changes.
Pop-up menu selection: Resize Table
14.8.16 Re-deploying Services
The Re-deploy Service command re-deploys the selected SLP to the selected AP. Use this com-
mand when a SLP, that had been previously deployed, needs to be re-deployed due to some failure
on the AP. The SLP will be re-deployed using all the same settings and values as the original
deployment. This command is available from the Services and APs tabs using the pop-up menu.
To activate this menu item from the AP tab, you must select a service that has already been
deployed to the selected AP. To activate this menu item from the Services tab, you must select the
concerned AP under the desired service branch.
When this menu item is selected, a confirmation window will be displayed. Select the OK button
if you want to continue with the Service Re-deployment operation. Select the Cancel button to
terminate the Service Re-deployment operation.
Figure 14-15 Service Re-deployment Confirmation Window
Next, a connection will be established with the AP, and the selected SLP will be transferred to the
AP.
Pop-up menu selection: Re-deploy Service
14.8.17 Running a SLP
Use the Run command to run a utility SLP that has been deployed to an AP. This menu item is
available from the APs tab in Service Logic Management using the pop-up menu.

Version: 01
Pop-up menu selection: Run
14.8.18 Retrieving AP SLP Status
The Get AP SLP Status command will retrieve, from specified AP(s), the current operational sta-
tus of all SLPs on the AP. The Operational Status is a system maintained status. The only thing
that can change this status is the AP or the SLP itself. In comparison, the Lock Status is an
administrative status and is only changed by manual, administrator action.
The Operational Status will be displayed under each service. The valid status includes:
Unknown The status has not yet been retrieved from the AP since the screen has been created.
Enabled The SLP is available for service.
Disabled The SLP has been removed from service. Action should be taken to determine the
cause of the outage.
Status Not Found The status for the SLP could not be found on the AP.
It is likely that the SLP does not exist on the AP. Action should be taken to bring APAC
and the AP into agreement by either re-deploying the SLP to the AP, or deleting the SLP
from the AP using the APAC Delete command.
Toolbar button:
Pop-up menu selection: Get AP SLP Status
14.9 Transferring or Deploying SLPs to AP
Select Tools|AP Transfer|Service Logic Programs|Load New to transfer specified SLP(s) to the
selected AP. Initially, the Service Logic Deployment wizard will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 14-16 Service Logic Deployment Wizard
You may exit the wizard at anytime by clicking the Cancel button at the bottom of the screen. To
go back a screen and make changes, use the Back button. To advance a screen, select the Next
button. Help is also available through the Help button.
The Service Logic Deployment wizard consists of eight screens, including:

1. Service Selection
2. Assign Subsystem Number
3. Global Title
4. AMA Service Logic Program ID
5. Service Tables
6. Service Logs
7. Additional Options
8. Service Summary
The following sections will step you through the Service Logic Deployment wizard screen by
screen, and explain the different options available in each.
14.9.1 Service Selection
Service Selection, shown in Figure 14-16, is the first screen of the Service Logic Deployment
wizard. Use this screen to select the service you wish to transfer.
Select the service you wish to transfer, and then click the Next button at the bottom of the screen
to advance to the next screen, Assign Subsystem Number.

Version: 01
14.9.2 Assign Subsystem Number
Use the Assign Subsystem Number screen to assign a subsystem number to the service. A sub-
system number value is contained in every SS7 message. The SS7 subsystem number is used by
the AP to correlate an incoming SS7 message with its associated service. Therefore, each SLP
that is directly invoked by receiving an SS7 message must be assigned a unique subsystem num-
ber.
NOTE: This screen will not appear when deploying a trunk call SLP to an AP.
Figure 14-17 Assign Subsystem Number
If the service that you selected is invoked directly by an AIN trigger (i.e., receiving a SS7 mes-
sage associated with an AIN trigger), then assign the appropriate SS7 subsystem number to this
service. If the service is not invoked directly by an AIN trigger, set the value to zero. The SS7
Subsystem numbers used by the current AP, and used by this service in other APs will be dis-
played. Enter the three-digit value between 1 and 254 in the box provided, and press the Next but-
ton.
NOTE: The value entered in the Subsystem Number field must not be currently in use by
another service in selected AP.
If you enter a valid Subsystem Number, the Global Title screen will be the next screen to display.
14.9.3 Global Title
If this service is invoked directly by an AIN trigger, then use the Global Title screen to assign
appropriate Translation Type and Map Number to this service. The Translation Type IDs already
in use by the current AP, and used by this service in other APs will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 14-18 Global Title
Populate the following fields in this screen, and then press the Next button to advance to the AMA
Service Logic Program ID screen.
Translation Type Num- The Translation Type Number is a number, from 1-254. See the Generic Global
ber Title Translation command for more information.
Map Number The map number is a number, from 0-19. For more details about map numbers,
please see Section 8.2 - "Generic GTT". The map number that you enter may or
may not currently exist in the Generic Global Title Translation tables. How-
ever, before the service will function properly, the correct translations must
exist for the map number that you enter. Otherwise the AIN query message will
not reach the AP, and may be returned to the message originator with some
translation error indication.
If you enter a map number that does not currently exist, use the
Insert|GTT|Generic GTT command to enter map translations for that number.
14.9.4 AMA Service Logic Program ID
Use the AMA Service Logic Program ID screen to assign an AMA (Automatic Message Account-
ing) Service Logic Program ID to this service. The SLP ID identifies this service when AIN
AMA recording is performed. The SLP IDs already in use by the current AP, and used by this ser-
vice in other APs will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 14-19 AMA Service Logic Program ID
Enter the 9 digit code in the box next to "Service Name" SLP ID, and press the Next button. The
SLP ID for a service does not need be unique; any 9-digit value will be accepted.
If the service being deployed uses tables to store data, the next screen displayed (when you select
the Next button) will be Service Tables.
14.9.5 Service Tables
Use the Service Tables screen to modify table information. The tables used by the SLP service,
and other services using the selected table are shown. If necessary, you can modify the number of
entries allowed in each table or modify the number of entries in a table’s list.

Version: 01
Figure 14-20 Service Tables
Select the tables that will be used by this SLP service, modify the attributes as needed and then
select the Next button. The next screen displayed will be Service Logs.
14.9.6 Service Logs
Use the Service Logs screen to modify service log information. A list of the logs used by this
SLP service, and a list of other services using the selected log are shown. If necessary, the
attributes of each log can be modified, including the Full Action attribute of “standard” logs,
Alarm Threshold attribute of “redundant” logs, and Maximum Entries attribute of both log types.
The Maximum Entries value is the maximum number of unread log entries the log can contain.
When the number of unread entries in the log reaches this limit, the action specified by the Full
Action attribute will be triggered. If a selected log has been previously deployed to the AP,
through the deployment of another SLP, then the Maximum Entries value cannot be changed and
the edit control will be disabled. The Maximum Entries can, however, be changed from the Logs
tab of the Service Logic Management window (see Section 14.5).
The Maximum Entries value for a log is the maximum entries per AP unit. For example, if the log
capacity is set to 500 entries, then it will be able to have 500 entries on each AP unit. The Maxi-
mum Entries value cannot be larger than 65,535 entries.
Figure 14-21 shows the Service Logs screen when a “standard” log is selected in the list of logs
used by the SLP.

Version: 01
Figure 14-21 Service Logs - Standard
The Full Action attribute for standard logs may be set to either “Wrap” or “Stop”. A Full Action
of “Wrap” will allow a log that has reached its capacity to begin overwriting existing log entries,
beginning with the oldest entries. A Full Action of “Stop” will halt information logging once the
maximum number of unread log entries has been reached.
Figure 14-22 shows the Service Logs screen when a “redundant” log is selected in the list of logs
used by the SLP.
Figure 14-22 Service Logs - Redundant
The Full Action attribute for redundant logs is not displayed because redundant logs always have
a non-changeable Full Action of “wrap”. The Alarm Threshold attribute value is a specified per-
centage of the capacity of the log. When the Alarm Threshold is reached, the AP will generate an
alarm alerting the service administrator that log data should be read to avoid data loss.

Version: 01
Select the logs that will be used by this SLP service, modify the attributes as needed, and then
select the Next button to advance to the Additional Options screen.
14.9.7 Additional Options
Use the Additional Options screen to set additional options for this service. More than one Addi-
tional Options screen may appear, depending on the service.
14.9.7.1 Activate Service Immediately
The most common Additional Options screen allows the service administrator to decide whether
or not to activate the service immediately after successful transfer to the AP. This screen is dis-
played in Figure 14-23.
Figure 14-23 Additional Options - Activate Service Immediately
To activate the service immediately after successful transfer to the AP, place a check in the box in
front of this option. Uncheck the box to leave the service in an inactive state on the AP after a
successful transfer is completed. The service can be activated later using the command.
To continue, press the Next button. If there are any other Additional Options screens in the
deployment of this service, they will appear next; otherwise the Service Summary screen will be
displayed.
14.9.7.2 Enter NPA-NXXs
When the service being deployed needs to be associated with NPA-NXXs on the destination AP,
an Additional Options screen similar to Figure 14-24 will be displayed. This NPA-NXXs list
should be populated with the NPA-NXXs of all potential subscribers of this service who will be

Version: 01
served by the AP to which the service is being deployed. NPA-NXXs defined in this screen will
be automatically associated with the service being deployed and the destination AP when the Next
button is pressed.
Figure 14-24 Additional Options - Enter NPA-NXXs
The Additional Options screen initially contains a list of NPA-NXX entries that exist on the desti-
nation AP. To add an NPA-NXX to the list, press the Add button. A new NPA-NXX item will be
added and the words "Enter New NPANXX" will be highlighted. Enter the 6-digit NPA-NXX
into the highlighted space and press the <Enter> key. To delete an NPA-NXX from the list, select
an NPA-NXX and press the Delete button.
To continue, press the Next button. The Service Summary screen will be displayed.
14.9.8 Service Summary
Use the Service Summary screen to preview the SLP service, and deploy the service to the
selected AP. The SLP service and the resources that it uses (e.g., tables, logs, and announce-
ments) are shown in a tree format. The Service Description is also shown. To make any changes
to the items shown, use the Back button to go back to the appropriate screen. Select the Finish
button to deploy this service to the selected AP.

Version: 01
Figure 14-25 Service Summary
After you select Finish, a connection will be made with the AP, and a progress bar is subsequently
displayed at the top of the APAC window. This progress bar will display the name of the AP, and
show the progress of the deployment. The status bar at the bottom of the APAC window will also
display progress information.
14.10 Add-ons
Select Tools|Add-ons to run an add-on. An add-on is an item that may be added to APAC to pro-
vide additional features or enhancements. For example, you might want a custom data entry form
that allows you to add customers to a service. An add-on could be created to meet your com-
pany's individual needs.
Figure 14-26 Sample Add-ons Window
• Click the plus (+) icon to expand the tree items.

Version: 01
• Click the minus (-) icon to contract the tree items.

• When you select the Add-on (e.g., Telemarketer Call Screening in the sample screen above),
a description of the service will display in the Description section of the window.
• To run the add-on, select the Add-on (e.g., Manage Subscribers... in the sample screen
above), and click Run.
• To exit this window, select Cancel.
NOTE: For further information on how to use a specific add-on, please see the online help
or documentation for that add-on.
14.11 Manage Service NPA-NXX Mappings
The Service NPA-NXX Mappings interface is used to define relationships between NPA-NXXs,
services, and AP systems. Service management windows (e.g., Voice Mail Subscriber Manage-
ment) use this mapping to support “enterprise-wide” service management. Enterprise-wide ser-
vice management allows the APAC user to provision service subscribers without concern for the
AP location of the subscribers. This mapping is how the service management windows determine
on which AP the service subscribers are located. The NPA-NXX/service/AP mapping is usually
administered by each service-specific management window. However, this user interface can be
used to view the service mapping directly. Use the Insert | NPA-NXX | Services NPA-NXX com-
mand to open the Manage Service NPA-NXX Mappings window (see Figure 14-27), from which
all Service NPA-NXX mappings can be managed.
Figure 14-27 Manage Service NPA-NXX Mappings Window

Version: 01
The Manage Service NPA-NXX Mappings window has three tabs across the top of it to allow the
Service NPA-NXX mappings to be viewed as trees ordered by NPA-NXX, Service, or AP. In the
Figure 14-27 example, the tree is ordered by NPA-NXX because the Order by NPA/NXX tab is
selected.
Adding NPA-NXXs, Services, or APs

For any new entry, an NPA-NXX, Service and AP must be specified. To enter a new item into the
NPA-NXX Service map, press the Add button. A prompt to enter an NPA-NXX, Service, or AP
will appear, depending on the tab that is currently selected. Once the item being prompted for has
been entered, press the <Enter> key to move the focus to the next item. If the values of all items
in the new entry are valid, it will appear on the NPA-NXX Service Map.
The drop-down arrow on the Add button allows child items to be added beneath an existing NPA-
NXX, Service, or AP. For example, if the NPA-NXX 605-239 were selected in the Order by
NPA/NXX tab (see Figure 14-27), pressing the drop-down arrow on the Add button would display
the following drop-down menu:
Figure 14-28 Example Add Button Menu
Selecting the Add Service option from the drop-down menu would result in a prompt to select a
service to be added to the NPA-NXX 605-239.
Deleting NPA-NXXs, Services, or APs

To delete an item, select the NPA-NXX, Service, or AP to be deleted and press the Delete button.
A confirmation dialog will appear, asking if you are sure you want to delete the selected item.
Pressing the No button on the confirmation dialog will cancel the delete process. Pressing the Yes
button on the confirmation dialog will delete the selected item and all child items beneath that
item. For example, if the NPA-NXX 605-995 seen in Figure 14-27 is deleted, then the Calling
Card and Voice Mail services below it will also be removed.
Saving Changes
To save changes, attempt to close the Manage Service NPA-NXX Mappings window. If any
changes have been made that have not been saved, a prompt will be displayed asking whether the
changes should be saved before closing. If Yes is selected, the changes will be saved and the win-
dow will be removed from the screen. If No is selected, the window will be removed from the
screen and all changes made since the window was opened will be discarded.
14.11.1 NPA-NXX Assignment
When a new phone number is entered for a service deployed to multiple AP systems, and the new
number’s NPA-NXX is not associated with any existing AP systems, then a dialog similar to Fig-
ure 14-29 will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 14-29 AP Selection Dialog
Since the service name and NPA-NXX are already known, the only entry required to complete the
Service NPA-NXX Mappings entry is the AP. Select an AP from the AP Name drop-down box in
the selection dialog and press the OK button to add the new AP/Service/NPA-NXX correlation to
the database. If the Cancel button is pressed, no entry is placed in the database.

Version: 01

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 15 - Announcement Management
Chapter 15 - Announcement Management
15.1 Announcement Builder Library Window
Select Tools|Announcement Builder to start the Announcement Builder. The Announcement

Builder allows you to quickly create new announcements or modify existing announcements.
These announcements can subsequently be deployed to an AP that is configured to play
announcements.
Initially, the Announcement Builder announcement library window will be displayed.
Figure 15-1 Announcement Builder Library Window
The Announcement Builder Library Window is partitioned into tabs for each announcement type.
Each tab contains a screen divided into two sections, Released and Working Set. Select the Frag-
ment Manager button to access the Fragment Manager. Select the Fragment Report and Annc
Report buttons to view reports of fragments or announcements. To display the Announcement
Definition window, which allows you to view and play the text of an announcement, right-click
on an announcement. To exit the window at anytime, press the Quit button. Help is also available
through the Help button.
15.1.1 Released and Working Set Sections
The Released and Working Set sections provide a way to control the modification of announce-
ments and protect against the loss of an in-service version of an announcement.
The Released section contains all of the announcements contained in the APAC database.
Announcements in the Released folder are in a completed state and ready to be deployed to the
AP. Also, the announcements in this section are protected and cannot be modified directly. Once

Version: 01
an announcement is "released", that version is permanently secured and cannot be overwritten. If

the same announcement is modified and re-released, the new version and the older version will
co-exist and can be used on APs. The different version numbers are listed in the second column
of the screen. To sort the announcements, simply click the column heading (Nbr, Ver, or Name).
The announcements will be sorted accordingly.
The Working Set section contains modifiable copies of announcements. That is, only announce-
ments listed under the Working Set section may be changed. Also, after a new announcement is
created, it will initially appear under the Working Set section. There is only one working "ver-
sion" of an announcement. Once an announcement is completed and is ready to be used on an AP,
it must be "released", which copies the current announcement definition to the Released section.
15.1.2 Modifying an Existing Announcement
To modify an existing announcement, it must be moved from the Released section to the Working
Set section. To do this, select the announcement in the Released section, and press the Get button.
The Get function makes a copy of the selected announcement in the Working Set section. Once
the announcement exists in the Working Set section, simply select that announcement in the Work-
ing Set section and then press the Update button. The Update button results in the display of the
main Announcement Builder window.
15.1.3 Creating a New Announcement
To create a new announcement, select the New button. The main Announcement Builder window
will be displayed. If no announcement is selected in the Working Set or Released sections, a blank
Announcement Builder window is displayed. If an announcement in the Working Set or Released
section is selected when the New button is pressed, then you are given an option to use the
selected announcement as a base for the new announcement. If you select this option, the
Announcement Builder window will be populated with the definition information from the
selected option. This is useful if it is necessary to make a new announcement that is similar to an
existing announcement.
15.1.4 Releasing Announcements
After the announcement has been created or modified and saved in Announcement Builder, it is
ready to be moved from the Working Set section to the Released section. To do this, select the
announcement under the Working Set section and then press the Release button. The announce-
ment will be moved to the Released section. If there is already a released version of the
announcement, the version number is incremented by one, and a new released version of the
announcement is created as the incremented version number.

Version: 01
15.2 Fragment Manager
The Fragment Manager window allows you to manage custom fragments (i.e., fragments that you
have created). You can use the Fragment Manager to:
• add custom fragments to APAC
• edit or change the fragment description
• delete custom fragments from APAC
• play custom fragments
To access this feature, click the Fragment Manager button from the Announcement Builder
library window. The Fragment Manager window will display.
Figure 15-2 Fragment Manager Window
The fragments shown in the Custom Fragments list have already been added to the APAC data-
base. There may be up to 1050 custom fragments in each language. The following options are
available from this window.
Add Allows you to add custom fragments to APAC. Selecting this button will display a drop-down
menu from which the language of the new fragment must be selected from a list of existing lan-
guages. Once the fragment language is selected, the Fragment Properties window will be dis-
played (see Figure 15-3).
Please see Section 15.2.1 for more information on adding custom fragments to APAC.
NOTE: This option only allows you to add custom fragments (i.e., fragments that you have
created) to APAC. To import fragments distributed with a service, use the File|Open com-
mand.

Version: 01
Edit Allows you to edit the text that describes the selected fragment. To do this:
1. Select Edit. The Fragment Properties window will appear (see Figure
15-3).
2. You can change the text in the Fragment Content field.
Note: Editing the text in the Fragment Content field does NOT change how the fragment is
voiced.
Delete Allows you to delete the selected fragment from the APAC database. To do this:
1. Highlight the fragment and select Delete.
2. You will be prompted, "Warning: if any announcements are currently
using these custom fragments they will no longer function properly.
Are you sure that you want to delete the selected fragments?" Answer
Yes to delete the fragment. Answer No to return to the Fragment Man-
ager window.
Play Plays the selected fragment. To do this:

1. Highlight the fragment and select Play.
2. The fragment will be played. If you do not have a sound card with
speakers, the sound will be played through your built-in PC speaker.
Quit Exits the Fragment Manager. To do this, select Quit.
15.2.1 Adding Customer-Made Sound Files to APAC
Custom fragments may be created for use with the AP Voice Announcement System. The recom-
mended way to create your custom fragment sound file is by using the supplied FragEdit program.
You will find the FragEdit program in your APAC folder.
Please see Appendix C for more information on using the FragEdit program.
Next, add the sound file to the APAC database using Fragment Manager and the following proce-
dure.
1. Start the APAC Software.
2. Select Tools|Announcement Builder.
3. Click the Fragment Manager button.
4. Click the Add button in the Fragment Manager window and choose the language of the
new fragment from the drop-down menu.
5. The Fragment Properties window will be displayed.

Version: 01
Figure 15-3 Fragment Properties Window
An unused fragment number appropriate to the selected language is automatically gener-

ated and used for the new fragment.
6. Click the Get button. Select the wave file (*.WAV) to be imported and click Open.
7. Next, enter the contents of the fragment in the Fragment Content field. For example, if
the fragment recorded was "Thank you for using Innovative Systems Telco", this is what
would be entered here.
8. Select OK. The file will be imported and will appear in the Custom Fragment section
along with an APAC assigned fragment number.
9. If there are more fragments to add, go to step 3, otherwise select Quit.
10. The fragment(s) may now be used to build a new announcement.
15.2.2 Fragment Report
The Fragment Report function may be used to generate a report of fragments. To do this, select
the Fragment Report button from the Announcement Builder library window. Initially, you will
be prompted, “Do you really want to generate a report of all fragments?” Select Yes to generate
the report, or No to cancel this function. Next, the report will be displayed, as shown in the fol-
lowing sample report.

Version: 01
Figure 15-4 Sample Fragment Report
NOTE: The report is a text file that will be opened by your default text editor. In this
example, the default text editor is Notepad. If the report is too large for the default text edi-
tor (e.g. Notepad), you will be prompted, ”The file is too large for Notepad. Would you like
to use WordPad to read this file?” Answer Yes to display the report, or No to cancel.
The report shows information for each fragment:
FragID This is the fragment number.
GUID This is the unique fragment ID.
Last Modified This is the date that the fragment was last modified.
FileSize This is the byte size of the fragment.
Content This is the text shown in Announcement Builder for the fragment.

Version: 01
15.2.3 Announcement Report
The Announcement Report function may be used to generate a report of announcements. To do

this, select the Annc Report button from the Announcement Builder library window. Initially, you
will be prompted with the question; “Do you really want to generate a report of all announce-
ments?” Select Yes to generate the report, or No to cancel this function. Next, the report will be
displayed, as shown below.
Figure 15-5 Sample Announcement Report
NOTE: The report is a text file that will be opened by your default text editor. If the report
is too large for the default text editor (e.g. Notepad), you will be prompted, ”The file is too
large for Notepad. Would you like to use WordPad to read this file?” Answer Yes to display
the report, or No to cancel.
The report shows information for each announcement:
Number This is the announcement number, as shown in Announcement Builder.
Type This is the type of announcement.
Name This is the name of the announcement.
ID This is the unique announcement ID.

Version: 01
Ver This is the version number of the announcement.
Release Date This is the date the announcement was released.
15.3 Announcement Definition
The Announcement Definition window is displayed when a user right clicks on an announcement
in the Announcement Builder library window. This window, which is similar to the Announce-
ment Text option in View|Announcements, shows the complete text and definition of the selected
announcement. From this window, you can select the play button to listen to the text of the
announcement. If the announcement has no parameters, then the announcement will begin to play
immediately. If the announcement has parameters, an additional window will pop up where you
can enter the parameter value(s) of your choice. The announcement will then be played with
those values.
Figure 15-6 Announcement Definition Window
NOTE: Your PC must have wave audio sound capabilities (i.e., the ability to play .wav
files) before the play announcement function will work.

Version: 01
15.4 Announcement Builder
To access the main Announcement Builder screen, select the New or Modify button from the
Announcement Builder library window. The main Announcement Builder screen will be dis-
played. The Announcement Builder is partitioned according to the tabs across the top of the
screen.
Parameter Definition Use this tab to define the parameters. Parameters are parts of an announcement
that are variable and change depending on conditions and information present
when the announcement is played.
Announcement Use this tab to build the announcement. Announcements are built from pre-
defined phrases (or fragments) and announcement parameters.
Test Announcement Use this tab to playback the announcement and determine if it sounds correct.
After you are done building or modifying the announcement, save the changes, or close the win-
dow or press the Cancel button to discard the changes. Any saved announcements must be
released before the changes can be deployed to an AP.
After the announcement is saved, the display will change to the Announcement Builder library
window.
To view all of the announcements and manage their deployment on APs, use the View| Announce-
ments|All and View|Announcements|Current AP commands.
NOTE: Announcements may also be imported into APAC using the File|Open command.
15.5 Defining Parameters
Use the Parameter Definition tab to define the parameters for an announcement. Parameters are
the parts of an announcement that are variable. That is, parameters in an announcement may say
different things each time the announcement is played. For example, if you have an announce-
ment that plays the current time, "The current time is [CurrentTime]", the [CurrentTime] portion
of the announcement changes with the time of day. Therefore [CurrentTime] would be a parame-
ter in the announcement.

Version: 01
Figure 15-7 Defining the Parameters
The window is divided into four sections: Announcement Parameters, Parameter Type, Parameter
Conditions, and Parameter Action.
15.5.1 Announcement Parameters
The Announcement Parameters section contains the New Parameter button, and the list of
announcement parameters. Click on the plus (+) sign in front of the parameter to expand the tree,
and view the parameter conditions. The fragments in the parameter tree indicate their associated
language through their text color and the symbol associated with their tree item.
15.5.2 Parameter Type
The Parameter Type section of the Parameter Definitions window contains the Parameter Type
selection box and the Number of Digits edit box. The item selected in the selection box is the type
of value the parameter will contain. The Number of Digits box to the right of the Parameter Type
selection box may be disabled depending on the parameter type selected.
.
NOTE: The Recorded Message parameter type allows AIN-based Service
Logic Programs to play recorded messages as announcements, and should not be
used for building announcements.

Version: 01
15.5.3 Parameter Conditions
The Parameter Conditions section of the window contains the parameter conditions. Parameter
Conditions allow you to define different parameter actions based on the value of the parameter.
NOTE: Parameter Conditions are only allowed for a parameter of type Number.
This section of the Parameter Definition tab is only activated if a check mark is placed in front of
Conditional Action. If Conditional Action is not checked, the parameter is not conditional and
will always perform the same actions when it is encountered in an announcement. When Condi-
tional Action is checked, the remaining condition controls become available so that the parameter
conditions can be defined.
The words "When the parameter is" are shown, and followed by a selection box and another box
that contains a value. The selection box contains the following “compare type” phrases:
• equal to
• not equal to
• less than
• greater than
Selecting one of these "compare type" phrases and entering the conditional value (the value to
which the parameter value is compared) defines the parameter condition. For example, if a com-
pare type of "is less than" is selected and a compare value of 2 is entered, when the parameter
value is less than two, a series of fragment may be played.
After the conditions are defined, they are shown in the Announcement Parameters section of the
window in the tree. To add another condition, select the Another Condition button.
15.5.4 Parameter Action
The Parameter Action section of the window defines the actions that the parameter will perform
for the current condition. This section contains the Say Value button and a list of fragments that
can be played. The Say Value button is selected if the current value of the parameter is to be
voiced when the announcement is played. For example, if the parameter type is “Number” and
the value is 11, the Say Value action will say “eleven” when the announcement is played; how-
ever, if the parameter type is “Digits” and the value is 11, “one one” will be voiced for the Say
Value action when the announcement is played.

Version: 01
The list of fragments within the Parameter Action section contains all of the fragments that may
be voiced according to the parameter conditions and the language tab selected at the bottom of the
section. Some fragments are longer than can be displayed in the column format. If you wish to
see more text of a fragment that is truncated, click on the fragment with the right mouse button.
This will display a small window that will display more of the fragment text.
15.5.5 Creating a New Parameter
To create a new parameter, complete the following steps:
1. Select the New Parameter button. A new tree item will be displayed directly below the
button. Enter a name for your parameter, or accept the default parameter name provided.
It is recommended that you choose a short, descriptive name for the parameter rather than
accepting the default name because it will be easier to distinguish the parameter when
building the announcement. Choose a parameter type from the drop-down box, and enter
a value if necessary.
2. Define your parameter conditions. Highlight the tree item "ALWAYS". This means that
when this parameter is entered, a certain condition will always occur. An announcement
value or fragment may be voiced when this parameter is entered. To do this, select the Say
Value button, or select a series of fragments from the fragment list section of the window.
3. To make a parameter action conditional, repeat step 1, and then place a check mark in
front of Conditional Action in the Parameter Conditions section of the window.
NOTE: Conditional actions are only allowed for parameters of type Number.
The tree item that was labeled "ALWAYS" will switch to "WHEN PARAMETER IS".
Select a parameter condition from the drop-down list, and enter a value. For example, the
condition could read "When the parameter is equal to 9" if you want certain actions to
occur when the parameter value is nine.
4. Next, select an action to take place when the condition is true. You can either select the
Say Value button, or select a fragment or series of fragments from the fragment list section
of the window. Depending on your selection, the announcement will either voice the
value or fragments when the condition is true.
5. To add another condition select the Another Condition button and repeat steps 3 and 4.
NOTE: The order, in which the parameter definitions occur in the parameter
list, is the order that the parameter values should be sent to the announcement
machine when the announcement is to be played.
6. To continue, save your changes, and select the Announcement tab to build or modify the
contents of the announcement.
To exit the window at anytime, press the Cancel button. Help is also available through the Help
button.

Version: 01
15.6 Building Announcements
Use the Announcement tab, as shown in Figure 15-8, to build an announcement. Announcements
are built by concatenating fragments and parameters. Announcement fragments are pre-defined
and pre-recorded phrases that can be used in announcements. These fragments may be simple,
one word phrases such as "and", or they may be multiple word phrases such as "the number you
have dialed." Some fragments are also periods of silence so announcements may contain pauses
to make them sound more natural.
Figure 15-8 Building the Announcements
15.6.1 Announcement Fragments
The Announcement Fragments section of the window lists all of the fragments belonging to the
language tab selected at the bottom of the section. The text shown in the window for a fragment
is exactly the words that the fragment will voice. Some fragments are longer than can be dis-
played in the column format. If you wish to see more text of a fragment that is truncated, click on
the fragment with the right mouse button. This will display a small window that will display more
of the fragment text. You may also use the buttons on the right side of the window to toggle the
view from column to vertical. In vertical view, more of a fragment’s text may be seen, but fewer
fragments can be viewed at one time.
15.6.2 Announcement Parameters
The Announcement Parameters section of the window contains the announcement parameters
that have been defined in the Parameter Definition tab. Click on the plus (+) sign in front of the
parameter to expand the tree, and view the parameter conditions.

Version: 01
15.6.3 Announcement Properties
The Announcement Properties section of the window contains the announcement number, name,
and type.
15.6.4 Announcement Text
The Announcement Text section of the window contains the text of the fragments that compose
the announcement. The text is color-encoded to indicate the language the announcement frag-
ments are associated with. Clicking on any part of a fragment in this section will highlight the
entire fragment and automatically select the fragment within the fragment’s language tab in the
Announcement Fragments section.
15.6.5 Creating Your Announcement
1. To create your announcement, simply highlight the fragment or parameter and double
click your left mouse button. The selected fragment or parameter will appear at the end of
the announcement text in the Announcement Text section of the window.
If a parameter with a say-value action is selected, the language selection dialog (Figure
15-9) will appear, and a language must be selected from popup menu before the parameter
is added to the announcement. Each say value parameter can be added to an announce-
ment multiple times with each instance specifying a different language.
Figure 15-9 Say Value Parameter Language Selection
Fragments may also be added to an announcement using the Dictate Announcement win-
dow.
Figure 15-10 Dictate Announcement Window
When text is entered into this window, the first fragment in the fragment list matching the
typed text is selected. Once the desired fragment is selected, press the <Enter> key or
click the Accept button and the selected fragment will be added to the announcement text
at the current insertion point.
2. To delete a fragment or parameter from the announcement, simply highlight the item to
delete in the Announcement Text section and press <Delete>.

Version: 01
3. To insert a fragment or parameter in the middle of an announcement definition, select the

fragment or parameter in the Announcement Text section that should be after the item to be
inserted. Then double click on the fragment or parameter to be inserted. The item should
be inserted before the selected item in the Announcement Text section.
4. Each announcement must be assigned a unique announcement number before it can be
saved. A short descriptive name for the announcement can be entered in the Announce-
ment Name section.
5. If you are creating a new announcement, you must select the type of announcement to cre-
ate. If you have based your new announcement on an existing announcement, this box
will default to that announcement's type, and will be grayed out. Also, if you update an
announcement, this box will default to the announcement type that you selected, and will
be grayed out.
6. You can listen to your announcement at any time during the editing process by selecting
the Test Announcement tab. Use the play, pause, and stop controls in the lower right cor-
ner to listen to the announcement, or select the Announcement tab or the Parameter Defi-
nition tab to perform further editing. When satisfied, click on the Save button to save the
new announcement and return to the Announcement Builder window.
To exit the window at anytime without saving your changes, press the Cancel button. On-line
help is available by pressing the Help button.
15.7 Testing the Announcements
Use the Test Announcement tab to listen to the announcement.
Figure 15-11 Testing the Announcement

Version: 01
The Announcement Parameters section of the window contains a list of announcement parame-
ters. Click on the plus (+) sign in front of a parameter to expand the tree, and view the parameter
conditions. Use the Parameter Value box to the right of the parameter listing to enter a test value
appropriate for the selected type of parameter. The following table shows the test value format of
each type of parameter:
Parameter Type Format

Number x (where x is 0-n, and n is a max number value specified in
the parameter definition)
Digits x (where x is a string of n digits, and n is a number speci-

fied in the parameter definition)
Variable Digits x (where x is a string of 0 to n digits, and n is a number

specified in the parameter definition)
Time/Current Time (12 hr) hh:mm AM/PM (where hh is 01-12)
Current Time (24 hr) hh:mm (where hh is 00-24)
Date/Current Date mm/dd
Day/Current Day of Week 0-6 (Sunday - Saturday)
Current Month 1-12 (January - December)
Current Year xxxx (where x is 0-9)
Inside/Outside Temperature +/-xxx (where x is 0-9)
Wind Speed xxx (where x is 0-9)
Wind Gust xxx (where x is 0-9)
Wind Direction 1-16 (North - North-Northwest)
Barometric Pressure xx.xx (where x is 0-9)
Barometric Trend 1-3 (Steady, Rising, Falling)
Inside/Outside Humidity xxx (where x is 0-9)
Total/Daily Rainfall xx.xx (where x is 0-9)
Wind Chill +/-xxx (where x is 0-9)
Dew Point +/-xxx (where x is 0-9)
Table 15-1 Test Parameter Value Formats
The Announcement section of the window contains the text of the announcement based on the val-
ues selected for the parameters, and a Play button. The announcement text in this section will be
updated whenever a parameter value is changed in the Parameter Value box.

Version: 01
15.7.1 Playing Your Announcement
To test your announcement, press the Play button( ). The announcement will be played
through your PC speaker. You can also stop or pause the announcement. After you save the
announcement, the display will change to the Announcement Builder library window.
To exit the window at anytime, press the Cancel button.
15.8 Viewing Announcements
Select the View|Announcements|All command to view all existing announcements and the APs
where they are deployed. Initially, the Announcement Information screen will display.
Figure 15-12 Announcement Information
The Announcement Information window is partitioned according to the tabs across the top of the
screen. Each tab displays a tree with Announcement Information organized by the tab selected.
The hierarchy of the tree displays the relationships of the parent items to its child items. Click on
the plus (+) sign in front of the announcements to expand the tree items, and display the child
items.
Each tab has its own toolbar and pop-up menu (activated by clicking the right mouse button) that
contain the Announcement Information commands that can be performed on the items displayed
in the tree. The menu items and toolbar buttons will enable and disable themselves based on what
is selected in the tree and whether the particular function can be performed on that item.
Announcements Displays a tree of all existing announcements. From this tab you can view, delete, and
transfer announcements to the selected AP.

Version: 01
Fragments Displays a tree of all the existing announcement fragments. From this tab you can
transfer, reload, or delete fragments to the selected AP.
APs Displays a tree of all APs where announcements and/or fragments have been deployed.
From this tab you can view announcement text or the AP Announcement List, reload
announcements or fragments to the selected AP, and delete announcements or frag-
ments.
15.8.1 Announcement Information | Announcements
Select the Announcements tab of Announcement Information to display a tree of all existing
announcements. From this tab you can view, delete, or transfer the announcements to the selected
AP. Initially, the screen will display the announcements as parent items. Click on the plus (+)
sign in front of the announcements to expand the tree items, and display the child items.
The root level of the tree shows the announcements. The tree will branch out to show the differ-
ent versions of the announcements, and the APs to which the announcements have been deployed.
Following is a brief description of the commands available from the Announcements tab:
Announcement Shows the text of the selected announcement, as shown in the Announcement Informa-
Text tion screen (see Figure 15-12). This is the text that the announcement will voice. You
can also listen to the announcement by selecting the Play button on the left side of the
window. This command is activated when you select an announcement version. See
Section 15.10.2 for more information.
Delete Delete the selected object. This command completely deletes a selected version of an
announcement from the APAC announcement database. Once this command is per-
formed, the announcement is no longer available to be used on any AP. It is activated
when you select an announcement version. See Section 15.10.3 for more information.
Transfer Selected Transfer selected announcement to the selected AP. This command is activated when
Announcement you select an announcement version. See Section 15.10.5 for more information.
15.8.2 Announcement Information | Fragments
Select the Fragments tab of Announcement Information to display a tree of all the existing
announcement fragments. Announcement fragments are independent voice phrases that are used
to make specific announcements. By concatenating different fragments, complete announce-
ments can be formed. Fragments are the only actual voice stored on the AP. The AP does not
store a complete announcement sound image. Instead, each announcement is simply a list of used

Version: 01
fragments and the announcement sound image is built in real-time from the fragment sound files
when the announcement is to be played. Therefore, it is important that all fragments used by
announcements on an AP are transferred to the AP before the announcement is played.
From this tab you can view, delete, or transfer the fragments to the selected AP. Initially when
this tab is selected, the screen will display the fragment language names as parent items. Click on
the plus (+) sign in front of the fragment language names to expand the tree items, and display the
available fragments as child items.
Figure 15-13 Announcement Information | Fragments
The fragment level of the tree shows the text of what the fragment says and also a unique frag-
ment number in parenthesis. The tree will branch out to show the APs to which the fragments
have been deployed.
Following is a brief description of the commands available from the Fragments tab:
Transfer Selected Transfer selected announcement to the current AP. This command is only active if the
Fragment selected fragment has not been deployed to the currently selected AP. See Section
15.10.5 for more information.
Reload Selected Reload the selected fragment to the selected AP. This command is activated when the
Fragment selected fragment is displayed on the selected AP. See Section 15.10.6 for more infor-
mation.
Delete Selected Delete the selected object. Depending on the item selected, this command deletes a
Fragment selected fragment from the APAC database or from the selected AP. It is activated
when you select a fragment or AP name. See Section 15.10.3 for more information.

Version: 01
To audit and analyze the fragments on the AP system and the APAC database, select Tools|Data-
base Maintenance|Fragment Audit. See Section 17.8 - "Announcement/Fragment Audit" of this
manual for more information.
15.8.3 Announcement Information | APs
Select the APs tab of Announcement Information to display a tree of all APs where announce-
ments and/or fragments have been deployed. From this tab, you can view announcement text,
view AP Announcement List, reload announcements or fragments to the selected AP, and delete
announcements or fragments. Initially when you click on the APs tab, the screen will display the
APs as parent items. Click on the plus (+) sign in front of the APs to expand the tree items, and
display the child items.
Figure 15-14 Announcement Information | APs
The root level of the tree shows the APs. The tree will branch out to show the announcements and
languages of fragments that have been transferred to that AP. The fragment languages can be
expanded to display the list of fragments for that language, which have been deployed to the AP.
Following is a brief description of the commands available from the APs tab:
Announcement Text Shows the text of the selected announcement. This is the text that the announcement
will voice. You can also listen to the announcement by selecting the Play button on
the left side of the window. This command is activated when you select an
announcement version. See Section 15.10.2 for more information.
AP Announcement View a list of announcements for the selected AP. This command is always active.
List See Section 15.10.4 for more information.

Version: 01
Reload All Reload all announcements previously transferred to the selected AP. This command
Announcements is always active. See Section 15.10.6 for more information.
Reload All Frag- Reload all fragments previously transferred to the selected AP. This command is
ments always active. See Section 15.10.6 for more information.
Delete Delete the selected fragment. This command deletes a selected fragment from the
AP. It is activated when you select a fragment that is currently deployed to any AP.
For information about deleting announcements from an AP, see Section 15.10.3.
To audit and analyze the fragments on the AP system and the APAC database, select Tools|Data-
base Maintenance|Fragment Audit. See Section 17.8 - "Announcement/Fragment Audit" for
more information.
15.9 View Announcements on the Current AP
Select the View|Announcements|Current AP command to view the list of announcements that

have been transferred to the selected AP. It is available from the View pull-down menu, and the
APs tab in Announcement Information using the toolbar or pop-up menu (activated by clicking
the right mouse button).
Initially, the Announcement List screen will display. The number, version, name and type of each
announcement transferred to the selected AP are displayed. The columns in this window may be
sorted by clicking on the column headings.
Figure 15-15 Viewing Announcements for the Current AP
Following is a brief description of the commands available from the Announcement List window:

Version: 01
Announcement Text Shows the text of the selected announcement in a new window. This is the text
that the announcement will voice. You can also listen to the announcement by
selecting the Play button on the left side of the new window. This command is
activated when you select an announcement. See Section 15.10.2 for more infor-
mation.
Delete Delete the selected object. This command deletes a selected announcement from
the AP. It is activated when you select an announcement that is currently deployed
to any AP. See Section 15.10.3 for more information.
Reload All Announce- Transfer all listed announcements to the selected AP. This command is always
ments active. See Section 15.10.6 for more information.
Reload All Fragments Transfer all listed fragments to the selected AP. This command is always active.
See Section 15.10.6 for more information.
15.10 Announcement Information Command Descriptions
The following section provides additional information about certain commands.

Version: 01
15.10.1 Announcement Information Toolbar Icons
Button Function
View announcement text.
Delete the selected announcement.
Delete the selected fragment.
View a list of announcements for the selected AP.
Transfer announcements or fragments to the current AP.
Re-transfers announcements that have previously been transferred to the current AP.
Re-transfers fragments that have previously been transferred to the current AP.
Figure 15-16 Announcement Information Toolbar Icons
15.10.2 Viewing Announcement Text
Use the View Announcement Text command to view the text of the selected announcement. This
command is available from the Announcements and APs tabs in Announcement Information
using the toolbar on the left side of the window, or using the pop-up menu (activated by clicking
the right mouse button). It is activated when an announcement with a recorded description is
selected.

Version: 01
Figure 15-17 Viewing Announcement Text
When this command is selected, a window will pop up with the announcement text displayed, as
shown in the sample screen above. The Announcement Text is the text that will be voiced when
the announcement is played. Any text inside of brackets, [], indicates the position of an
announcement parameter. Announcement parameters are parts of the announcement that are vari-
able. The parameter instructions are shown below the main announcement text.
An announcement may be listened to by selecting the Play button (green arrow on the left side of
the window). If the announcement does not have any parameters, then the announcement is
immediately played when the Play button is selected. If the announcement has parameters, then
an additional window (see Figure 15-18) is shown where parameter values can be entered. The
announcement can then be played with the entered parameter values.
Figure 15-18 Set Parameter Values Dialog
NOTE: Your PC must have wave audio sound capabilities (i.e., the ability to play .wav
files) before the play announcement function will work.
To print the contents of the announcement text window, select File|Print.

Version: 01
15.10.3 Deleting Announcements or Fragments
Use the Delete command to delete the selected object. Depending on the selected object, this
command deletes an announcement or fragments from the selected AP or completely deletes the
item from the APAC database. It is available from all of the tabs in Announcement Information
using the toolbar on the left side of the window, or using the pop-up menu (activated by clicking
the right mouse button). For any selected object, if the delete toolbar button or pop-up menu is
enabled, then the menu item can be deleted.
15.10.4 Viewing Announcements for the Current AP
Use the AP Announcement List command to view a list of announcements for the selected AP.
This command is available from the APs tab in Announcement Information using the toolbar on
the left side of the window or using the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the right mouse but-
ton). When this command is selected, the Announcement List window will display.
See the View|Announcements|Current AP (Chapter 15.9 - "View Announcements on the Current

AP") command for more information about this command.
15.10.5 Transferring Selected Fragments/Announcements
The Transfer Selected Fragments/Announcements command transfers announcements or frag-

ments that have not yet been transferred to the current AP. It is available from the Announce-
ments and Fragments tabs in Announcement Information using the toolbar on the left side of the
window, or using the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the right mouse button).
See the Tools|AP Transfer|Fragments |Load New (Chapter 6.5 - "Transfer New Fragments to
AP") and Tools| AP Transfer|Announcements|Load New (Chapter 6.3 - "Transfer New
Announcements to AP") commands for more information about this command.
15.10.6 Reloading Selected Fragments/Announcements
Select the Reload Fragments/Announcements command when you need to re-transfer announce-
ments or fragments that have previously been transferred to the current AP. This command is
used when APAC shows the announcement or fragment is deployed to an AP, but, for some rea-
son, it is actually no longer present or has been corrupted on that AP. It is available from the
Fragments and APs tabs in Announcement Information using the toolbar on the left side of the
window, or using the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the right mouse button). This command
is activated when you select an AP to which fragments or announcements have been deployed.
See the Tools|AP Transfer|Fragments|Reload All (Chapter 6.6 - "Reload All Fragments to AP")
and Tools|AP Transfer|Announcements|Reload All (Chapter 6.4 - "Reload All Announcements to
AP") commands for more information about this command.

Version: 01
15.11 Set AP Options for Announcement Playback
services. The following options can be set for Announcement Playback from the Tools|AP
Options window:
Figure 15-19 AP Options - Announcement Playback
Use Ending Inflection Set to Yes to voice-back ending inflection after NPA and NXX codes.
NPA and NXX Pause Count Number of 32 ms chunks of silence to insert after NPA and NXX codes.
Interdigit Pause Count Number of 32 ms chunks of silence to insert between digits.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 16 - Scheduling
Chapter 16 - Scheduling
16.1 Scheduling APAC Functions
Use the Scheduling APAC Functions command to set a schedule for automatic invocation of cer-
tain APAC functions. The functions scheduled will be performed only for the currently selected
AP. That is, scheduled functions for different APs are set independently. Complete the following
steps to schedule APAC functions:
IMPORTANT: APAC must be running on the PC at the scheduled times in order for the
scheduled functions to be performed. It is important to note that the schedule information is
stored local to the PC setting the schedule. Therefore, the only PC that can run the schedule
is the PC that set the schedule.
1. Select the File|Schedule APAC Functions menu command in APAC, and the APAC Event
Scheduler window will be displayed.
Figure 16-1 APAC Event Scheduler
2. The APAC Event Scheduler window is used to specify which functions to schedule and
when the functions should be performed.
Use the Functions to Schedule pull-down menu to select the function to be scheduled. The
functions available in the pull-down menu are described below.
In addition to the functions listed below, there may be functions in the pull-down menu
that are specific to Service Logic Programs (SLPs) that have been deployed on the
selected AP. Descriptions of those functions can be found in the online help and service
descriptions provided with those SLPs.

Version: 01
•Calling Name File Input – This function will read a Calling Name Input File and
record the calling names in the file in to the Calling Name database. Basically
this scheduled function performs the same actions as the Insert Calling Name
File function (see Section 9.4 for more information).
•Service Data Transfer To AP – This function will transfer to the AP all pending
service data changes in the APAC database. This includes changes to calling
names, SLP data, and all other data transferred by the Transfer Service Data To
AP function (see Section 6.1 for more information).
•Service Data From AP – This function will retrieve from the AP all the types of
data transferred by the Transfer Service Data From AP function (see Section
6.2 for more information), including data from all SLP tables and CMF backup
data. If there are any pending changes in a SLP data table that have not yet
been transferred to the AP, the SLP data will not be retrieved for that table.
This will prevent the scheduled function from overwriting changes and causing
the loss of those changes.
•Read Calling Name Dip Counts – This function will retrieve any unread calling
name dip count entries from the AP’s calling name dip count log. Note, in
order for the AP’s calling name dip count log to contain data, the calling name
dip count feature (see Section 9.10) should be configured so that the AP auto-
matically logs the calling name dip counts on a periodic basis.
•Backup APAC Data To AP – This function is used to backup all APAC dynamic
data to the AP and should be scheduled to run on a daily basis. A warning
message will be displayed on APAC login if APAC data has never been
backed up to the AP, or if APAC data has not been backed up to the AP within
the last 30 days. APAC data restoration should only be performed under direct
supervision of Innovative Systems technical support staff.
•Read SLP Log: log-name – This function will appear for every SLP log con-
tained on the AP. Therefore, the reading of each SLP log can be independently
scheduled. This function will read all unread data from the specified SLP log.
3. Next, select a time from the Frequency pull-down menu. This will specify when the
APAC functions should be performed. This option defaults to None, meaning the function
is not scheduled. Other options include Hourly, Daily, Weekly, and Monthly.
If the Daily option is selected, a series of four time slots will be displayed (as illustrated in
Figure 16-1). The scheduled function will be performed once per day for each time slot
that contains a valid time.
If the Weekly option is selected, a pull-down menu containing the days of the week will be
displayed, along with a time slot for specifying the time on the selected day that the sched-
uled function will be performed.
If the Monthly option is selected, a pull-down menu containing the days of the month will
be displayed, along with a time slot for specifying the time on the selected day that the
scheduled function will be performed.

Version: 01
To enter a valid time of day for Daily, Weekly, or Monthly schedules, including the hour,
minutes, and a.m./p.m., place the cursor in a time slot, and then use the up and down
arrows to the right to increase or decrease the numbers, or simply type in the desired time
in hh:mm a.m./p.m. format.
NOTE: APAC will perform only one scheduled function at a time. If two func-
tions are scheduled for the same time, or if the scheduled time for one function
occurs before the completion of an executing scheduled function, then APAC
will queue the function(s) for execution when the currently executing function
finishes.
4. After the schedules have been set for all desired functions, select the OK button. To exit
the window without saving changes, select the Cancel button.
To turn the APAC Scheduler on and off, use the File|Scheduler Active command (see Section
16.1.3 for more information). When the Scheduler is active, a check-mark will appear beside the
command in the File pull-down menu. Use the View|APAC Schedule command (see Section
16.1.4) to display a report of scheduled APAC functions.
16.1.1 Log Files
The APAC scheduler process writes entries to a log file each time a scheduled function is per-
formed. At the very least, the start and end times of the functions are recorded. Also any recover-
able errors are reported in this log.
IMPORTANT: Unrecoverable or unexpected errors encountered will display a message

window in the APAC screen and the scheduled function (and all other scheduled functions
after this function) will be halted until a user acknowledges the error. It is important to peri-
odically monitor the APAC that is performing scheduled functions and monitor the sched-
ule log file to ensure all functions are completing as expected.
A new schedule log file is created every day with a file name based on the current date. The file
name has the format: mmddyy.txt, where mm is the month, dd is the day of the month and yy is the
year. The schedule log files are stored in a sub-folder of the folder containing the APAC installa-
tion: <APAC-folder>\schedlog\.

Version: 01
16.1.2 Input and Output from the Scheduled Functions
Because the scheduled functions are performed automatically and autonomously, some functions
require input data to be in a pre-determined location and some functions will save information to
pre-defined locations. The following information shows required inputs and specifies output, if
any, from the scheduled APAC functions.
Calling Name File Input: The calling name input file must be in a sub-folder for the APAC folder:
Input APAC-folder\Cname\AP-name\. The input file name must be
cnamein.txt. When this scheduled function is performed, the
cnamein.txt file will be renamed to a file based on the current date, in the
format: mmddyyss.txt, where mm is the month, dd is the day, yy is the
year, and ss is a sequence number from 00 to 99 so that multiple calling
name file inputs may be recorded for the same date. The renaming
mechanism allows the different calling name changes to be recorded.
Also, if a cnamein.txt file is present, you can tell that the scheduled call-
ing name input function has not yet processed that file. If a file named
cnamein.txt is not found, the scheduled function records this in the
schedule-log file and this scheduled calling name file input process ends.
Output: As with non-scheduled Calling Name File Input (see Section 9.4.1), a
log file is generated that reports any errors found in the input file. This
file is named the same as the input file with a .log extension and is
placed in the same folder as the input file.
Service Data Trans- Input: Modified entries in the APAC database.

fer To AP
Output: None.
Service Data Trans- Input: None.

fer from AP
Output: Updated entries in the APAC database.
The CMF backup file will be saved to a sub-folder of the APAC folder:
APAC-folder\CmfBckup\AP-name\. The file name will be based on the
current date, in the format: mmddyyss.cmf, where mm is the month, dd is
the day, yy is the year, and ss is a sequence number from 00 to 99 so that
multiple CMF backup files may be saved for the same date.
Read Calling Name Input: None.

Dip Counts
Output: Updated entries in the APAC database.
Backup APAC Data Input: The backup AP must have a LAN connection to APAC and must be run-
To AP ning AP software release 4.2 or greater. If either of these conditions is
not met, the backup will fail and an error will be written to the schedule
log.
Output: None.
Read SLP Log Input: None.

Version: 01
Output: The Log file will be saved to a sub-folder of the APAC folder: APAC-
folder\logs\AP-name\Log-name\. The file name will be based on the
current date, in the format: mmddyyss.slg, where mm is the month, dd is
the day, yy is the year, and ss is a sequence number from 00 to 99 so that
multiple log files may be saved for the same date.
16.1.3 Turning the Scheduler On and Off
Select File|Scheduler Active to toggle the state of the APAC scheduler between active and inac-
tive. When the APAC program is started, the APAC scheduler status will be set to the state of the
scheduler during the last APAC session. The presence or absence of a check mark in front of the
Scheduler Active command in the File pull-down menu indicates the respective active/inactive
status. Also, a small blue clock icon on the status bar in the lower right corner of the program
window, as shown in Figure 16-2, will also indicate the scheduler’s active/inactive status.
Figure 16-2 Scheduler Status
When the Scheduler is deactivated, the check mark will disappear from the File pull-down menu,
and the small blue clock icon will be shown with a red X on it. When the scheduler is in this state,
all scheduled functions will be ignored.
When the APAC scheduler is turned on, APAC will perform the scheduled functions as shown in
the APAC Schedule (see Section 16.1.4). To set the APAC schedule, use the File|Schedule
APAC Functions command (see Section 16.1).
16.1.4 Viewing the APAC Schedule
Use the View|APAC Schedule command to display a report of all scheduled APAC functions for
this PC. Initially, the Schedule Report window will display, as shown in Figure 16-2.

Version: 01
IMPORTANT: APAC must be running on the PC at the scheduled times in order for the
scheduled functions to be performed. It is important to note that the schedule information is
stored local to the PC setting the schedule. Therefore, the only PC that can run the schedule
is the PC that set the schedule.
The report shows the following information for each entry:
AP The name of the AP for which APAC will perform the scheduled functions.
Function The command or function to be performed.
Frequency The number of times the command or function will be performed. Possible choices for this
value include None, Hourly, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.
Day The day of the week or day of the month the command or function will be performed. Pos-
sible choices for this value include All, Last Day, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, Saturday, or any number from 1 to 31.
Time 1-4 The specific times each day, week, or month the command or function will be performed.
To modify or update the schedule for a function, select the AP name next to the function, and then
select Update Schedule command from the pop-up menu (activated by clicking the right mouse
button). The APAC Event Scheduler window will be shown. See the File|Schedule APAC Func-
tions command (Section 16.1) for more information about this window.
The information in the report may be sorted according to data in any column by clicking on the
column heading. For example, to sort the report by Frequency, simply click on the Frequency
heading and the order of the data in the report will be ordered by Frequency.
To turn the APAC Scheduler on and off, use the File|Scheduler Active command (see Section
16.1.3 for more information).

Version: 01
16.2 AP Scheduling
16.2.1 Scheduling AP Backups
The Tools|AP Backups|Schedule AP Backup command is used to set the schedule for the selected
AP to automatically back up the SLP database tables to the AP's disk. The AP retains all data-
bases in memory for fast access. However, data in memory is volatile and is destroyed if power to
the AP unit is interrupted. To prevent the loss of data, the AP has a built-in data preservation
mechanism that automatically records all data changes to the AP's disk at the time any data is
modified in memory.
The data file on the AP's disk that holds data changes is referred to as the "Change Log." Change
Log information is automatically applied to the AP database tables upon unit startup. Because the
Change Log is limited in size, the Change Log is meant to hold relatively recent data changes.
Therefore, it is important to periodically back up the AP's SLP database data to the AP's disk.
When the SLP database tables are backed up to the disk, a permanent image of the current data is
available for restoration if needed. Hence, it is no longer necessary to keep data about the tables
in the Change Log and, after a backup, the information from the point of the start of the backup is
removed from the Change Log.
Complete the following steps to schedule a backup to the AP:

1. To access this command, select Tools|AP Backups|Schedule AP Backup.
The AP Event Scheduler window will display. This window is very similar to the APAC
Event Scheduler window, which is activated by the File|Schedule AP Functions com-
mand.
2. This APAC command is used to set the frequency at which the AP's SLP data tables
should be backed-up to the AP's disk.
The Functions to Schedule specifies which function will be scheduled. Use the pull-down
menu to select the Schedule AP Backup command.
3. Next, select a time from the Frequency pull-down menu. This will specify when the AP
Backup will take place. This option defaults to None, meaning the backup is not sched-
uled. Other options include Daily, Weekly, and Monthly.
To change the time, including the hour, minutes, and a.m./p.m., place your cursor in the
field that you want to change, and then use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease
the numbers. You can also enter the desired time in hh:mm a.m./p.m. format.
To choose the Weekly option, select a day of the week, and time on that day that the
backup will be performed.
To choose the Monthly option, select the date of the month and time on that date that the
backup will be performed.

Version: 01
4. After you have selected a function, and time, select the OK button. To exit the window
without saving your changes, select the Cancel button.
Please see Section 18.5 - "AP Backups" for more information about backing up AP data.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 17 - Database Maintenance
Chapter 17 - Database Maintenance
17.1 Backing up the APAC Database
APAC creates databases to store information for various services such as Calling Name, CLASS
GTT and Call Management Features. These databases are stored on the PC and should be backed
up on a regular basis.
Use the backup software of your choice to make a backup of these databases. The database files
created by APAC are kept in the same directory that was specified during the APAC installation.
For example, the APAC software is installed in the C:\PROGRAM FILES\APAC directory by
default. Simply back up all of the files contained in the C:\PROGRAM FILES\APAC directory.
If APAC was installed on a network, make your backup of the directory specified during the
install (e.g., N:\APAC).
phone, APAC does not create a CMF database on the PC. Rather, the CMF data is retained in the
AP itself. However, you can use the APAC software to back up the CMF data stored in the AP.
See Chapter 10 - "Call Management Features (CMF)" for CMF information. You should store the
CMF backup file in the same directory as the one determined above so that this file is included in
your regular backup.
17.2 Viewing Database Status
Use the View|Database Status command to display a status summary of the APAC service data-
bases for the selected AP.
Figure 17-1 Database Status Window
The following information is displayed for each AP service:
License Quantity This is the maximum number of entries currently allowed by the AP license.
Used Entries This is the number of entries currently in use.

Version: 01
Available Entries This is the number of entries still available for use before the maximum licensed
quantity is reached.
Pending Transfer This is the number of entries that have been added/changed/deleted and have not
yet been transferred to the AP.
Total Records This is the total number of records in the service database.
In general, this number will match the Used Entries. However, for databases such
as Calling Name, where history information is recorded for changes to the calling
name entries, then this number reflects the amount of history information as well as
the current used entries.
This number may also be different from the Used Entries amount when entries have
been deleted but not yet transferred to the AP. When entries are deleted the Used
Entries amount is immediately decremented, however, a database record of the
deletion still exists in the service database until that service database information is
transferred to the AP. Once the entry has been deleted from the AP, then the APAC
service database record is also deleted.
A ‘N/A’ in any column indicates this category of information is not applicable to this service
database. A ‘---’ in any column indicates this information is not currently available to APAC.
You may use the right-hand mouse button to select one of the service databases and display a list-
ing of its current contents (this listing is the same as selecting one of the other View commands in
the View menu).
17.3 Cleaning Up the Calling Name Database
Because APAC records history information about changes made to the calling name database, the
database may become very large. Therefore, it may be desirable to delete history information that
is no longer required. It is expected that the clean-up process will need to be performed quite
infrequently, perhaps one time per year. If a permanent record of the history information is
required, the database should be backed up using the normal site backup procedure before execut-
ing the clean-up command (see Section 17.1).
Select Tools|Database Maintenance|Clean-up Calling Name Database to display the Clean-up

options window.

Version: 01
Figure 17-2 Clean-up Options Window
There are three options that may be selected to control which history records are deleted. They
include:
1. Clean-up History Information - This option can delete history records from all calling
name entries. You must specify the highest level of history records to save for all calling
name entries. This highest history level is entered as a number 0 through 9. If you enter
'0', all history records will be deleted. Therefore, the Clean-up Deleted Names and Clean-
up Deleted NPA-NXXs options are disabled, because deleting all history records automat-
ically removes the deleted names and deleted NPA-NXX history records. If you enter '1',
then all the history records at levels 2 through 10 are deleted. If you enter '9 ', only history
level 10 records are deleted.
2. Clean-up Deleted Names - This option deletes all of the history records associated with
calling names that have been previously deleted. When this option is selected, the Clean-
up Deleted NPA-NXXs option is disabled, because removing history records for deleted
calling name entries automatically removes the history records associated with deleted
NPA-NXXs.
3. Clean-up Deleted NPA-NXXs - This option deletes all of the calling name history
records that are associated with NPA-NXXs that have been deleted from the NPA-NXX
database.
Once the desired option(s) is selected, click the Perform DB Clean button to initiate the clean-up
process. A progress window will be displayed showing the clean-up progress. If multiple clean-
up options are selected, the clean-up process will make multiple passes through the calling name
database. The progress window will indicate what action is being performed and the progress of
the current action.
To cancel the clean-up process, select the Cancel button in the progress window.

Version: 01
17.4 Exporting Calling Names to a File
Select the Tools|Database Maintenance|Export Calling Name To File... function to export calling
names to a file. The intent of this function is to allow a calling name database to be transferred
from one AP system to another. While an export is performed, a file is created to contain the call-
ing names in the same format that is needed for a calling name file import, (see Section 9.4 - "File
Input", for more information on importing calling names from a file). The steps outlined below
explain how to perform a calling name export.
1. When the calling name export function is invoked, a calling name selection window will
be displayed (see Figure 17-3, below). From this window some, or all, of the calling
names can be selected for exporting to the file. To select all of the calling names in the
database, click on the Select All button, . To select only those names from certain
NPA-NXXs, click the checkbox, , next to the intended NPA-NXX. To stop the export
calling name function, press the Cancel button,
Figure 17-3 Export Calling Name Selection Window
2. After the intended calling names have been selected, click the Start Export button,
, to proceed with the export.
3. Next, the name and location of the calling name file must be specified. Enter this informa-
tion into the Save As dialog box and click the Save button, , to continue.
4. The export function will proceed by writing the specified calling names to the file indi-
cated above. For large calling name databases, the save process may take considerable
time to complete. Progress toward finishing the save process will be indicated in a
progress window as shown in Figure 17-4.
Figure 17-4 Export Calling Name Progress Window

Version: 01
5. When the save process is complete, the file may be viewed with a suitable text editor to
ensure the specified names were, indeed, saved to the file. Once the file has been verified,
it is ready to be imported to another AP database (see Section 9.4 - "File Input", for more
information on importing calling names from a file).
17.5 Conversion for NPA Split
17.5.1 Scope
When a telephone company undergoes a NPA split, the calling name database in the AP mustalso
be updated with the new NPA in order for the name to be delivered. However, the AP calling
name conversion to the new NPA should not take place until the switch has been updated to
identify the affected DNs with the new NPA. A telephone company will normally undergo a
‘permissive dialing’ period during which time the switch will allow call completion for both old
and new NPAs. It is suggested that the AP deliver names using the new NPA during this time as
well. This, however, is dictated by local telephone company procedures. Queries received by the
AP from the switch will continue to be made for the old NPA until the switch has been updated
with the new NPA for the affected DNs. Therefore, the calling name database in the AP should
not be updated with the new NPA until the switch has been updated with the new NPA.
The Tools|Database Maintenance|Change Calling Name NPA... function is to be used when a

local NPA is undergoing a split to accommodate a new NPA. This utility will quickly perform
mass updates to the APAC Calling Name and related database tables to convert selected NPA-
NXXs to use the new NPA. Optionally, the Global Title Translation entries can also be updated.
The following are requirements, recommendations, and conditions that must be satisfied before
this conversion is initiated:
• A backup of the current APAC database files should be performed.
• Use APAC's Clean-up Calling Name Database function to remove any unnecessary calling
name history records.
• There must be no Calling Name, NPA-NXX, or Global Title Translation changes that are
pending transfer to the AP. If there are changes pending transfer, the user will be notified of
the condition and the conversion will not be initiated. These pending changes should be
transferred to the AP using APAC's data transfer function. The Calling Name NPA Change...
function can be re-attempted after the transfer has completed.
• The conversion process requires exclusive access to the APAC database. Therefore, other
APAC users cannot be using APAC while the conversion is in progress.
• The converted databases should be transferred to the AP during off-peak hours (see Step 6
in Section 17.5.2 - "Performing the NPA Change"). Since the transfer process first deletes
the old NPA entries from the AP before adding the new, a temporary service outage will
exist for those entries.

Version: 01
17.5.2 Performing the NPA Change
To perform the NPA change, complete the following steps:

1. Select the Tools|Database Maintenance|Change Calling Name NPA... function. The fol-
lowing window will appear.
Figure 17-5 AP Conversion Window
2. Enter the new NPA in the NPA field.

3. Next, select the NPA-NXXs from the list that are affected by the NPA split and are to be
converted to the new NPA. The following actions will occur during the conversion pro-
cess:
a. For each selected NPA-NXX, the old NPA-NXX is marked for deletion in the APAC
NPA-NXX database and a new NPA-NXX entry is created with the new NPA value.
b. For each calling name entry whose phone number is within a checked NPA-NXX, the
old calling name entry is marked for deletion in the APAC Calling Name database and
a new calling name entry is added with the new NPA value in the phone number field.
Also, any associated calling name history entries in the database are converted to the
new NPA.

Version: 01
4. Check or uncheck the "Update Global Title Translation entries" option. If this option is
checked, all CLASS Global Title Translation (GTT) database entries that contain the
selected NPA-NXXs will be updated to support the new NPA.
NOTE: When processing the GTT entries, new entries are created that mirror
the existing entries (with the NPA changed), but the existing entries are not
deleted. Therefore, before the GTT entries can be changed, you must verify that
your licensed quantity of GTT entries will accommodate the additional, new-
NPA entries. If this utility detects that the license quantity will be violated by
the conversion, you will be notified and the conversion will not be initiated. The
existing entries are not deleted because GTT is a routing function that may route
based on dialed digits and NPA splits generally allow some "permissive dialing"
period where both the old and new NPAs can be used to reach a subscriber.
Therefore, both GTT entries may be temporarily needed to correctly perform the
GTT function. After the permissive dialing period has ended, the old GTT
entries should be deleted.
5. To begin the conversion process, select OK.

6. After the conversion to the APAC databases has been completed, the changes must be
transferred to the AP to take effect. (It is recommended that this be done during off-peak
hours.) In APAC, select Tools|AP Transfer|To AP. The Transfer To AP window will be
displayed. The changes made to the affected databases will be shown in this window.
7. Click Start Transfer to transfer the new databases to the AP. A progress bar near the top of
the screen will indicate the transfer progress. When complete, the message ‘transfer com-
plete’ will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
8. End of procedure.
17.6 Compress Database
IMPORTANT: Appropriate backups of the APAC databases should exist or be created

before performing this function.
As you change data in a database, the database file can become fragmented and use more disk
space than necessary. Periodically, you should compress your database to defragment the data-
base file. The compacted database is usually smaller and often results in a performance improve-
ment.

Version: 01
To compress a specified APAC database, select Tools|Database Maintenance|Compress Data-

base. A database selection window will be presented that lists all existing APAC databases.
Select the database in the list that you wish to compress, and then select the Compress button. If
you wish to exit this function without compressing a database, then select the Cancel button.
You must not be accessing the selected database while you compress it. In a multi-user environ-
ment (e.g., when APAC is installed on a network), other users cannot have the selected database
open while you're compacting it. If the database is not available for exclusive use, an error will
occur.
Because the compress function creates a temporary copy of the database (in your \Windows\Temp
directory), you must have enough disk space on your PC for this temporary, duplicate database
file. This temporary file is the compressed database file. After the compress operation completes
normally, this file is automatically moved and replaces the original database file. If any error is
detected during the actual compression step, the original database file is not replaced.
17.7 Repair Database
IMPORTANT: Appropriate backups of the APAC databases should exist or be created

before performing this function.
Use this function if you need to attempt to repair a corrupted APAC database. Corruption may be
caused by an incomplete write operation. This can occur if APAC is closed unexpectedly because
of a power outage or computer hardware problem. Similarly, corruption may occur when the
APAC database is stored on a network server and a network outage or server outage occurs during
a database update operation.
Database corruption will normally manifest itself as a database that is behaving unpredictably,
such as repeated, unexpected, and unexplained error messages.
To repair a corrupted database, select Tools|Database Maintenance|Repair Database. When this

function is selected, a database selection window will be displayed that lists all existing APAC
databases. Select the database in the list that you wish to repair, and then select the Repair button.
If you wish to exit this function without repairing a database, then select the Cancel button.
You must not be accessing the selected database while you repair it. In a multi-user environment
(e.g., when APAC is installed on a network) other users cannot have the selected database open
while you're repairing it. If the database is not available for exclusive use, an error will occur.
To repair the Administrative database, a “master” login must be performed before the repair pro-
cess is initiated (see Section 3.1 for “master” login instructions).

Version: 01
NOTE: After repairing a database, it is good practice to compact it using the Compress
Database function to defragment the file and to recover disk space.
17.8 Announcement/Fragment Audit
The Announcement/Fragment Audit command allows the APAC database to be synchronized

with the fragment and announcement files that are currently present on the selected AP. To
access this command, select Tools|Database Maintenance|Announcement/Fragment Audit.
When the Announcement/Fragment Audit menu option is selected, APAC first examines its data-
base to determine what announcements and fragments APAC has as deployed to the currently
selected AP. Then the AP system is queried for a list of all the existing announcement and frag-
ment files. Once this information is collected, a window similar to the following example will be
displayed.
Figure 17-6 Audit Fragments and Announcements Window
The Audit Fragments and Announcements window contains a Fragments tab and an Announce-
ments tab. Select the appropriate tab to display a list of fragment audit information (see Section
17.8.1) or a list of announcement audit information (see Section 17.8.2).

Version: 01
17.8.1 Audit Fragments
The fragment list is displayed by default, and shows all the fragments retrieved from the APAC
database and the AP system. It also shows where each fragment currently exists. The entries in
the APAC DB column may have one of the following indicators:
• 'X' - indicates the associated fragment has been marked as deployed to the current AP sys-
tem.
• Blank - indicates the associated fragment, according to APAC, has not been deployed to the
current AP system.
Entries in the columns labeled Unit 0 or Unit 1 may have one of the following indicators:
• ‘X’ - indicates the associated fragment file was found and was configured correctly on the
corresponding AP unit.
• Blank - indicates the associated fragment was not found on the corresponding AP unit.
• ‘Size:n’ - indicates that the fragment file was found on both AP units, but the size of the
fragment file is different in each unit. This typically means that the fragment file is corrupt
on one of the AP units. The value of ‘n’ in ‘Size:n’ is the size of the fragment file on the
corresponding AP unit.
• ‘Fragment file not used’ - indicates the fragment file exists on the corresponding AP unit,
but the file is not assigned a fragment ID. The AP unit cannot play a fragment file that is not
assigned an ID. Any announcement that requires the associated fragment will not be voiced
correctly.
• ‘Assigned to a missing file’ - indicates that the associated fragment is assigned to a fragment
file that is not present on the AP unit. Any announcement that requires the associated frag-
ment will not be voiced correctly.
The Summary list, as the name implies, summarizes the fragment audit information. It shows:
• the number of fragments found in the APAC database
• the number of fragments found in each AP unit
• the number of fragment file size discrepancies found
• the number of fragments assigned in each AP unit
The radio buttons within the Show group affect the fragment list display. When the All option is
selected (the initial state), all of the fragments found either in the APAC database or on the AP
unit(s) will be displayed in the fragment list. When the Differences Only option is selected, the
fragment list will contain only those fragments where a discrepancy is found between the APAC
database and the AP system or a discrepancy is found between the AP units.
In a properly configured system, the number of fragments in the APAC database, the number of
fragments in each AP unit, and the number of fragments assigned in each unit will be identical.
Also, the number of file size discrepancies will be zero. If this is not the case, corrective action
should be taken. This typically would be to use the Update APAC DB button (see the description

Version: 01
below) to synchronize the APAC database with the AP system. Then use APAC's Tools|AP
Transfer|Fragments|Load New menu command (see Section 6.5) to transfer the missing frag-
ments to the AP.
The Update APAC DB button will synchronize the APAC database to match the fragments and
announcements (see the Update APAC DB button description in Section 17.8.2 for information on
how the announcement synchronization is handled) contained on the AP system. If there is a dis-
crepancy between the AP units (e.g., either the fragment file is contained in only one Unit, or
there is a file size mismatch), then the associated fragment will not be added to the APAC data-
base. If the disagreeing fragment already exists in the APAC database, it will be removed from
the APAC database. This will allow the fragment to be re-transferred to the AP system at a later
time, thus correcting the inter-unit discrepancy.
17.8.2 Audit Announcements
The announcement list shows all the announcements retrieved from the APAC database and both
AP units. The first column in the announcement list displays the number and type of each
announcement. The APAC DB, Unit 0, and Unit 1 columns show where each announcement cur-
rently exists. They may have one of the following indicators:
• 'X' - indicates the announcement is present in that location.
• Blank - indicates the announcement is not present in that location.
• ‘Ver <n>’ - indicates the announcement file was found, but the announcement versions do
not match between the three locations. The value of ‘<n>’ in ‘Ver <n>’ is the version of the
announcement file in the corresponding location.
The Description column displays the announcement name.
The Summary section displays the number of announcements found in the APAC database and in
each AP unit.
The radio buttons within the Show group affect the announcement list display. When the All
option is selected (the initial state), all of the announcements found in the APAC database or
either AP unit will be displayed in the announcement list. When the Differences Only option is
selected, the announcement list will contain only those announcements where a discrepancy is
found between the APAC database and the AP system or a discrepancy is found between the AP
units.
In a properly configured system, the number of announcements in the APAC database and the
number of announcements in each unit will be identical. Also, when the Differences Only option
is selected, the number of announcement version discrepancies in the announcement list will be
zero. If this is not the case, corrective action should be taken. This typically would be to use the
Update APAC DB button (see the description below) to synchronize the APAC database with the
AP system. Then use APAC's Tools|AP Transfer|Announcements|Load New menu command
(see Section 6.3) to transfer the missing announcements to the AP.

Version: 01
The Update APAC DB button will synchronize the APAC database to match the announcements
and fragments (see the Update APAC DB button description in Section 17.8.1 for information on
how the fragment synchronization is handled) contained on the AP system. If there is a discrep-
ancy between the AP units (e.g., either the announcement file is contained in only one Unit, or
there is a file version mismatch), then the associated announcement will not be added to the
APAC database. If the disagreeing announcement already exists in the APAC database, it will be
removed from the APAC database. This will allow the announcement to be re-transferred to the
AP system at a later time, thus correcting the inter-unit discrepancy.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Chapter 18 - AP Maintenance Functions
Chapter 18 - AP Maintenance Functions
18.1 AP Command Line
NOTE: The APAC function described in this section allows direct manipulation of the AP
through access to AP commands and through access to files stored on the AP's disk. These
functions should not be used except under the direction of factory personnel or as specifi-
cally described in the documented operation procedures. Before you use these functions,
you must completely understand what actions to perform and the consequences of those
actions. Any mistakes made using these functions could have serious ramifications. If
there is an APAC function available to perform the desired AP modification, it is very
strongly recommended that the APAC function be used to update the AP rather than these
direct access methods.
This AP Command Line function provides access to the AP command line where AP commands
can be entered and the response displayed.
To establish direct communication with the selected AP, select Tools|AP Command Line or click
the AP Command Line button, , on the toolbar. When the communication link with the AP is
established, the AP Command Line window will be displayed.
Figure 18-1 AP Command Line Window
AP commands are entered in the combobox at the bottom of the AP Command Line window.
After a command has been typed, press <ENTER>, or select the Submit button to transmit the
command to the AP. The AP response to entered commands is displayed in the text field above

Version: 01
the combobox. If desired, previously entered commands may be selected from the combobox
drop-down list. To display the drop-down list, select the arrow button on the right-hand side of
the combobox. The command may be edited before transmitting it to the AP.
If the output from the AP is more than the text field can display, the scroll-bar on the right-hand
side of the window may be used to scroll backward and forward through the output.
To exit the AP Command Line mode, close the Command Line window.
18.2 AP File Manager
NOTE: The APAC function described in this section allows direct manipulation of the AP
through access to AP commands and through access to files stored on the AP's disk. These
functions should not be used except under the direction of factory personnel or as specifi-
cally described in the documented operation procedures. Before you use these functions,
you must completely understand what actions to perform and the consequences of those
actions. Any mistakes made using these functions could have serious ramifications. If
there is an APAC function available to perform the desired AP modification, it is very
strongly recommended that the APAC function be used to update the AP rather than these
direct access methods.
The AP File Manager allows you to display and manipulate files stored on the AP's disk.
Select Tools|AP File Manager to begin opening the File Manager. Initially, the Collect Optional
Files window (Figure 18-2) will be displayed.
Figure 18-2 Collect Optional Files Window
Checking optional file type checkboxes and then pressing the OK button will include files belong-
ing to the selected optional file types in the file request sent to the selected AP. If the Cancel but-
ton is pressed, then the file collection continues with no optional files requested. If the OK or
Cancel button is not pressed within eight seconds, the Collect Option Files window will automat-
ically close and the file collection will continue with no optional files requested.

Version: 01
Once the file collection is initiated, the File Manager window (Figure 18-3) will be displayed with
the current AP shown in the title bar of the window. All of the files in the AP Unit 0, and Unit 1
will also be shown. Please note that in the following description, the unit to which the APAC
connects is referred to as the "local" unit.
Figure 18-3 File Manager Window
A pop-up menu is available by clicking on your right mouse button. The following commands are
available from this menu:
View – List Displays the files in a list format, as shown in the example above.
This is the default display for the window.
View – Details Displays the files in a detail format. The file information will be
displayed in the following columns: File, Blocks, Bytes, Date,
Type, ExtID, and File System.
Filter – All Files (*.*) Displays all files.
Filter – Fragments (*.snd) Displays only the fragments.
Filter – SLPs (*.rap;*.aph) Displays only the SLPs.
Filter – Script Files (*.bat) Displays only the script files.
Filter – Backup Files (*.bkp; *.lst) Displays only the backup files.
Filter – Program Files (*.exe;*.bin) Displays only the AP operating software files.
Filter – Logs (*.log) Displays only the logs.

Version: 01
Filter – Voice Mail (*.vm) Displays only Voice Mail message files.
Display File Allows you to view the selected file. For example, if you wanted
to view a batch file, you could highlight the file and then select
this command. The contents of the file would be displayed. The
availability of this comamnd depends on the file selected (see
Table 18-1).
File Transfer – Transfer to Mate Transfers the selected file to the mate AP.
File Transfer – APAC to AP Transfers a selected file from the APAC PC to the AP. When this
operation is selected, a file selection window is displayed which
allows the user to select the desired PC file, and the AP file sys-
tem that is the target of the transfer.
File Transfer – AP to APAC Transfers the selected file from the AP to the APAC PC. When
this operation is selected, a file selection window is displayed
allowing the user to select the name and location for the retrieved
file. The availability of this command depends on the file
selected (see Table 18-1).
File Connection Mechanism

System LAN Serial
SFS File located on Unit 0 or 1 File located on the locally
connected unit only
VMFS File located on Unit 0 or 1 File located on Unit 0 or 1
Table 18-1 Transfer From AP Command Availability
To exit this window, select the in the upper right corner of the window.
18.3 Shutdown AP Units
The Shutdown AP Units command must be used when, and only when, one or both AP units are
going to be powered off. The shutdown operation prepares the AP operating software for the loss
of power by shutting down certain system activities that may be adversely affected by the power
outage.
To access this command, select Tools|AP Transfer|Shutdown AP Units. The following window
will display.

Version: 01
Figure 18-4 Shutdown AP Units Window
To start the shutdown operation for a specific unit, press the appropriate button, Shutdown Unit 0
or Shutdown Unit 1. The shutdown operation will, at the very least, shutdown the AP's disk file
system. This will ensure that no disk access is being performed when the AP unit is powered off.
Disk accesses during a power-down may result in an unrecoverable corruption of the disk's file
system.
You also have the option to shutdown all Service Logic Programs (SLPs) during the AP unit shut-
down operation. This is recommended because stopping the SLPs will prevent the SLPs from
writing to AP disk logs, which in turn will allow the AP's disk file system to be shutdown more
quickly. When this option is selected, the SS7 links to the affected unit will first be taken out of
service, then the SLPs will be shutdown. The SS7 links are removed from service to prevent any
further messages from attempting to access SLPs in the affected unit.
NOTE: If there are no SLPs deployed to the AP system, then the "Shutdown All SLPs"
option will appear grayed and is not available for selection.
To exit this window, select Exit or the in the upper right corner of the window.
For more information about SLPs, please refer to Chapter 14 - "Service Logic Management".
18.4 Restart AP Units
WARNING! This command will cause a temporary outage in the restarted AP unit.
Select the Tools|AP Transfer|Restart AP Units command to restart one or both of the selected
AP’s units. Restart operations perform the system startup process similar to powering up the unit.
The restarted unit is removed from service, memory tests are performed, the AP’s generic soft-
ware program is reloaded from the AP’s disk, and the service data is transferred from the mate

Version: 01
unit (if the mate unit is available). Once the software is loaded and running, the unit is again
available for service. The amount of time the unit will be out of service is approximately 10 min-
utes.
The restart command is typically used after performing a Program Load of a new AP software
release. The restart will cause the new software release to be loaded and executed.
When this APAC command is selected, a connection with the AP is established. Once communi-
cation with the AP is established, the restart window is displayed.
Figure 18-5 AP Restart Window
This window shows the current status and current software release of the AP units. The unit to
which APAC is directly communicating is referred to as the 'Local' unit. The other unit, available
via the local unit's Ethernet tieline, is considered the 'Mate' unit.
To restart a unit, click the associated restart button. Only one unit may be restarted at a time.
When a unit restart is in progress, both restart buttons are disabled. The status line will report the
progress of the restart and will indicate 'Available' when the unit has successfully completed the
restart.
It is recommended that a restart not be performed unless both AP units are reporting a status of
'Available'. Restarting one of the units when the mate unit is in an unknown state may result in a
complete loss of processing capability of the entire AP complex and also a loss of all on-line ser-
vice data. If this should happen, all of the service data would need to be transferred from the
APAC database to the AP.

Version: 01
18.5 AP Backups
18.5.1 Backing Up All Tables on the AP
Use the Tools|AP Backups|Backup All Now command to back up the contents of all AP tables to
the AP's disk. The feature data backed up by this command includes: NPA-NXX list, GTT data,
Calling Names, all SLP tables, and Change Number Announcement data.
To do this, complete the following steps:

1. Select Tools|AP Backups|Backup All Now.
2. You will be prompted, "Backup the contents of all tables on the "XXX AP" to its disk. OK
or Cancel." XXX will be the name of selected AP.
3. Select OK to continue with the backup. Select Cancel to exit.
4. A connection will be made with the AP, and the data will be backed up.
18.5.2 Scheduling AP Backups
To set the schedule for the AP to automatically back up the databases, select Tools|AP
Backup|Schedule AP Backup. Please refer to Section 16.2.1 - "Scheduling AP Backups" for a
detailed description of this command.
18.6 AP Alarm Status
You can use APAC to show and monitor AP alarms. To do this, select Tools|AP Mainte-
nance|Show Alarms. When this menu item is selected, APAC will collect the current alarm infor-
mation from the AP and display the AP Alarm Status window, as shown in the following example.

Version: 01
Figure 18-6 AP Alarm Status Window
18.6.1 Alarm Summary Indicators
There are three alarm summary indicators: a red major (MJR) alarm indicator, a yellow minor
(MNR) alarm indicator, and a green OK (no-alarms) indicator.
• If there are no alarms present on the AP system, the green OK indicator will be highlighted.
• If there is any alarm on the AP system, the green OK indicator will appear dimmed.
• If there is one or more minor alarms present on the AP system, the yellow minor alarm indi-
cator will flash, otherwise it will appear dimmed.
• If there is one or more major alarms present on the AP system, the red major alarm indicator
will flash; otherwise it will appear dimmed.
18.6.2 Alarm List
The alarm list will display the individual alarms present on the AP system. The alarm list shows a
row for each item that is in an alarm state, the level of the alarm, the unit number where the item
is in alarm, and additional information that identifies the possible cause of the alarm. See the AP
Installation and Maintenance Manual for more information about the AP devices and items that
may trigger an alarm.
In most cases, the alarm will be cleared by the system when the reason for the alarm has been cor-
rected. However, some alarms have to be cleared manually. For instance, the SYS alarm, which
may signify a system restart, must be manually cleared to acknowledge the occurrence of a sys-
tem restart. Again, see the AP Installation and Maintenance Manual for more information about
specific alarms.

Version: 01
To manually clear an alarm, select the alarm in the Alarm List, then press the Clear button. Mul-
tiple alarms can be selected and cleared simultaneously by holding the Shift or Ctrl key down
while selecting alarms.
18.6.3 Audible Alarm Notification
APAC can sound an audible alarm at the PC when it detects new alarms. To enable the audible
alarm notification, select Yes in the Audible Alarm Enabled group. To disable audible alarm noti-
fications, select No in the Audible Alarm Enabled group. When the audible alarm is triggered, the
PC will beep approximately every 2 seconds. Optionally, if your PC is equipped to play wave
audio files, you may use a wave-audio sound file (.wav) as the alarm notification sound. Simply
copy the desired wave-audio file to the location <APAC-folder>\support\ (e.g., C:\APAC\sup-
port\) and rename the file to alarm.wav. Also, when the audible alarm is triggered, a button with a
picture of a bell (circled in the following sample window) will appear. Press this button to
acknowledge and silence the audible alarm.
Figure 18-7 Audible Alarm Notification
18.6.4 Monitor Interval
APAC can automatically check and collect the AP alarm status at specified intervals. Simply
select the desired frequency from the Monitor Interval. As long as the AP Alarm Status window
is open, APAC will check and collect the AP alarm status at the specified frequency. When this
window is closed, the alarm monitor function will cease until the window is reopened.
NOTE If you are performing some other APAC activity that communicates with the AP
(e.g. service data transfer) while the alarm monitor function is active, the alarm monitoring
will be temporarily suspended while other APAC communication with the AP is in
progress. When the other communication is ended, then the alarm monitor will resume.
To immediately update the alarm status window with the current AP alarms, press the F5 key.

Version: 01
18.7 Trunk Group Status
The Tools|AP Maintenance|Trunks… command allows AP administrators to view and change the
status of T1 circuits and T1 circuit channels. To access this command, select Tools|AP Mainte-
nance|Trunks... . The Trunk Status window will display.
Figure 18-8 Trunk Status Window
This window is divided into two panes. The left pane shows a hierarchical, tree view of the AP
system's T1 circuits. The right pane shows detailed status information about the item selected in
the left pane.
Left Pane Selection Right Pane Display

T1 Circuits Status of all the T1 circuits in the AP system.
Unit: 0 Status of the two T1 circuits in AP unit 0.
Unit: 1 Status of the two T1 circuits in AP unit 1.
T1: 0 Status of the T1 channels for T1 #0 within the associated AP unit.
T1: 1 Status of the T1 channels for T1 #1 within the associated AP unit.
TG xx Status of the T1 channels for a particular trunk group (on both units).
18.7.1 Right-hand Pane Information
The information displayed in the right-hand pane changes based on the selection in the left-hand
pane. The right-hand pane will display the overall status of T1 circuits when either 'T1 Circuits',
'Unit: 0', or 'Unit: 1' is selected in the left-hand pane. The right-hand pane will display the status
of individual T1 channels when either 'T1: 0' or 'T1: 1' is selected in the left-hand pane.

Version: 01
18.7.2 Overall T1 Status Information
Figure 18-9 Trunk Status Excerpt - Overall T1 Status
Shown above is a portion of the Trunk Status window showing the overall T1 status of both units.
Following is a brief description of the information contained within the window.
• Admin. State - The administrative state of the T1 circuit. This indicates the overall status of
the T1 circuit, and will display states such as MMB (man-made-busy), SMB (system-made-
busy), INS (in-service).
• Yellow Alarm - This column indicates the Yellow Alarm status of the T1 circuit. A Yes or
No will be displayed indicating the presence or absence of a Yellow alarm on the T1 circuit.
• Blue Alarm - This column indicates the Blue Alarm status of the T1 circuit. A Yes or No
will be displayed indicating the presence or absence of a Blue alarm on the T1 circuit.
18.7.3 T1 Channel Status Information
Figure 18-10 Trunk Status Excerpt - T1 Channel Status
Shown above is a portion of the Trunk Status window showing the T1 channel status of Unit 0,
T1:0. Following is a brief description of the information contained within the window.
• Admin. State - The administrative state of the T1 channel. This indicates the status of the
individual T1 channel, and will display states such as MMB (man-made-busy), SMB (sys-
tem-made-busy), INS (in-service).
• CP State - The Call Processing state of the T1 channel. The column will indicate whether
the associated channel is IDLE (not currently in use) or BUSY (currently in use).
• SwitchHook State - The Switch Hook state of the T1 channel. The column will indicate
whether the associated channel is IDLE (not currently in use), ON HOOK (not currently in
use), or OFF HOOK (currently in use).
• Auxiliary States - The Auxiliary States of a T1 channel. An example of Auxiliary States
are ISUP “local-blocked” or “remote-blocked” conditions that may be present on ISUP
trunk group channels.

Version: 01
18.7.4 Trunk Group Channel Status Information
Figure 18-11 Trunk Status Excerpt - MF Trunk Group Status
Figure 18-12 Trunk Status Excerpt - ISUP Trunk Group Status
The Trunk Status window shows the channel status of trunk groups when a trunk group is selected
in the left pane of the window. A portion of the window is shown above, first when the selected
trunk group is a MF trunk group, and secondly when the selected trunk group is an ISUP trunk
group. Following is a brief description of the information contained in the window.
• Admin. State - The administrative state of the T1 channel. This indicates the status of the
individual T1 channel, and will display states such as MMB (man-made-busy), SMB (sys-
tem-made-busy), and INS (in-service).
• CP State - The Call Processing state of the T1 channel. This indicates whether the associ-
ated channel is IDLE (not currently in use) or BUSY (currently in use).
• SwitchHook State - The Switch Hook State of the T1 channel. This will indicate whether
the associated channel is IDLE (not currently in use), ON HOOK (not currently in use), or
OFF HOOK (currently in use). The Switch Hook state is not a valid state for ISUP trunk
groups; this column will be labeled CIC for ISUP trunk groups.
• CIC - The CIC (Circuit Identification Code) of the ISUP trunk. These numbers are unique
numbers (unique within the AP system) that identify each trunk in an ISUP trunk group.
They were assigned during trunk configuration.
• Auxiliary States - The Auxiliary states of a T1 channel. An example of Auxiliary States are
ISUP “local-blocked” or “remote blocked” conditions that may be present on ISUP trunk
group channels.

Version: 01
18.7.5 Trunk Maintenance Operations
The trunk maintenance functions are available by selecting an operation button in the button-bar
across the top of the Trunk Maintenance window, or by clicking the right mouse button in the
right pane, then selecting the desired operation from the pop-up menu.
Figure 18-13 Trunk Status Window showing Maintenance Operations
• Refresh Screen - This operation refreshes the Trunk Maintenance display with the latest
trunk status from the AP system.
• Busy Device - This operation is available when one or more devices are selected in the
right-hand pane. The selected device(s) will be removed from service and placed in a man-
made-busy (MMB) administrative state.
• Restart Device - This operation is available when one or more devices are selected in the
right-hand pane. The selected device(s) will be enabled for service and placed in an admin-
istrative state that is other than man-made-busy (MMB), that is a SMB or INS state. The
device will be placed in in-service if it is functioning properly.
18.8 SS7 Maintenance
Use the Tools | AP Maintenance | SS7 menu item to view and administer the status of the AP’s
SS7 network information (see Chapter 7 for information on configuring the SS7 network). When
this menu item is selected, APAC will query the AP for the current SS7 status information.
APAC will analyze this information and display a window similar to the examples shown below.
Figure 18-14 SS7 Maintenance Window without Linksets

Version: 01
Figure 18-15 SS7 Maintenance Window with Linksets
The SS7 Maintenance window displays a pictorial view of the SS7 network from the AP’s point-
of-view. The AP is shown with its provisioned SS7 links connected to the far-end STP/SRP(s).
Any expansion point codes used by global title translation are shown as point codes connected to
the STP/SRP(s).
The AP, STP/SRP, and expansion point code pictures can be re-positioned by moving the mouse
pointer over a picture, pressing and holding the left-hand mouse button, and dragging the picture
to the desired position in the window by moving the mouse. Once the picture is in the desired
location, release the left-hand mouse button. The link connections will automatically be read-
justed to the new picture position.
18.8.1 Status Display
The AP SS7 link colors indicate their current status:
Green Link is in-service and is capable of carrying SS7 traffic.
Yellow Link is in-service, but has some other status that is preventing the link
from being used by SS7 traffic, (e.g., the link has been inhibited or is
in a local processor outage state).
Red Link is in a system-made-busy (SMB) state.
Black Link is in a man-made-busy (MMB) state.
The detailed AP SS7 link status can be displayed by positioning the mouse pointer on the SLC
label (if linksets are not configured) or the LinkID label (if linksets are configured) of one of the
AP SS7 links. After the mouse is motionless over the SLC label for approximately ½ second, a

Version: 01
bubble display will appear that will indicate the AP unit that the link is connected to, the link
number within that unit, and the current status of the link. If linksets have been configured, the
bubble display will also indicate the linkset the link is assigned to, and the SLC value of the link
within its linkset.
The link colors to the expansion point codes indicate the current availability status of the expan-
sion point codes:
Green Expansion point code is available. SS7 messages can be sent from the
AP to that signaling point.
Red Expansion point code is unavailable. SS7 messages cannot be sent

from the AP to that signaling point.
The expansion point code availability status can also be displayed by positioning the mouse
pointer on a selected expansion point code picture. After the mouse is motionless over the picture
for approximately ½ second, a bubble display will appear that will show the current status of that
expansion point code.
18.8.2 Link Management Commands
The status of the AP’s links can be modified through the use of the link management commands.
To access the link management commands, position the mouse pointer over the SLC label of the
AP link whose status is to be changed. Click the right-hand mouse button. A popup menu will
appear that displays the link management commands. To initiate a link management command,
move the mouse pointer to the desired command in the menu and click the left-hand mouse but-
ton. The following commands are available:
Link Test -> Normal Initiate a test procedure on the selected link.
Link Test -> Special Initiate a special test procedure on the selected link.
Busy Creates a man-made-busy (MMB) condition for the selected link.
Return To Service Clears the man-made-busy (MMB) condition for the selected link.
Inhibit Initiates the SS7 link inhibit procedure for the selected link.
Uninhibit Removes the local inhibit status from the selected link.

Version: 01
Local Processor Outage -> Sets the local processor outage status on all SS7 links in the AP unit that the
Set LPO selected SS7 link is associated with.
Local Processor Outage -> Clears the local processor outage status on all SS7 links in the AP unit that
Clear LPO the selected SS7 link is associated with.
Local Processor Outage -> If the databases between the two AP units are consistent, Clear the local
Clear LPO, Compare DB processor outage status on all SS7 links in the AP unit that the selected SS7
link is associated with.
18.9 Ethernet Switch
The management and configuration of the ethernet switch hardware is performed through the
Ethernet Switch Config window (see Figure 18-17 below). Selecting the following APAC menu
accesses this window: Tools|AP Maintenance|Ethernet Switch. When this menu is selected,
APAC queries the selected AP for the current status and settings of the ethernet switch hardware.
If no ethernet switch is present on the specified AP, a message box similar to Figure 18-16 will
appear and the Ethernet Switch Config window will be closed.
Figure 18-16 Ethernet Switch Not Found Message
Figure 18-17 Ethernet Switch Config Window

Version: 01
The Ethernet Switch Config window has two tabs, one for each AP unit. Each tab displays the
ethernet switch status and settings for the respective unit. This includes the display of six ethernet
switch ports on that unit, labeled with their interface number specified on the AP hardware
(J1400-J1402, J1500-J1502). The Advanced Options button (described later) provides access to
additional operations for the selected unit, and the Save button (described later) transfers all
changes to the AP.
The display of each ethernet switch port is divided into the following sections: RJ45 connector
icon, Status indicators, Config option buttons. These sections are described below.
RJ45 connector icon - If this icon has a red circle with a strike through it (see port J1500 in Fig-
ure 18-17), then this port is currently out-of-service (disabled). If the mouse pointer is hovered
over this icon, a tool-tip will display that indicates the port status and gives instructions for return-
ing the port to service. If the port does not have the red strike-through circle and appears as an
empty RJ45 port (see port J1501 in Figure 18-17), then the port is in-service and can be used, but
no physical link has been detected at this port. If a port has an icon that resembles an RJ45 con-
nector being inserted into the RJ45 port (see port J1400 in Figure 18-17), then the port is in-ser-
vice and a physical connection has been detected at this port. The empty and connect RJ45 icons
also provide tool-tips as to the status of the port.
Status column - This column contains simulated lamp indicators that display the current speed
and duplex status of the port. The speed may indicate 100 Mbps (mega-bits-per-second) or 10
Mbps, and the duplex setting may indicate full-duplex or half-duplex communication. The lamp
"lit" with green indicates the current speed and duplex status of the port. Each lamp also has a
popup tool-tip that explains its status.
Ports J1400 and J1500 have an additional lamp indicator (Act TL) that is lit when that port is the
active tieline. The active tieline port is the port currently being used as the communication vehi-
cle between the two units.
Config column - This column contains option buttons that indicate the current configuration of
the speed and duplex settings of the port. The port speed and duplex settings may be set to spe-
cific values (speed: 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps, duplex: full-duplex or half-duplex), or the port speed
and duplex settings can be set to Auto. When set to Auto, the port will auto-sense the speed and
duplex of the connected-to device, and set the port's operation parameters accordingly. When the
Auto option button is set, the speed and duplex option buttons will be empty. If the port configu-
ration is changed from Auto to a specific duplex setting, then a default speed will be automatically
selected based on the selected duplex settings (Half10Mbps, Full100Mbps). Likewise, if the
user changes the port configuration from Auto to a specific speed setting, then a default duplex
will automatically be selected based on the selected speed settings (10MbpsHalf,
100MbpsFull). These default speed/duplex settings can be changed to allow any combination
of speed and duplex configurations.
Ports J1401, J1402, J1501, and J1502 have a description text field that may be populated with a
short (20 characters maximum) description of the connection on that port.

Version: 01
Advanced Options
The Advanced Options button contains a menu of additional operations that can be performed on
the ethernet switch and its ports (see Figure 18-18).
Figure 18-18 Advanced Options Menu
Advanced Options Menu:

• Ethernet Switch - The Ethernet Switch menu item contains a sub-menu that allows the eth-
ernet switch, for the given unit, to be removed from service or returned to service. Because
removing an ethernet switch from service can have serious consequences concerning the
operation of the AP system, the warning and confirmation message shown in Figure 18-19
is displayed. Like all user actions performed in the Ethernet Switch Config window, this
action is not immediately transferred to the AP (see the Save function described later), there-
fore, even if the user selects the OK button on the confirmation window, they can still close
the Ethernet Switch Config window without saving their changes.
Figure 18-19 Confirm Status Change Warning
• Ports - The Ports menu item allows individual ports in the current unit to be removed from
service or returned to service.
• Show Statistics - This menu command will initiate the display of the Ethernet Switch Sta-
tistics window (see Figure 18-21).
• Refresh Status - This menu command will re-query the AP system for the current ethernet
switch status and settings, and update the Ethernet Switch Config window accordingly.
This function can also be initiated by pressing the F5 function key or by using the View |
Refresh APAC menu command.
Save Changes
The Save button is used to transfer and apply any changes made in the Ethernet Switch Config
window to the AP system. All changes made before the Save button is pressed are only recorded
in the Ethernet Switch Config window for future transfer to the AP. After the changes are trans-

Version: 01
ferred, the AP's ethernet switch settings are re-queried and the Ethernet Switch Config window is
updated with the current status. The Save button is disabled until the at least one change is made
to the switch configuration settings. Pending changes are also denoted by a * suffixed to the
Ethernet Switch Config window title. If the Ethernet Switch Config window is closed before sav-
ing any changes, the typical "save changes" message will be displayed (see Figure 18-20).
Choose Yes to close the window and save the changes, No to close the window and discard all
changes, or Cancel to close the "save changes" message and continue editing the ethernet switch
settings.
Figure 18-20 Save Changes Confirmation Message
18.9.1 Ethernet Switch Statistics
The Ethernet Switch Statistics window (see Figure 18-21) is shown when the Show Statistics
menu item is selected from the Advanced Options button on the Ethernet Switch Config window.
This window displays the statistics for all ports on a given unit (based on the unit tab selected in
the Ethernet Switch Config window, Figure 18-17, when the Show Statistics command is initi-
ated).
Figure 18-21 Ethernet Switch Statistics Window

Version: 01
Clicking the right-hand mouse button in the Ethernet Switch Statistics window will display the
popup menu shown in Figure 18-22.
Figure 18-22 Ethernet Switch Statistics Popup Menu
The following commands are available from the popup menu:

• Refresh Statistics - Re-queries the AP for the current ethernet switch statistics and updates
the display window accordingly. This function can also be invoked by pressing the F5 key
or selecting View | Refresh in the APAC menu.
• Reset Counters - Resets the ethernet switch counters to zero. This operation immediately
updates the AP (there is no "save" concept in this window). After the reset operation is
complete on the AP, the statistics are re-queried and the display window is updated.

Version: 01
To view a tool-tip containing a short description of a counter in the Ethernet Switch Statistics
window, hover the mouse pointer over the counter name. See Table 18-2 below for a complete
list of the counter descriptions.
Counter Name Description
Pkts1024to1522Octets The number of packets (including error packets) that are between 1024
and 1522 bytes long.
Pkts128to255Octets The number of packets (including error packets) that are between 128 and
255 bytes long.
511 bytes long.
1023 bytes long.
Pkts64Octets The number of packets (including error packets) that are 64 bytes long.
127 bytes long.
RxAlignmentErrors The number of packets received that have a length between 64 and 1522
bytes, inclusive, and have a bad FCS with a non-integral number of bytes.
RxBroadcastPkts The number of good packets received that are directed to the broadcast
address.
RxDropPkts The number of packets received by a port that were dropped due to lack of
resources.
RxExcessSizeDisc The number of good packets received that are greater than 1536 bytes and
were discarded due to excessive length.
RxFCSErrors The number of packets received that have a length between 64 and 1522
bytes, inclusive, and have a bad FCS with an integral number of bytes.
RxFragments The number of packets received by a port that are less than 64 bytes and
have either an FCS error or an alignment error.
RxGoodOctets The total number of bytes in all good packets received by a port.
RxJabbers The number of packets received that are longer than 1522 bytes and have
either a PCS error or an alignment error.
RxMulticastPkts The number of good packets received that are directed to a multicast
address.
RxOctets The number of bytes of data received by a port, including bad packets.
RxOversizePkts The number of good packets received that are greater than 1522 bytes
inclusive.
RxPausePkts The number of PAUSE frames received.
RxSAChanges The number of times the SA of good, received packets has changed from
the previous value. A count greater than 1 generally indicates the port is
connected to a repeater based network.
RxSymbolError The total number of times a valid length packet was received and at least
one invalid data symbol was detected.

Version: 01
Counter Name Description
RxUndersizePkts The number of good packets received that are less than 64 bytes long.
RxUnicastPkts The number of good packets received that are addressed to a unicast
address.
TxBroadcastPkts The number of good packets received that are directed to the broadcast
address.
TxCollisions The number of collisions experienced during packet transmission.
TxDeferredTransmit The number of packets transmitted for which the first transmission attempt
is delayed because the medium is busy.
TxDropPkts This counter is incremented every time a transmit packet is dropped due to
lack of resources, or an internal MAC sublayer transmit error occurs that is
not already counted in either the TxLateCollision or the TxExcessiveColli-
sion counters.
TxExcessiveCollision The number of packets that are not transmitted because the packet experi-
enced 16 transmission attempts.
TxFrameInDisc The number of valid packets received which are discarded by the forward-
ing process due to lack of space on an output queue.
TxLateCollision The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into
the transmission of a packet.
TxMulticastPkts The number of good packets transmitted that are directed to a multicast
address.
TxMultipleCollision The number of packets successfully transmitted that experienced more

than one collision.
TxOctets The total number of good bytes transmitted.
TxPausePkts The number of PAUSE frames transmitted.
TxSingleCollision The number of packets successfully transmitted that experienced exactly

one collision.
TxUnicastPkts The number of good packets transmitted that are addressed to a unicast
address.
Table 18-2 Ethernet Switch Counter Descriptions
18.10 Ethernet Trace
The Ethernet Trace feature is used to perform the following functions:

• Start and stop Ethernet traces on the AP.
• Add, edit, and delete trace filters (which are used to narrow down traces).
• Import and export trace filters.
• View a list of the ephemeral ports on both AP units.
• Email trace files.

Version: 01
• Analyze the trace output.
Note: This feature is only available for AP systems running AP software release 5.0 or greater.
To access the Ethernet Trace window, select the Tools|AP Maintenance|Ethernet Trace menu
command in APAC. The Ethernet Trace window is partitioned according to the Control (see Sec-
tion 18.10.1) and Output (see Section 18.10.2) tabs across the top of the window. The Control tab
is where trace parameters are defined and traces are started and stopped. The Output tab is where
trace files are parsed and displayed for analysis. The following sections contain more detailed
information about the functions available in these tabs.
18.10.1 Trace Control
The Control tab (see Figure 18-23) in the Ethernet Trace window is used to define trace parame-
ters, start and stop traces, view ephemeral ports, and manage trace filters.
Figure 18-23 Ethernet Trace Control Tab
The Control tab is divided into four functional sections: Trace Control, Capture, Ephemeral Ports,
and Filters. These sections are described below.
Trace Control
The Trace Control section (see Figure 18-24) is where trace parameters are selected and traces are
started, stopped, and restarted.

Version: 01
Figure 18-24 Trace Control Section
The settings and buttons in the Trace Control section are described below:
Eth PIM Check this box to capture incoming packets.
Eth POM Check this box to capture outgoing packets.
Capture GL Header Check this box to turn on capturing of the GL header.
Filter GL Header Check this box to filter on the GL header.
Ethernet Type Select the Ethernet mode(s) for which packets should be captured. Options
include 894, 1042, or Both.
Unit Select the AP unit for which packets should be captured.
Comment Enter any comments that should be included at the beginning of the trace file.
Start Press this button to begin capturing packets.
Stop Press this button to stop capturing packets. When this button is pressed, the trace
file will be transferred from the AP and placed in the "\EthernetTrace\<AP
Name>" folder of the APAC installation directory, where it can be accessed for
analysis from within the Output tab (see Section 18.10.2).
Restart Press this button while a capture is in progress to perform all of the following
actions:
1. Stop the current trace.
2. Transfer the trace file from the AP and place it in the "\EthernetTrace\<AP
Name>" folder of the APAC installation directory, where it can be accessed for
analysis from within the Output tab (see Section 18.10.2).
3. Restart the trace.
Capture
The Capture section (see Figure 18-25) is used to specify the maximum trace file size and to dis-
play the progress of ongoing traces.

Version: 01
Figure 18-25 Capture Section
The following controls and data display fields are found in this section:
Max File Size The maximum size (in bytes) to which a trace file is allowed to grow. When this
limit is reached, the AP will stop capturing packets.
File Size The current file size (in bytes) of the trace that is in progress.
Count The number of captures in the trace that is in progress.
Transfer File From AP Press this button to transfer the trace file currently on the AP to the "\Ether-
netTrace\<AP Name>" folder of the APAC installation directory, where it can be
accessed for analysis from within the Output tab (see Section 18.10.2).
Ephemeral Ports
This section contains a list of the ephemeral ports for both AP units. The list can be sorted by
clicking on any of the column headings.
Figure 18-26 Ephemeral Ports Section
Filters
The Filters section (see Figure 18-27) lists the trace filters found on both AP units and also con-
tains buttons for adding, editing, deleting, importing, and exporting filters. The list can be sorted
by clicking on any of the column headings.

Version: 01
Figure 18-27 Filters Section
The columns in the filter list are described below:
Unit The AP unit this filter is located on.
Name The name of this filter configuration in the Filter Names Manager list of the Filter window (see
Section 18.10.1). This field will be blank if this filter is not listed in the Filter Names Manager.
Eth Type The Ethernet protocol (894 or 1042) of this filter.
Offset The number of bytes this filter will start from the beginning of the Ethernet frame.
Content The filter content in hex.
The action buttons located below the filter list are described below:
Add Press this button to open the Filter window (Figure 18-28), from which a new trace filter can be
configured and added to the filter list.
Edit Select a filter and press this button to edit the selected filter in the Filter window (Figure 18-28).
Double-clicking a filter will perform the same action as selecting the filter and pressing the Edit
button.
Delete Select one or more filters and press this button to remove the selected filters from the filter list.
Import Press this button to display a standard Open window that can be used to load a trace filter file
that was created using the Ethernet Trace Export function in this or another APAC installation.
Warning: Importing a trace filter file will overwrite all of the trace parameters and filters cur-
rently defined in Ethernet Trace.
Export Press this button to save a text file containing the trace parameters and filters currently defined
in Ethernet Trace.

Version: 01
18.10.1.1 Trace Filters
The Ethernet Trace feature uses filters to narrow down traces. Filters are added and edited using
the Filter window (see Figure 18-28). The Filter window can be accessed by either clicking the
Add button in the Filters section of the Ethernet Trace window, or by selecting a filter in the same
section and pressing the Edit button.
Figure 18-28 Filter Editor Window
The left-hand side of the Filter window contains the Filter Names Manager list, which is a list of
filter settings that can be used as the base settings for a new filter or a filter that is being edited.
For more information on using the Filter Names Manager, see the Filter Names Manager sub-sec-
tion below.
The right-hand side of the Filter window is partitioned into the Basic tab (see Figure 18-30) and
the Advanced tab (see Figure 18-31). These tabs are used to configure the offset and content of
the filter that is being added or edited.
Located below the Basic and Advanced tabs are the Ethernet Type and Unit radio buttons. The
Ethernet Type radio buttons are used to select the Ethernet protocol (894 or 1042) of this filter.
The Unit radio buttons are used to specify the AP unit on which this filter will be placed.
Once all the filter settings are complete, press the OK button to save the filter to the AP, or press
the Cancel button to close the Filter window without saving any changes.
Basic Tab
The Basic tab contains a drop-down box with a list of pre-defined basic filter types (see Figure
18-29), an Offset field, and either an IP or MAC field, depending on the filter type selected in the
drop-down box. If any of the basic filters other than IP or MAC are selected, then the Offset field

Version: 01
will be populated with a pre-defined value. If IP or MAC is selected, then the Offset field will
need to have its value entered manually. The value entered in the Offset field is the number of
bytes this filter will start from the beginning of the Ethernet frame.
Once the filter type is selected, enter an IP or MAC address for this filter in the IP or MAC field,
depending on which one is displayed below the Offset field.
Figure 18-29 Pre-defined Packet Filters
Figure 18-30 Basic Tab
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab (see Figure 18-31) contains an Offset field and five Content fields. These
fields are described below:
Offset Enter the number of bytes this filter will start from the beginning of the Ethernet frame.
Content Enter up to 8 bytes for each filter Content field. Each byte must contain 2 hex characters.
Initially, only the first Content field will be enabled. When a valid value is entered into the first
Content field, the second Content field will be enabled, and so on down the line to the fifth field.
Figure 18-31 Advanced Tab

Version: 01
Filter Names Manager

The Filter Names Manager list consists of saved filter configurations that can be used as the base
settings for new filters or filters that are being edited. For example, select a filter configuration in
the Filter Names Manager list. The Ethernet Type, Unit, and values in the Basic and Advanced
tabs will be set to the values of the filter configuration that was selected in the list. Those settings
can now be adjusted and saved to the AP by pressing the OK button. Pressing the OK button only
adds a new filter or saves changes to an existing filter, and will not save changes to the settings of
the filter configuration selected in the Filter Names Manager list. Filter configurations in the Fil-
ter Names Manager list cannot be changed, they can only be added, deleted, or renamed. Those
functions are described below:
Add Filter To add a new filter configuration to the Filter Names Manager list, first set the Ethernet
Configuration Type, Unit, and values in the Basic or Advanced tab to the desired configuration. Next,
right-click in the Filter Names Manager list to invoke a popup menu, and select the Save
command from the popup menu. An Add Filter box similar to the figure below will be dis-
played.
Figure 18-32 Add Filter
Enter the name of the new filter configuration press the OK button to add the new configu-
ration to the Filter Names Manager list, or press the Cancel button to close the box without
saving the new item.
Delete Filter To delete an item from the Filter Names Manager list, right-click on the item to delete to
Configuration invoke a popup menu, and select the Delete command from the popup menu. A delete con-
firmation prompt will be displayed. Select Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion, or
select No to cancel the deletion.
Rename Filter To rename an item in the Filter Names Manager list, right-click on the item to rename to
Configuration invoke a popup menu, and select the Rename command from the popup menu. A Rename
Filter box similar to the figure below will be displayed.
Figure 18-33 Rename Filter
Enter the new name in the Filter Name field and press the OK button to save the new name,
or press the Cancel button to close the box without saving the new name.

Version: 01
18.10.2 Trace Output
The Output tab (see Figure 18-34) in the Ethernet Trace window is primarily used to analyze trace
file output. It also contains functions for emailing, deleting and opening trace files.
Figure 18-34 Ethernet Trace Output Tab
The left-hand side of the Output tab contains a list of all the trace files that are found in the "\Eth-
ernetTrace\<AP Name>" folders of the APAC installation directory. The right-hand side of the
Output tab contains three panes that are used to display information related to the trace file that is
currently selected in the list on the left-hand side of the tab. These three panes are described
below:

Version: 01
Packet Summary When a trace file is selected, its data is parsed and a summary of each packet in the trace
List file is displayed in this list, which is located in the upper-right corner of the tab. Any
packet in this list can be selected to display a further breakdown of the packet in the two
panes located below this list.
The Summary column in this list can also be customized to display additional data for
Ethernet Frame packets. To do this, right-click in the list to invoke a popup menu and
select the Customize Summary Data command in the popup. A window similar to Fig-
ure 18-35 will be displayed.
Figure 18-35 Frame Summary Filter Settings
The Frame Summary Filter Settings window contains two fields: Offset and Length.
These fields are used to determine the range of bytes that will be displayed in the Sum-
mary column for each Ethernet Frame packet. Enter values in the Offset (number of
bytes to start from the beginning of the frame) and Length (number of bytes to display
from the Offset byte) fields and press the OK button to submit the new Summary col-
umn settings.
To reset the Summary column to its default display settings, right-click in this list to
invoke a popup menu and select the Use Default Summary command in the popup.
Packet Data This pane is located in the middle of the Output tab and shows all of the data in the
selected Ethernet packet.
Packet Hex Dump This pane is located in the lower-right corner of the Output tab shows a raw hex dump
of the selected Ethernet packet, starting from the 894/1042 header.
In addition to displaying the output of trace files, as described above, the following functions may
be performed in the Output tab:
Open a Trace File not in the List

To open a trace file that is not found in the "\EthernetTrace\<AP Name>" folders of the APAC
installation directory, select the Open Trace File button located in the lower-right corner of the
Output tab. A file selection window will be displayed. Use the file selection window to locate the
trace file and press the Open button. The data from the selected trace file will be displayed in the
three panes on the right-hand side of the Output tab.
Note that any trace files opened using this method are not added to the list of trace files on the
left-hand side of the tab, and therefore it will be necessary to use the Open Trace File button to
open this trace file again if another trace file is opened or selected in the list of trace files.
Email a Trace File

Version: 01
To send one or more Ethernet trace files via email, highlight the files in the list on the left-hand
side of the Output tab and right-click in the highlighted area to invoke a popup menu. Select the
Email Trace File command in the popup menu to open the Email Address window (see Figure 18-
36).
Figure 18-36 Enter Email Address
Enter the email address of the person that will be receiving the trace file attachments and press the
OK button to send the message.
Note: The mail server settings in APAC Email Settings (accessed through the File|APAC Email
Settings menu command in APAC) must be correct before Ethernet trace files can be sent using
this function.
Delete a Trace File

To delete one or more Ethernet trace files, highlight the files in the list on the left-hand side of the
Output tab and right-click in the highlighted area to invoke a popup menu. Select the Delete com-
mand in the popup menu. A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed. Press the Yes button
in the prompt to complete the deletion, or press the No button to cancel the deletion.

Version: 01
18.11 Voice Box Options
services. The following Voice Box options can be set by selecting the Tools|AP Options menu
command and clicking on the Voice Box tab in the AP Options window:
Figure 18-37 AP Options - Voice Box
Option Description Valid Default

Values Value
VMFS Alarm The threshold at which the Voice Mail File System (VMFS) 40 - 98 70
will issue a minor alarm. Specified as a percentage of total
VMFS capacity used (from 40% to 98%).
RAM Alarm The threshold of available Random Access Memory (RAM) 128 - 512
that will trigger a minor alarm. Specified as kilobytes 5000
(Kbytes) of RAM remaining for use. If the available RAM
falls below this threshold, the alarm will be sounded. This
value must be greater than 127 Kbytes.
VMFS Lockout The threshold of Voice Mail File System (VMFS) capacity 40-98 80
used that will trigger Voice Box lockout. The Voice Box lock-
out prevents any additional Voice Box recording. Specified
as a percentage of total VMFS capacity used (from 40% to
98%).
RAM Lockout The threshold of available Random Access Memory (RAM) 128-5000 256
that will trigger Voice Box lockout. If the available RAM falls
below this threshold, the Voice Box lockout will prevent any
additional Voice Box recording. Specified as kilobytes
(Kbytes) of RAM remaining for use. This value must be
greater than 127 Kbytes.

Version: 01
Option Description Valid Default

Values Value
Simultaneous The number of voice files that can be copied concurrently 1-10 6
Copies between AP units. When this limit is reached, file copy oper-
ations are queued for later processing.
Max Unused This maximum number of days a mailbox can exist without 1-50000 180
Mailbox Reten- being accessed before it is automatically deleted.
tion
Table 18-3 Voice Box Option Descriptions
18.12 Voice Recognition
The APAC interface to voice recognition does two things: first it allows voice recognition to be
turned on or off on an AP, and it configures the connections (links) from the AP to voice recogni-
tion services. The configuration of voice recognition on the AP is done through the Voice Recog-
nition Config window (Figure 18-38). Use the following APAC menu command to access this
window: Tools | Voice Recognition Config.
Figure 18-38 Voice Recognition Config Window
The Unit 0 and Unit 1 tabs represent the two units of the AP system. The links and system-
enabled status are shown for the currently selected unit. When changing settings on one unit, this
window attempts to keep both units synchronized as best it can (i.e., if a link is added to one unit
it will be automatically added to the opposite unit if the opposite unit has room for another link).
The Voice Recognition Enabled checkbox controls whether the voice recognition system is
enabled on the AP being configured. Voice recognition can be disabled by unchecking this box
and saving, or enabled by checking the box and saving.
The Link Information section of the window shows all currently configured links and the status of
the links. Each link can be enabled by checking or disabled by unchecking the checkbox under
the Enabled column in the list.

Version: 01
Select the row of the link to be deleted and then press the Delete button to delete a link. A deleted
link will be marked as “Pending Delete” when it is deleted. A new link can be added (as long as
less than four links are already defined) by pressing the Add button. The Enter New Link Infor-
mation dialog (Figure 18-39) is displayed when the Add button is pressed.
Figure 18-39 Enter New Link Information Dialog
The Enter New Link Information dialog allows entering an IP address, a port number, and an AP
interface for a new link. The IP Address field must be a valid dotted IP address in numerical form
(i.e., 172.23.0.1). The Port number must be between 0 and 65,535. The Interface is one of the
selections in the dropdown list (one of the two Ethernet interfaces for the AP unit being config-
ured). When all items are filled in, press the OK button to add the new link to the list in the Voice
Recognition Config window.
After any changes are made in the window, the window title bar will have an asterisk ‘*’
appended to it to signify data is pending save. To save data to the AP, either press the Ctrl+S key
combination on the keyboard or use the File | Save menu command in APAC. All changed items
will be transferred to the AP at this time.
To refresh the information in the Voice Recognition Config window with what is currently on the
AP, either press the F5 key or use the View | Refresh menu command in APAC. If any changes to
data in APAC have not been transferred to the AP and the data is refreshed from the AP, a warn-
ing dialog (Figure 18-40) will be displayed.
Figure 18-40 Pending Changes Warning Dialog
If the Yes button is pressed in the warning dialog, then all untransferred changes in APAC will be
lost and the data will be refreshed from the AP. If the No button is pressed, then untransferred
changes on APAC will still be pending save and no data will be refreshed from the AP.

Version: 01

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Appendix A - Communications
Appendix A - Communications
A.1 Modem Information
If the AP is located remotely from the controlling PC, a modem can be used in place of the direct
RS-232 serial connection. Modems use telephone lines as a way of communicating between two
points.
In order to establish communication between the AP and the personal computer, two modems are
needed. One modem connects to the AP and the other modem (external or internal) connects to
the personal computer.
A.1.1 Recommended Modem
The following modem model is recommended for connecting to the AP.
Manufacturer: Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.

Model: MT2834BA
This modem supports the following features which makes it work well for this application:
• The ability to disable command mode. This allows the modem to ignore any incoming char-
acters, and not to interpret them as commands.
• Remote Configuration. This allows the modem to be configured and analyzed remotely.
• Security Features. This modem provides a callback/password security feature which
prompts the user for a password, hangs up, and calls the user back. The modem can also be
set for password security without callback. (The latter feature is effective as of APAC
release 1.2)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. may be reached at (800) 328-9717 or (612) 785-3500. For technical
support, call Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. at (800) 972-2439.
A.1.2 MultiTech Modem Setup
The easiest way to program this type of modem for communication with the AP is to directly con-
nect a PC or dummy terminal to the modem’s 25-pin terminal and programming it before con-
necting it to the AP. If a PC is used, terminal software (such as ProComm) must be used to “talk”
with the Multi-Tech OR if the APAC software is installed, you may use the AP Command Line
function (first, verify that the correct COM port and the DirectRS232 option is selected in AP
Communication Setup). See Figure A-1 below for hardware setup.
Document: 714570 A-1 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
PC
COM Port Multi-Tech Modem
Modem Cable (typically 9-25 pin) Power
Figure A-1 Setup for Modem Programming using a PC
Do not use the supplied 9 to 25-pin adapter cable to communicate with the modem as this cable is
null modem.
1. Set the DIP (Dual Inline Package) switches on the side of the MultiTech modem with
those shown below (with the exception of DIP switch #8). Verify that DIP switch #8 is in
the DOWN position. This allows the MultiTech modem to be programmed. This switch
will be placed back in the UP position when programming is complete.
DIP Switch Settings:
U = Up D = Down
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D D U U U D D U U U U D U U U U
2. Apply power to the modem.

3. Start the terminal software or enter the AP Command Line in the APAC software. When
using the AP Command Line, a message may appear indicating that communication with
the AP could not be established. Ignore this message and click Ok.
4. Verify that the PC and the modem are communicating: Type AT at the prompt. The
modem should respond with OK. Note: The letters AT precedes most commands.
5. Enter ATL5 and press <ENTER>, enter ATL6 and press <ENTER>, and enter ATL7 press
<ENTER>. The modem will respond with an output similar to the following:

Version: 01
Software Setup for the MultiTech Modem for use with the AP:
ATL5
B1 E1 M1 Q2 R0 V1 X4 &E1 &E5 &E7 &E8 &E10 &E13 &E15 %C0 #C1 *C0 &C1
$MB9600 $SB9600 $BA0 &W0
ATL6
S0 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S13 S24 S25 S30
001 043 013 010 008 002 045 002 006 007 070 037 020 000 000
ATL7
$A0 #A0 &B0 &BS1 $D0 &D2 #DB0 %DL0 $EB0 %E1 %E5 #F1 $F1 &G0 #L0 $LL0 $MI0
&M0 &P0 #P0 &Q1 $R0 &R1 &RF1 &S1 $SP0 &SF0 &T5 $T1 $V0 $V6 $VD0 &X0 Y1
$MB9600 $SB9600 $BA0 &W0
6. Change the modem’s settings to those shown above. For example, to change X0 to X4
(under ATL5), type ATX4 and enter. The modem will respond with OK. To change
$MB14400, type AT$MB9600 and enter. The modem will respond with OK. To change
the S-register S0 to equal 001, type ATS0=1. The modem will respond with OK. To ver-
ify that the changes have been made, simply type ATL5, ATL6, or ATL7 to view the new
settings.
NOTE: Some additions or deletions to the settings above may be noted. This is
due to revisions in the modem’s firmware.
7. If the callback/password security feature is to be used, this may be programmed at this

time as well. (If desired, this may be done at a later time through the APAC software
using the MultiTech modem’s remote programming feature. This will require APAC
release 1.2 or later. See Section A.1.5.)
8. Type AT&W0 (W-zero) to save changes to the modem settings. The modem will respond
with OK.
9. Place DIP switch #8 in the UP position.
10. Cycle the power on the MultiTech modem to reset.
A.1.3 PC Modem
The modem used in the personal computer must be a standard V.32 compatible modem. It must
be able to communicate at a rate of at least 9600 bps.
The initialization string used to set up the PC modem should be similar to the following:
ATE1Q0V1X4
This string should be specified in the AP Communication Setup of the APAC Software. It can be
broken down as follows:
AT - Attention command to modem

E1 - Enables characters to be echoed on the screen

Version: 01
Q0 (Q Zero)- Generates result codes

V1 - Result codes are sent in English
X4 - Use extended result codes, wait for dial tone, check for busy
Although the commands shown above are fairly standard, some modems may differ. If your PC’s
modem uses a different command set for these functions (consult your PC’s modem manual), sub-
stitute the correct command for the one(s) shown above.
Follow the steps below to set up the APAC software for modem communication:
1. Start the APAC software.
2. Ensure that the correct AP site name is selected in the pull down list on the tool bar.
3. In File|AP Communication Setup, click on Modem and select the correct COM port for
your PC’s modem.
4. In the Modem Init String field, enter ATE1Q0V1X4. (The number zero follows the letter Q.)
5. In the Phone Number field, enter the telephone number of the AP modem.
6. If password/callback security is used and has been programmed into the MultiTech
Modem (Section A.1.5), enter the correct passwords into the Password fields. Leave these
fields blank if password/callback security is not used or has not yet been set up.
7. Save the changes.
Figure A-2 displays the AP Communication Setup screen as it might appear when callback/pass-
word security is used.
Figure A-2 AP Communication Setup screen
Should communication problems arise, the following commands may help and can be added to
the end of the initialization string.
??* - Enable error control

??* - Enable normal DTR operations
??* - Enable software flow control, XON/XOFF

Version: 01
*Replace the question marks with the command letters for your PC’s modem. Although the
modem may have these functions already enabled by default, consult the PC’s modem manual for
the command letters and add them to the end of the initialization string.
A.1.4 Connecting the Modem to the AP
Figure A-3 shows how the MultiTech modem connects to the AP.
Figure A-3 Modem and AP Setup
NOTE: Connect the modem to the AP using the supplied orange fiber optic cable only. Do
not use the supplied 9 to 25-pin adapter cable to communicate with the modem because it is
a null modem cable.
If desired, a local PC may be connected to J1600 of Unit 1.
IMPORTANT: The local PC should be used for AP maintenance purposes only. Unless
the remote PC and the local PC are networked and share the APAC software, database dis-
crepancies will result if the local PC is used for database maintenance.
A.1.5 Setting up Callback and Password Security
The MultiTech modem supports automatic callback and password security operation. This allows
the user to dial into the MultiTech modem, give it a password, and depending on what password
was given, the modem either connects or hangs up and dials a pre-programmed telephone number
to complete the communications link. The major reason for using this feature is for security. In
order to establish communications with the AP, it would be necessary to know the passwords. It
is also necessary to have the callback telephone number programmed in the MultiTech modem.

Version: 01
The APAC software will use the callback/password feature when both a modem password and a
callback password are specified in the AP Communication Setup. If callback/password security is
not used, both password fields must be blank. Note: Spaces are considered valid password char-
acters. Although a password field may look blank, it may have spaces present. These spaces will
cause the APAC software to expect the callback/password feature. To ensure that this field is
blank, attempt to highlight the password fields and press <delete> if any blank characters are
highlighted.
If the callback/password security feature is to be used, the passwords used must be six to ten char-
acters in length. Also, keep in mind that the passwords are case sensitive. Passwords must be set
in both the APAC software and within the MultiTech modem itself. The process for setting the
password in the modem is shown below.
1. Place DIP switch #8 in the DOWN position. Putting this switch in the down position
allows the MultiTech modem to be programmed. (DIP switch #8 need not be toggled if
programming is done remotely.)
2. Establish direct communication with the MultiTech modem using terminal software. See
Figure A-1. The AP Command Line command in the APAC software may also be used to
communicate directly with the modem. (Ensure that the correct COM port and the Direct
RS232 option is selected in AP Communication Setup first.)
NOTE: Programming may be done remotely. Establish communication
through the modems using the AP Command Line and enter %%%AT at the
prompt, and press <ENTER> (APAC release 1.2 or later). Consult the Mul-
tiTech Owner’s Manual for more information on remote configuration.
3. Once communication with the modem has been established, log into the modem using the
default log-in password (this assumes that the modem password has never been set
before). Enter the following command and default password:
AT#IMULTI-TECH
and press <ENTER>. The modem should respond with the message OK. If the modem
responds with ERROR, the password was incorrect.
NOTE: If a password has already been set in the modem, the word MULTI-
TECH will need to be replaced with the current password. Also, remember
that the password is case sensitive.
4. After the modem password has been entered correctly, type the default setup password:
AT#SMODEMSETUP

Version: 01
and press <ENTER>. The modem should respond with OK. If the password was incor-
rect, the modem will respond with ERROR. Once again, if the setup password has been
changed from the default, the word MODEMSETUP should be replaced with the pass-
word currently being used. This password is also case sensitive.
At this point, the log-in and setup passwords may be changed if the user desires. Because
the defaults are in the modem owner’s manual, and anyone can find out what they are, you
should change the codes as the first step of your setup procedure. Be sure to write them
down and remember that they are case sensitive.
a. The log-in password is set by typing:
AT#I=xxxxxxxxxx
where xxxxxxxxxx is the new log-in password. The modem should respond with OK.
NOTE: The password specified here is the same one that is entered in the
“Modem Password” field in the AP Communication Setup of the APAC
software.
b. The same is done to change the setup password. Type:

AT#S=xxxxxxxxxx
where xxxxxxxxxx is the new setup password. The modem should respond with OK.
c. To save these passwords in the modem, issue the command:
AT&W0 (W - zero)
and press <ENTER>.
5. Choose callback/password security by typing:
AT#DB2
and pressing <ENTER>. The modem should respond with something similar to the fol-
lowing:
ENTERING CALLBACK MODE,

CURRENT PHONE NUMBERS WILL BE ERASED.
CONTINUE? (Y/N)
To enter callback mode, answer ‘Y’ to this question.
The MultiTech modem allows the user to enter up to 30 different phone numbers for call-
back. Each of these 30 numbers must have a unique password. The callback password
determines which phone number is to be called. Next, enter callback numbers and pass-
words.
6. Enter the password (six to ten characters) to be used by typing:
AT#CBN0xxxxxxxxxx

Version: 01
where xxxxxxxxxx is the user password and press <enter>. Note that the character after
the ‘N’ is a zero. This number specifies which of the 30 passwords is being set (0 - 29).
The first character of the password cannot be a number.
7. Set the phone number to be called when this password is given by typing:
ATDTyyyyyyyyyyN0
where yyyyyyyyyy is the phone number to be dialed when the password for N0 is used.
Press <enter> after this operation is done. Notice again that the character after the ‘N’ is a
zero. This corresponds to the number used in step 6 (zero in this case) to specify which of
the 30 passwords to set.
If you wish to have the option of password security without callback, enter the phone
number this way:
AT-DTyyyyyyyyyyN0
The “-” character enables direct entry when the caller uses the correct password without
the callback modem having to return the call. In the AP Communication Setup of the
APAC software, the user adds the “-” character to the end of their callback password to
enable this feature.
NOTE: The “-” character is NOT included with the callback password
when it is entered into the MultiTech modem in step 6.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to program more password/phone number combinations. As an

example, the second password/phone number combination could be programmed by typ-
ing:
AT#CBN1xxxxxxxxxx
ATDTyyyyyyyyyyN1 or AT-DTyyyyyyyyyyN1
where xxxxxxxxxx is the password to be used, and yyyyyyyyyy is the phone number to be
dialed.
Telephone extensions may be used in the callback phone number, please consult the Mul-
tiTech Owner’s Manual for information.
9. Finally, save the password/phone number combinations in the modem. Type:
AT&W0 (W - zero)
and press <ENTER>.
At this point, the MultiTech modem should be in the callback/password mode. When the
MultiTech modem answers the phone, it will ask for the appropriate passwords. This pro-
cess is hidden from the user when the APAC software is used. The APAC software sends
the passwords automatically.

Version: 01
10. Move the DIP switch #8 back to the UP position.
A.1.6 Disabling Callback and Password Security
To disable automatic callback, type: AT#DB0. (Remember that if programming is not done
remotely, DIP #8 must be in the down position to program.)
The modem will respond with:
EXITING CALLBACK, PHONE NUMBERS/PASSWORDS WILL BE ERASED.

CONTINUE? (Y/N)
To exit the callback mode, respond with ‘Y’ and save the settings by typing: AT&W0 (W-zero).
A.2 X.25 Intelligent Terminal Interface
One of the ways to communicate between the PC running the AP Administration Center (APAC)
software and remote AP systems is to connect the APAC PC and the AP systems to Intelligent
Terminal Interface (ITI) ports on an existing X.25 network. Using an X.25 network as the com-
munication path provides for faster connection setup between APAC and the AP when compared
to the modem call setup. This also allows for more efficient use of network resources (i.e., the
packet network is only used when data is actually being exchanged between APAC and the AP
rather than requiring a dedicated circuit for the duration of the communication session).
The ITI ports perform the necessary conversion on the data sent between APAC and AP required
by the X.25 network. Therefore, use of the X.25 network is nearly transparent to APAC and the
AP. The APAC user must simply select the X.25 ITI Connection Method on the AP Communica-
tion Setup screen and provide the network address of the target AP system. Once this information
is provided, APAC will perform the necessary functions to set up and release a connection with
the AP through an X.25 ITI port whenever communication with the AP is required.
Before APAC and the AP systems can use X.25 ITI ports, an X.25 network administrator must
correctly configure these ports. This includes providing addresses for the ITI ports and configur-
ing the ports with the correct parameters. APAC and the AP expect the following parameters
(defined by CCITT in Recommendation X.3), shown in Table C-1, to be configured.
A.3 Terminal Server Communications
This feature allows APAC to communicate with an AP system through a LAN-based terminal
server device. Figure A-4 shows a typical network configuration, which includes two AP systems
and multiple APAC devices on the network. Note that it is a sample network configuration and
does not represent the only network configuration possible. Several terminal servers could be

Version: 01
used to accommodate AP systems in several locations. Direct RS232 connections or modem con-
nections could also be used if required. Keep in mind that if an AP is connected to a terminal
server, as shown below, optical RS232 cables may be needed to ensure Isolated Ground Zone
(IGZ) requirements are met.
AP System AP System Serial Device Serial Device
RS232 RS232
RS232 RS232
Terminal Server
Network Backbone
Other Network
APAC APAC APAC
Equipment
Figure A-4 Sample Network Configuration
APAC communicates, using the TCP/IP communication protocol, with a terminal server that is
connected to the network. Communication with an AP begins when APAC opens a session with
the terminal server. The terminal server converts subsequent TCP/IP messages to RS232 and
routes them to the correct AP system. Therefore, the terminal server must be configured properly
to determine the AP system to which the messages refer. Communication ends when APAC
closes the session with the terminal server. Since communication is always initiated by APAC,
the terminal server ports to which the APs connect should be set to host mode. Consult the termi-
nal server manual for details on configuring your specific terminal server.
NOTE: Refer to Section 2.1.1 - "Network Installation" for requirements and recommenda-
tions on network installation of APAC.
APAC must be configured to use the Terminal Server feature for each AP system connected using
the terminal server. To configure the APAC communication method for a specific AP system,
select the AP system using the scroll box on the toolbar and then select the File|AP Communica-
tion Setup... command, or right-click the connection from the APAC Map and select the Commu-
nication Settings... command. The communication setup window will appear. After selecting
Term Serv as the connection method, the window will look similar to the one shown in Figure A-
5.

Version: 01
Figure A-5 Terminal Server Communications Setup Window
From this window, the address specifier can be selected as either a network name or an IP address
by pressing the appropriate button. If the address specifier is chosen to be a network name
(Mitchell in Figure A-5), the name must be translated to an IP address by the server for the net-
work. If the address specifier is chosen to be an IP address, no further translation is needed.
The address specifier can correspond to the terminal server or to an AP system connected to the
terminal server. If the address specifier is for the terminal server, then unique TCP port numbers
are used to distinguish between AP systems connected to the terminal server (consult your termi-
nal server user manual for details on choosing TCP port numbers). If the address specifier is for
the AP system (i.e. a unique IP address is assigned to each AP system connected to the terminal
server), then the TCP port numbers do not have to be unique.
A.4 High Speed Terminal Interface
The High Speed Terminal Interface feature allows an AP to be connected directly to a TCP/IP-
based Local Area Network (LAN). Any APAC connected to the LAN can then communicate
with all LAN-connected APs using standard protocols. This type of APAC/AP communication
method has several advantanges:
• Fast connection setup/disconnect.
• High speed data transfers.
• Multiple simultaneous connections to the same AP.
Figure A-6 shows a typical network configuration, which includes 2 AP systems and multiple
APAC devices on the network. Note that it is a sample network configuration and does not repre-
sent the only possible network configuration. Direct RS232 connections or modem connections
could also be used if required.

Version: 01
AP System AP System
Network Backbone
Other Network
APAC APAC APAC
Equipment
Figure A-6 Sample LAN Configuration
APAC and the AP must be configured to use the High Speed Terminal Interface feature for each
AP system connected to the LAN. To configure the APAC communication method for a specific
AP system, select the AP system using the scroll box on the toolbar and then select the File|AP
Communication Setup... command, or right-click the connection from the APAC Map and select
the Communication Settings... command. The communication setup window will appear. If the
LAN button is disabled, then this AP has not yet been configured to use the high speed interface.
In order to use the high speed interface, several communication parameters must be set in the AP,
and APAC must be made aware of these parameter values. The Configure button is used to set
the communication parameters in the AP and record the values in the APAC database (see Section
5.8 - "AP Communications Setup" or the online help for the Configure button for more informa-
tion). Once this configuration is complete, the LAN button should be enabled and can be selected
as the connection method. After selecting LAN as the connection method, the window will look
similar to the one shown in Figure A-7.
Figure A-7 LAN Communications Setup Window

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Appendix B - Calling Name Flags
Appendix B - Calling Name Flags
A calling name delivery 'presentation flag' is associated with each calling name. The flag value is
assigned in the Insert Calling Name or Calling Name File Input process. These flags define what
actions will be taken upon delivery of this calling name to a subscriber of the calling name deliv-
ery service.
The presentation flags are defined by Telcordia document TR-NWT-001188. The valid values
are:
• Allowed
• Restricted
• Toggle
• No indication
• Deleted (Not a standard Telcordia flag)
When a calling name delivery query is made to the AP, the presentation flag assigned to the call-
ing party is returned along with the calling name text. The presentation flag interacts with the call
status, which is determined by the possible activation of CNAB (Calling Name Blocking) and
CIDS (Calling ID Delivery and Suppression) by the calling party, as well as with station and
office options. These factors determine whether the calling name is delivered to the called party.
The following table describes the Telcordia-defined interactions. However, also consult the fea-
ture documentation for your specific switch type to determine its actual operation of calling name
delivery and actions associated with the presentation flag values.
See the table on the following page.
Document: 714570 B-1 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Appendix B - Calling Name Flags
Flag Value Call Status Action

Allowed CIDS Delivery Name is Delivered
Allowed Calling Name Blocking Toggle PRIVATE
Allowed CIDS Suppression PRIVATE (No Query is made)
Allowed None Name is Delivered
Restricted CIDS Delivery Name is Delivered
Restricted Calling Name Blocking Toggle Name is Delivered
Restricted CIDS Suppression PRIVATE (No Query is made)
Restricted None PRIVATE
Toggle CIDS Delivery Name is Delivered
Toggle Calling Name Blocking Toggle UNAVAILABLE
Toggle CIDS Suppression PRIVATE (No Query is made)
Toggle None UNAVAILABLE
No Indication CIDS Delivery Name is Delivered
No Indication Calling Name Blocking Toggle UNAVAILABLE
No Indication CIDS Suppression PRIVATE (No Query is made)
No Indication None UNAVAILABLE
Document: 714570 B-2 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Appendix C - Creating Custom Announcements
Appendix C - Creating Custom Announcements
C.1 FragEdit Overview
The purpose of the FragEdit utility is to provide a relatively simple tool that allows users to easily
create custom fragments for use in Application Peripheral announcements.
Announcements on the Application Peripheral are composed of multiple sentence "fragments".

These fragments may be one or multiple word phrases that are concatenated to form a complete
announcement. For example, the announcement "We’re sorry, all circuits are busy now. Please
try your call again later" could be composed of fragments: "we’re sorry", "all circuits are busy
now", and "please try your call again later". The advantage of using fragments to build announce-
ments is that each fragment is recorded and stored once, and then can be used in many announce-
ments. Thereby decreasing the time needed to create announcements and decreasing the storage
required for the announcement audio.
Even though there is a substantial base of existing fragments, you may find that when construct-
ing a new announcement or modifying an existing announcement, you may have the need for a
fragment that does not exist in your fragment list. This is where FragEdit can be used. FragEdit
will provide the mechanism for you to create the audio for your new fragment in one of two ways:
• Record the audio for a new fragment.

• Extract a portion of audio from an existing fragment to create a new fragment.
The latter case of extracting the audio from an existing fragment is the preferred way to create a
new fragment. This option will create a new fragment in the same voice as the source fragment.
Therefore the new fragment can be used in announcements with existing fragments.
Because user-recorded fragments will have a different voice than the fragments provided by Inno-
vative Systems, they should only be used only in complete custom announcements where all user-
recorded fragments are used. User-recorded fragments may also be used as leaders or trailers to
existing announcements, where a fragment with a different voice will not affect the sound of the
announcement. For example, it may be acceptable to use a user-recorded fragment that says
"Thank-you for using ACME Telephone Company" at the end of an existing announcement as a
way of providing brand identity.
If the required phrase cannot be found in an existing fragment, and a user-recorded fragment is
not acceptable for the current fragment use, contact Innovative Systems, L.L.C. to inquire about
arrangements for creating the fragment for you.
If you are going to create a custom fragment, FragEdit is the recommended audio editor for per-
forming this task. It is designed specifically for the task of creating fragment audio files for
Application Peripheral announcements. Fragment audio is stored as a standard wave-audio file;
Document: 714570 C-3 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
however, it is required to have specific characteristics in order to be used in Application Periph-

eral announcements. Also, to create a high quality fragment, special processing is required to fil-
ter and shape the audio. FragEdit automatically ensures the new fragment file has the correct
properties and performs the audio post-processing.
C.2 How to Extract a Portion of an Existing Fragment
The best and preferred way to create a new fragment is to find an existing fragment that contains
the desired phrase, and then extract that portion of audio from the existing fragment and save it as
an independent fragment file.
1. The first step is to determine the wave-audio file name of the existing fragment that will
be used as the source for the new fragment.
a. Each fragment has a unique identification number. Use APAC’s announcement man-
agement window to locate the source fragment. The fragment’s number will be shown
along with the fragment text.
Figure C-1 Announcement Information Window
b. The fragment ID number is used as the name of the wave-audio file. For example, the
audio file for the selection above would be 264.wav. You will find the wave-audio
files in the Frags\ sub-folder of your APAC folder.
2. Run the FragEdit program and use the File | Open menu item to open the selected wave-
audio file.
3. Use the editing and audio-control functions in FragEdit to select the desired portion of the
announcement.
4. Once the desired audio portion is selected, use the File | Save As function to save the
selected portion in a new wave-audio file. The name and the location of this file is not
important at this time, just make note of the name and location.
5. Add the new fragment to the APAC fragment list. See Section 15.2 - "Fragment Man-
ager" or the on-line help for instructions.

Version: 01
C.3 How to Record a New Fragment
Before you begin, you should check your system audio-mixer control to verify your microphone
is enabled and any other settings appear correct. Note that FragEdit will use its own setting for
Quality property, so this value in the mixer is of no consequence. The system audio-mixer set-
tings can typically be accessed from your Control Panel, Multimedia program.
1. Run the FragEdit program.
2. Select the Record audio-control. As soon as this control is selected, you are recording.
3. Dictate your fragment text into your microphone. When you are finished, select the Stop
audio-control.
4. The wave-form graph will be displayed. Use the FragEdit editing functions to select the
desired portion of the recorded audio. For example, typically there will be quite a lot of
leading and trailing silence. This silence should be clipped off.
5. Once the desired audio portion is selected, use the File | Save As function to save the
selected portion in a new wave-audio file. The name and the location of this file is not
important at this time, just make note of the name and location.
6. Add the new fragment to the APAC fragment list. See Section 15.2 - "Fragment Man-
ager" or the on-line help for instructions.
C.4 Editing Functions
The FragEdit editing functions provide the ability to select a consecutive portion of audio and clip
off unwanted leading and trailing portions. In the example shown below, the brightly colored sec-
tion between the vertical white lines is the "selected" audio. The dimly colored sections outside
of the vertical white lines are the "clipped" sections.

Version: 01
Figure C-2 FragEdit
To change the selected audio use one of the following methods:

• Move the mouse pointer over either the Begin or End Pointer. Press and hold the left mouse
button down. Drag the pointer (by moving the mouse left or right) to the desired horizontal
location. Release the left mouse button to terminate the drag operation.
• Put the mouse pointer in the audio graph area. To change the begin location, press and hold
the left mouse button down. The Begin Pointer and the begin vertical white line will snap to
the current mouse cursor location. With the left mouse button still pressed, you can drag the
begin location to the desired point. Release the mouse button to terminate the begin location
drag operation. To change the end location, press and hold the right mouse button down.
The movement of the end location is the same as moving the begin location, only using the
right mouse button.
Note that you cannot move the begin location past the left side of the window or to the right of the
end location. Likewise, you cannot move the end location past the right side of the window or to
the left of the begin location.
In order to determine if you have the desired audio selection, you can select the Play audio-control
at any time. The Play function will play only the currently selected audio.
C.5 Audio Controls
The playback and record audio controls are positioned in a toolbar at the top of the FragEdit win-
dow. The controls are shown and described below.

Version: 01
Figure C-3 FragEdit Audio Controls
Play Playback the selected audio.
Pause Temporarily suspend the playback or recording. Press Pause again to

resume playback or recording.
Stop Terminate the playback or recording. Subsequent Play or Record com-

mands will start from the beginning.
Record Record new audio.
Recording Indicator Displays red text when recording mode is active.
Recording Time Display the elapsed time the recording mode as been active.

Version: 01

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Appendix D - Warnings
Appendix D - Warnings
• All applications on the PC must be closed before installing the APAC Software.
• Watch for error messages that occur during the software installation. If errors occur, the
software may not be properly installed.
• The installation or presence of programs on the PC that will be used for AP Administration
may adversely affect the operation of the APAC Software.
• Do not remove power from a unit or perform a Restart while saving data to nonvolatile
memory. Doing so will corrupt the firmware.
• Shut down the file system before removing power from a unit. Failure to do so may corrupt
the file system.
• Do not remove power from both units of a system that is in service at the same time. Data-
bases that are kept in the system will be lost.
Document: 714570 D-1 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Appendix D - Warnings
Document: 714570 D-2 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
APAC Software Manual - Release 5.0 Index
Index
A Test Announcement tab 245
Testing Announcements 251
Access Privileges 44 Update 238
Access Transport Parameter 171 Working Set 237
Active T1 Connection 155 Announcement Definition 244
Add Calling Name GTT command 101 Announcement Fragments 249
Add Calling Name GTT to Generic GTT Tables 97 Announcement Number Length 165
Adding Announcement Parameters 246, 249
A New AP 23, 46 Announcement Properties 250
A New User 22, 43 Announcement Repeat Count 166
Calling Name Information 99 Announcement Report 243
CLASS GTT Entries 91 Announcement Text 250
Customer-Made Sound Files 240 Announcement Type 166
Add-ons 232 Announcements 74, 75, 190, 203, 3
Administrative Phones 138 AIN 251
Advanced Intelligent Network 175 Announcement Builder 237
AIN Creating 250
See Advanced Intelligent Network Creating New 238
AIN Point Code 98 Defining Parameters 245
AIN Translation Type 98 Importing 216
AIN trigger 225 Listening to 251
Alarm List 290 Modifying an Existing 238
Alarm Notification Sound Playback Options 262
Customizing 291 Playing 251
Alarm Summary Indicators 290 Releasing 238
Alarms Report 243
AP 289 Standard/CLASS 251
Clearing 291 Transfer 74
Sounding Audible 291 Version 281
AMA 226 AP 190, 204, 286, 295
See also Automatic Message Accounting Alarm Status 289
ANA 157 Backing Up 289
See also Automatic Number Announcement Direct Access Functions 283, 284
Announcement Builder Scheduling Automatic Backups 269
Announcement Builder Library Window 237 Setting the Time 141
Announcement Fragments 249 AP Alarm Status 289
Announcement Parameters 246, 249 AP Backups 289
Announcement Properties 250 Scheduling 289
Announcement tab 245, 249 AP Calling Name Dip Count Auto-Logging 118
Announcement Text 250 AP Command Line 283
Creating a New Announcement 238 AP Communication Setup A-1
Creating Announcements 250 AP Communications Configuration 59
Creating New Parameters 248 Services Configuration 67
Defining Parameters 245 AP Direct Access Functions
Fragment Manager 239 AP Backups 289
Get 238 AP File Manager 284
Main Announcement Builder window 245 AP DRA Number 166
Modifying an Existing Announcement 238 AP File Manager 284
Parameter Action 247 AP Maintenance
Parameter Conditions 247 Ethernet Trace 304
Parameter Definition tab 245 Show Alarms 289
Parameter Type 246 Trunks... 292
Released 237 AP Options
Released and Working Set Sections 237 Announcement Playback 262
Releasing Announcements 238 Call Management Features 138
Document Number: 714570 Index-1 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Version: 01
Calling Name 135 C

Global Title Translation 98
MWI Options 65 Call Control 166
Trunk Timing 177 Call Management Features 72, 137
Voice Box 315 AP Options 138
AP Scheduling 269 Backup 73, 139
AP Site Name 48 Customer Information Window 137
AP Software 78, 79, 80 Database 27
AP System Description 1 Options 138
AP Transfer 42, 71 Restore Database 140
Configure DSP and Transfer Software to AP 80 Calling Name
Reload All Announcements to AP 75 Access Control 126
Reload All Base Fragments to AP 77 Adding an Entry 102
Reload All Fragments to AP 77 Adding an NPA-NXX 99
Reload DSP Software to AP 82 AP Options 135
Service Data from AP 72 Audit 113
Service Data to AP 71 Audit Window Description 114
Transfer 6811 Software to AP 79 Calling Name Dip OPCs 116
Transfer File to AP 83 Dip OPCs 116, 130
Transfer New Announcements to AP 74 Discrepancies 114
Transfer New Fragments to AP 76 Export to file 274
Transfer Program File to AP 78 File Input 103
Transfer ROM Software to AP 78 File Input Format 105
APAC Databases 1 Flags B-1
APAC Schedule History Information 108
Viewing 267 Internet Expansion 122
APAC Scheduler IP Delivery 131
Input and Output from Scheduled Functions 266 List 106, 108
Log Files 265 Mate AP System 87
Scheduling APAC Functions 263 Modifying and Deleting Entries 108
Status 267 Report 108
Turning the Scheduler On and Off 267 Report Options 109
Application Peripheral CD-ROM 217 Calling Name Delivery 99
Audible Alarm Notification 291 Calling Name Dip Count Report 119
Audio Controls 6 Calling Name File Input 266
Audit Fragments 279 Calling Name GTT 100
Automatic AP Backups 269 Calling Name Internet Expansion 122
Automatic Message Accounting 226 Carrier Code 139
Automatic Number Announcement 157, 175 Change Log 269
Auxiliary Voice 81 Change Number Announcement 159, 175, 185
Change Number Announcement Data
Updating 185
B Change Number Announcement Peg Counts
Report 186
Back up Tables 198 Changing
Backing Up APAC’s database 271 Table Entries 221
Backing Up the AP 269 Changing Calling Name NPA 275
Backing-up service data 73 CIC (Circuit Identification Code)
Backup 73 Pane 171
Backup APAC Data To AP 264, 266 Trunk Status 294
Backup CMF Database 139 City/State
Backup to AP Disk 198, 218 Entries 104
Backups 289 File Input 104
AP 269, 289 File Input Format 106
Tables 218 Report 111
Boot pointers 78 CLASS GTT 91
Building Adding an Entry 91
Announcements 237, 249 Point Code 98
Business Group ID 102, 114 CLASS Subsystem Number 93

Version: 01
CLASS Translation Type 93, 98 Defining

Clean-up Calling Name Database 272 Announcement Parameters 245
Clearing Delete
Alarms 291 Services from AP or APAC database 194
Multiple Alarms 291 Delete an entry 29
CMF 73, 74, 137 Deleting
See also Call Management Features Calling Name Entry 108
CNA 185 CLASS GTT Entries 92
See also Change Number Announcement CMF Information 137
Command Line 283 Fragments 239
See also AP Command Line History Information for Calling Name 272
Communication Setup 1, A-1 selected object from AP or APAC database 218
Communications T1 connection 156
Configuring 59 Trunk Group Members 158
LAN - High Speed Terminal Interface 58, A-11 Trunk Groups 159
Modem Information 56, A-1 Users of APAC 46
Settings 23, 47 Deploying Services
Terminal Server 58, A-9 Additional Options 230
X.25 Intelligent Terminal Interface 56, A-9 AMA Service Logic Program ID 226
Communications Setup 54 Assign Subsystem Number 225
Compress Database 277 Global Title 225
Concerned Point Code List Service Logs 228
Updating 118 Service Selection 224
Configuring Service Summary 231
AP Communications 55, 59 Service Tables 227
AP's Time 144 Description 166
ISUP Trunk Groups 167 Digital Signal Processor 80
Services Configuration 67 See also DSP
Trunks 155 Dip Counts 120
Confusion Message 170 Direction 165
Conventions 21, 27 Document History i
Conversion for NPA Split 275 DSP 80, 82
Peforming the NPA Change 276 DSP software 82
Requirements 275
Converting
CLASS to Generic GTT 93 E
Creating
Editing Data 29
Announcements 250
Editing fragments 5
New Announcements 238
Editing Functions 5
New Parameters 248
Ethernet Switch
Creating Custom Fragments 3
Configuration 298
Custom Announcements 3
Ethernet Switch Statistics 301
Ethernet Trace 304
D EWSD Announcements
Automatic Number Announcement 176
Data Transfer Rate 87 Change Number Announcement 176
Database Files 27 Std/Class/AIN 175
Database Maintenance Examine
Change Calling Name NPA 275 Fragments 279
Clean-up Calling Name Database 272 Expansion Point Code 96
Compress Database 277 Exporting Calling Names 274
Export Calling Names to a File 274 Extracting a Portion of an Existing Fragment 4
Fragment Audit 279
Repair Database 278
DCO Announcements 175 F
Dedicated Announcements 173, 175
Far-end Point Code 169
Default Announcement Number 166
File Input for Calling Name 103
Default CNA Announcement 166
File Input for City/State 104

Version: 01
File Input Format ISUP Trunk Group Properties window 167

Calling Name 105 ISUP Trunk Services 176
City/State 106
Flags 102, B-1
FragEdit Overview 3 L
Fragment Audit 279
LAN 3, 48, 58, A-11
Fragment Manager 239
License Code 25, 48
Fragment Report 241
License Management 48
Fragments 76, 77, 3
Linkset Configuration 87
Audit 279
Linkset Route Management 90
Files 280
List Data
ID 280
Definition 220
Importing 216
Load 288
Managing 239
Local Area Network 3, 48, 58, A-11
Report 241
Lock Status 193
Size 280
Locking a service 211
Log Files 265
G Logging In 21, 27
Login ID 21, 22, 27
General Announcements 159, 176 Logs 190, 199, 230
Generic GTT 94, 96, 98, 100 Stop Logging 200, 206
Defining 94 Unlocking 212
Get AP SLP Status 223 Wrap 200, 206
Getting Started 21
Global Title Translation 91
Convert CLASS to Generic 92 M
See CLASS GTT or Generic GTT
Making a log or service unavailable 211
Global Title Value 95
Managing
GTT 91, 225
Files Stored on AP 284
See CLASS GTT or Generic GTT
Map Number 93, 95, 96, 226
Guard Time 169
Master PC 143
See Point Code
H Mate AP System 87
Mate unit 288
High Speed Terminal Interface A-11 MF 164
History Information 108 See Multi-Frequency
Hold 103 Modem 1, 3, A-1
Hop Count 170 AP Communication Setup 56, A-4
How to extract a portion of an existing fragment 4 Connecting to the AP A-5
How to record a new fragment 5 PC modem A-3
PC Modem, Initialization String A-3
Recommended Modem A-1
I See also MultiTech Modem
Modify an entry 29
Importing
Modifying
Fragments 216, 239
Calling Name Entries 108
Fragments, Announcements, and Tables 216
CLASS GTT Entries 92
Service Logic Programs 216
CMF Information 137
Services 216
Existing Announcements 238
Tables 216
User Access Privileges 46
Importing SLPs for the AP CD-ROM 217
Monitor Interval 291
Input and Output from Scheduled Functions 266
Monitoring
Insert Menu 29
AP Alarms 289
Install APAC 5
Multi-Frequency 160
Network 5
MultiTech Modem A-1
IP Delivery 131
Automatic Callback A-1
Called Numbers 133
Callback Passwords A-6
ISUP Parameters Pane 167
Callback, Disabling A-9

Version: 01
Changing Passwords A-7 Querying Single Table Entry 215

Command Mode A-1
DIP Switch Settings A-2
Internal Settings A-3 R
Password Security without Callback A-8
Reading
Programming A-1
Calling Name Dip Counts 266
Remote Configuration A-1, A-6
SLP Log 266
Setting Up Callback A-5
Reading Logs 213
MWI Options 65
Receive Continuity Tone 171
Recording a new fragment 5
N Re-deploying
Service 222
Network Installation 5 Released and Working Set Sections 237
New user 43 Releasing
NPA 275 Announcements 238
NPA Split 275 Reloading all announcements to AP 75
NPA-NXX, Adding Calling Name 99 Repairing a corrupt Database 278
NPA-NXX, Adding SMDI/MWI 62 Report
NPA-NXX, Service NPA-NXX Mappings 233 Fragment 241
NPA-NXX, SMDI Configuration 63 Reports
Announcements 243
APAC Schedule 267
O Calling Name 108
Calling Name Dip Count 119
Online help 192
Change Number Announcement Peg Counts 186
OPC 116, 121
City/State 111
Global Title Translations 97
Trunk Group 159
P Resizing
Parameter 248 Table Entries 221
Parameter Action 247 Restart 287, 288
Parameter Conditions 247 Restart button 288
Parameter Type 246 Restart command 288
Parameters 245 Restore CMF Database 140
Part Number 189 Retrieve
Password 21, 22 Current AP SLP Status 223
Peg Counts 186, 188 Trunk Configuration Data 156
Pending 103 Right Mouse Button 29
Performing an AP Backup 269 ROM chip 79
Performing the NPA Change 276 ROM Load 78
Playing RS-232 2
Announcements 251 RS449 86
Fragments 239 Run
Point Code 86, 116, 119, 142 SLP 222
AP 85
Origination 116
See also OPC S
Program File 78
6811 Processor 79
Program Load 288
Saving data 30
Project 190, 192
Say Fragment 247
PSTN 155, 156
Say Value 247
See also Public Switched Telephone Network
Scheduling
Public Switched Telephone Network 155
AP Backups 269, 289
AP Transfers 263
APAC Functions 263
Q Backup APAC Data To AP 264
Querying CMF Info 138 Selected AP 48
Selecting

Version: 01
AP's Time Zone 144 ID 226

Service Descriptions 174 ISUP 167
Service Logic Deployment Wizard 223 Transfer Service Logic Data 73
Service Logic Management 189 See also Service Logic Program
Announcements 190, 203 SMDI
APs 190, 204 NPA-NXX Configuration 62
APs Details 205 Serial Port Settings 60
APs Tab Commands 207 Speed Call Codes 139
Backup to AP Disk 218 SS7 85
Delete 194, 218 SS7 Link 86
Delete a table 198 SS7 Maintenance 295
Delete logs 202 SS7 Network 85, 295
Delete tables, services, or logs 209 AP's Point Code 85
Description 193, 197, 201, 204, 207 Calling Name 87
Get AP SLP Status 208 CLASS 87
Import SLP 195, 199, 202, 204, 210, 216 CMF 87
Lock 208, 211 Configuring the SS7 network parameters 85
Log Details 200 Data Transfer Rate 87
Logs 190, 199 Far-end Point Code 86
Logs Tab Commands 200 Linkset Configuration 87
Modify Table Data 195, 197, 208 Linkset Route Management 90
More Information 194, 197, 201, 204, 207, 210 Method of Transport 86
Part Number 189 RS449 86
Query Single Entry 198, 215 SRP/STP 86
Read Log 201, 209, 213 SS7 Links 86
Re-deploy Service 195, 209 Subsystem Numbers 87
Resize Table 198 Switch Time Monitor 87
Resize Table Entries 221 T1 Channel 86
Retrieve Data from AP 199, 210 Translation Types 87
Services 190, 192 SS7 Signaling Point Code Addresses 94
Services Tab Command Descriptions 193 Standard/CLASS 176
Shut-down 194, 202, 208, 211 Standby T1 Connection 155
Tables 190, 195 Start Type 165
Toolbar Buttons 190 Status 102
Transfer Data to AP 198 Status Bar 27
Transfer SLP 194, 202, 204, 209 Subsystem Number 96, 193
Unlock 194, 201, 208, 212 Switch Time Monitoring 142
View 207, 210, 212 Configuring in the Application Peripheral 142
View documents or reports 195 Configuring in the Switch 143
Service Logic Program 73, 85, 189, 192, 212 Synchronizing
Importing 216 Announcements 279
Operational Status 223 Fragments 279
Service Logs 228 System Requirements 2
Service NPA-NXX Mappings 233 Additional Requirements 2
Service Tables 227
Services
Descriptions 174 T
Re-deploy 222
T1 85
Tab Descriptions 193
T1 Channel 85, 86
Unlocking 212
T1 circuits 292
Services Configuration 67
T1 Configuration 155
Set AP Time 141
T1 Connection
Shutdown AP Units 286
Active 155
Shutting down an object 211
Delete 156
SIP Configuration 178
Standby 155
Enable Service 68
T1 Synchronization 141
Site Name 48
Tables 190, 195, 227
SLP 85, 192, 286
Back up 198
Child 190

Version: 01
Backing Up 218 Turning the Scheduler On and Off 267

Importing 216
Querying a Single Entry 215
Resizing Table Entries 221 U
Temporary Outage 287
Unlocking a log or service 212
Term Serv 3, 47, 58
Updating
Terminal Server 3, 47, 58, A-9
Change Number Announcement data 185
Testing
Announcements 251
Time 142
Setting in Application Peripheral 141
V
T1 synchronization 141 value 96
Time Monitoring View Menu 29
See Switch Time Monitoring Viewing
Toll Restriction 176 APAC Schedule 267
Tone Detector 81 documents or reports 212
Tone Detector software 82 more information about an SLP 210
Toolbar Buttons 28 selected item's (Service) description 210
Transferring Viewing Data 29
All Service Data to AP 140 Voice Box Options 315
File to AP 83 Voice Processor 81
Service Data from AP 266 Voice Recognition 316
Service Data to AP 266
Services 223
Trunk Configuration Changes 156 X
Trunk Configuration Data 156
Translation Type 96, 225 X.25 Intelligent Terminal Interface 3, 56
Transmit Continuity Tone 171 X.25 ITI 3, 47
Trunk Configuration 155 See also X.25 ITI Information
ISUP Trunks 167 X.25 ITI Information A-9
SIP Configuration 178
Trunk Groups 158
Trunk Services 158
Unit 0 157
Unit 1 161
Trunk Group 165
Trunk Group CIC Pane 171
Trunk Group Configuration Report 162
Trunk Group Status 292
Trunk Groups 292
Associated Services with 159
Trunk Key Pulse Digits 165
Trunk Service Window 167
Announcements 164
ISUP SLP 167
Trunk Services 158, 164
AIN 175
ANA 175
CNA 175
DCO Announcements 175
Dedicated Announcements 175
EWSD Announcements 175
General Announcements 176
ISUP 176
Standard/CLASS 176
Trunk Services Property Window 164
Trunk Start and Stop Digits 160
Trunk Start Digits 165
Trunk Timing 177

Version: 01

Version: 01

APAC Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

APAC Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Application Peripheral Administration Center

APAC Software Manual

Innovative Systems, L.L.C. Mitchell, South Dakota

Version Changes Release Date

 2004 Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Printed in United States of America.

Information subject to change without notice.

Document: 714570 -i- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Document: 714570 -ii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Chapter 1 - Introduction ........................................................ 1

Chapter 2 - Installing the APAC Software ................................. 5

Chapter 3 - Getting Started .................................................. 21

Chapter 4 - Getting Around APAC ........................................ 27

Chapter 5 - APAC Administration ......................................... 43

Document: 714570 -iii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

5.2 Adding a New AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Chapter 6 - AP Transfer ...................................................... 71

Chapter 7 - SS7 Network ...................................................... 85

Document: 714570 -iv- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Chapter 8 - Global Title Translation ...................................... 91

Chapter 9 - Calling Name Delivery and Dip Counts .................. 99

Chapter 10 - Call Management Features (CMF) ...................... 137

Document: 714570 -v- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Chapter 11 - Time .............................................................. 141

Chapter 12 - Trunk Configuration ........................................ 155

Chapter 13 - CNA Service Management ................................. 185

Chapter 14 - Service Logic Management ................................ 189

Document: 714570 -vi- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

14.5.1 Log Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Chapter 15 - Announcement Management ............................. 237

Document: 714570 -vii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

15.3 Announcement Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Chapter 16 - Scheduling ...................................................... 263

Chapter 17 - Database Maintenance ...................................... 271

Document: 714570 -viii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

17.6 Compress Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Chapter 18 - AP Maintenance Functions ................................ 283

Appendix A - Communications ............................................. A-1

Document: 714570 -ix- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

A.4 High Speed Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

Appendix B - Calling Name Flags ......................................... B-1

Appendix C - Creating Custom Announcements ......................... 3

Appendix D - Warnings ...................................................... D-1

Document: 714570 -x- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Chapter 1 - Introduction ........................................................ 1

Chapter 2 - Installing the APAC Software ................................. 5

Chapter 3 - Getting Started .................................................. 21

Document: 714570 -xi- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Figure 3-7 Set AP Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Chapter 4 - Getting Around APAC ........................................ 27

Chapter 5 - APAC Administration ......................................... 43

Chapter 6 - AP Transfer ...................................................... 71

Document: 714570 -xii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Figure 6-9 Patch Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 7 - SS7 Network ...................................................... 85

Chapter 8 - Global Title Translation ...................................... 91

Chapter 9 - Calling Name Delivery and Dip Counts .................. 99

Document: 714570 -xiii- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Figure 9-25 Calling Name Dip OPCs Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 10 - Call Management Features (CMF) ...................... 137

Chapter 11 - Time .............................................................. 141

Chapter 12 - Trunk Configuration ........................................ 155

Document: 714570 -xiv- Innovative Systems, L.L.C.

Figure 12-17 Add New SIP to DN Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182